SV8100 - VM8000 In-Mail System Guide

SV8100 - VM8000 In-Mail System Guide
Notice
Note that when converting this document from its original format to a
.pdf file, some minor font and format changes may occur. When
viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your
specific PC or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics.
Therefore, when you view the document, fonts may be substituted and
your individual printer may not have the capability to print the
document correctly.
®
VM8000 INMAIL SYSTEM GUIDE
INT-2046
Issue 8.0
NEC Corporation of America reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at
any time without notice.
NEC Corporation of America has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers.
The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation of America and shall not be
reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Corporation of America.
UNIVERGE is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. Pentium is a trademark or registered
trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. All other
brand names and product names referenced in this document are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright 2012
NEC Corporation of America
6535 N. State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
Communications Technology Group
TABLE OF CONTENTS
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 1
Quick Setup
Section 1
Install the VM8000 InMail Blade ............................................................... 1-1
Section 2
Upgrade the VM8000 InMail Blade ......................................................... 1-3
Section 3
LED Indication ......................................................................................... 1-4
Section 4
Start-up (Default) VM8000 InMail Configuration ..................................... 1-4
Section 5
Basic Functions without Main Greeting ................................................... 1-5
Section 6
Enable the Mailboxes for all Installed Extensions ................................... 1-5
Section 7
Set Up Automated Attendant to Answer Outside Calls ........................... 1-6
Section 8
Set Up Simple Day/Night Answering ....................................................... 1-8
Section 9
VM8000 InMail System Requirements .................................................... 1-8
Section 10 Specifications .......................................................................................... 1-9
Section 11 Examples of Common Applications ........................................................ 1-9
Chapter 2
Features
Section 1
Introduction to VM8000 InMail Features .................................................. 2-1
Section 2
Feature Glossary ..................................................................................... 2-2
Section 3
Feature Descriptions ............................................................................. 2-10
ACD Delay Announcement ..................................................................... 2-11
Announcement Mailbox ........................................................................... 2-15
Announcement Message ........................................................................ 2-21
Answer Schedule Override ..................................................................... 2-23
Answer Table .......................................................................................... 2-27
___________________________________________________________________________________
InMail System Guide
i
Issue
8.0
VM8000
___________________________________________________________________________________
Automatic Access to Voice Mail by Caller ID .......................................... 2-35
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail ........................................................ 2-41
Auto Erase or Save ................................................................................. 2-43
Auto Time Stamp .................................................................................... 2-45
Automated Attendant .............................................................................. 2-47
Automated Attendant Transfer ................................................................ 2-51
Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers .............................................. 2-53
Call Forward to a Mailbox ....................................................................... 2-55
Caller ID .................................................................................................. 2-59
Caller ID with Return Call ........................................................................ 2-61
Calling the Automated Attendant ............................................................ 2-63
Cascade Message Notification ............................................................... 2-64
Dial Action Table ..................................................................................... 2-89
Directory Dialing ...................................................................................... 2-95
Directory Dialing Mailbox ...................................................................... 2-107
Distribution List ..................................................................................... 2-109
Email Notification .................................................................................. 2-113
Erasing All Messages ........................................................................... 2-133
Exiting a Mailbox ................................................................................... 2-135
External Transfer .................................................................................. 2-137
Fax Detection ........................................................................................ 2-139
Find Me Follow Me ................................................................................ 2-141
Flexible Answering Schedules .............................................................. 2-149
Flexible Call Routing ............................................................................. 2-151
Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan ......................................................... 2-153
Forced Unscreened Transfer ................................................................ 2-157
Getting Recorded Help ......................................................................... 2-159
Go To A Mailbox ................................................................................... 2-161
Greeting ................................................................................................ 2-163
___________________________________________________________________________________
ii
Table of Contents
VM8000
Issue 8.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
Group (Shared) Mailbox ........................................................................ 2-169
Guest Mailbox ....................................................................................... 2-177
Hang Up ................................................................................................ 2-181
InMail Upload Download Audio ............................................................. 2-183
Instruction Menu .................................................................................... 2-203
Language Setting .................................................................................. 2-205
Leaving a Message ............................................................................... 2-209
Listening to Messages .......................................................................... 2-213
Live Monitor ........................................................................................... 2-217
Live Record ........................................................................................... 2-219
Log On to Voice Mail ............................................................................. 2-221
Mailbox Announcement Message ......................................................... 2-225
Mailbox Name ....................................................................................... 2-229
Mailbox Options Menu .......................................................................... 2-233
Mailbox Security Code Delete ............................................................... 2-235
Main Menu ............................................................................................ 2-237
Make Call .............................................................................................. 2-239
Message Count Display ........................................................................ 2-243
Message Delete .................................................................................... 2-245
Message Forward ................................................................................. 2-247
Message Length .................................................................................... 2-249
Message Listen Mode ........................................................................... 2-251
Message Notification ............................................................................. 2-253
Message Playback Direction ................................................................. 2-261
Message Record ................................................................................... 2-263
Message Reply ..................................................................................... 2-265
Message Storage Limit ......................................................................... 2-267
Message Waiting Lamp ......................................................................... 2-269
Multiple Company Greetings ................................................................. 2-271
___________________________________________________________________________________
InMail System Guide
iii
Issue
8.0
VM8000
___________________________________________________________________________________
NetLink .................................................................................................. 2-273
Next Call Routing Mailbox ..................................................................... 2-275
Park and Page ...................................................................................... 2-283
Programming Voice Mail ....................................................................... 2-291
Quick Message ..................................................................................... 2-293
Record and Send a Message ............................................................... 2-297
Remote Programming ........................................................................... 2-299
Routing Mailbox .................................................................................... 2-301
Screened Transfer ................................................................................ 2-307
Security Code ....................................................................................... 2-311
Single Digit Dialing ................................................................................ 2-315
Station Mailbox ..................................................................................... 2-317
Subscriber Mailbox ............................................................................... 2-319
System Administrator ............................................................................ 2-323
System Administrator Mailbox .............................................................. 2-325
System Re-initialization ......................................................................... 2-327
Time and Date ...................................................................................... 2-329
Time and Date Stamp ........................................................................... 2-331
Transfer to a Mailbox ............................................................................ 2-333
Undefined Routing ................................................................................ 2-335
Unscreened Transfer ............................................................................ 2-337
Voice Mail Overflow .............................................................................. 2-341
Volume Control ..................................................................................... 2-349
Chapter 3
Programming
Section 1
Before You Start Programming ................................................................ 3-1
Section 2
Start-Up Programming (Default) ............................................................. 3-1
2.1
VM8000 InMail Configuration............................................................................. 3-2
___________________________________________________________________________________
iv
Table of Contents
VM8000
Issue 8.0
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.2
Optional VM8000 InMail Start-Up Programming ...............................................3-3
2.3
Set up Automated Attendant to Answer Outside Calls ......................................3-3
Section 3
Program 15 Extension, Basic Setup ....................................................... 3-5
Program 15-01 Basic Extension Data Set Up ........................................ 3-5
Section 4
Program 41 ACD Setup .......................................................................... 3-8
41-19 Voice Mail Delay Announcement ................................................. 3-8
Section 5
Program 45 Voice Mail Integration ....................................................... 3-12
45-01 Voice Mail Integration Options ................................................... 3-12
Section 6
Program 47 VM8000 InMail .................................................................. 3-14
47-01 VM8000 InMail System Options ................................................. 3-14
47-02 VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options .................................... 3-24
47-03 Group Mailbox Options ............................................................... 3-34
47-06 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options ............................................ 3-37
47-07 VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options ................................... 3-45
47-08 Routing Mailbox Call Routing Options ........................................ 3-48
47-09 Announcement Mailbox Options ................................................ 3-51
47-10 VM8000 InMail Trunk Options .................................................... 3-54
47-11 VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options ....................................... 3-57
47-12 VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules ............................................. 3-61
47-13 VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables ............................................. 3-71
47-15 Routing Mailbox Directory Options ............................................. 3-82
47-16 InMail Language License ........................................................... 3-87
47-17 Routing Mailbox Distribution Options – Mailbox Type ................ 3-89
47-18 VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup ...................................................... 3-90
47-19 VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup ...................................................... 3-92
47-20 Station Mailbox Message Notification ........................................ 3-93
47-21 Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options ............................. 3-95
47-22 Group Mailbox Notification Options ........................................... 3-96
47-23 Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options .............................. 3-98
Chapter 4
VM8000 InMail Utility
Section 1
VM8000 InMail Utility ............................................................................... 4-1
Section 2
Requirements .......................................................................................... 4-2
Section 3
Installing Reliant File System Driver ....................................................... 4-2
Section 4
Installing the VM8000 InMail Utility ......................................................... 4-6
___________________________________________________________________________________
InMail System Guide
v
Issue
8.0
VM8000
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 5
Chapter 5
Using VM8000 InMail Utility .................................................................... 4-8
Soft Key Glossary
___________________________________________________________________________________
vi
Table of Contents
LIST OF FIGURES
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 1-1
CPU without InMail Daughter Board (PZ-VM21) and CompactFlash ............................ 1-2
Figure 1-2
InMail Daughter Board with CompactFlash Card Assembly Installed ........................... 1-2
Figure 1-3
Remove the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card ......................................................... 1-3
Figure 1-4
Checking LED1 ............................................................................................................. 1-4
Figure 2-1
Example – User Access to Voice Mail ......................................................................... 2-35
Figure 2-2
Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 1 .............................................................. 2-67
Figure 2-3
Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 2 .............................................................. 2-68
Figure 2-4
Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 3 .............................................................. 2-69
Figure 2-5
Email with Station Name ........................................................................................... 2-116
Figure 2-6
Email – No Station Name .......................................................................................... 2-118
Figure 2-7
Email with CID Name ................................................................................................ 2-120
Figure 2-8
Email – CO No CID ...................................................................................................2-121
Figure 2-9
PCPro and WebPro Login Screens ........................................................................... 2-291
Figure 3-1
ACD Delay Announcement Flowchart ......................................................................... 3-11
Figure 4-1
Install Wizard for Datalight Reliance Windows Driver ................................................... 4-3
Figure 4-2
EULA Agreement Screen .............................................................................................. 4-3
Figure 4-3
Destination Folder Screen ............................................................................................. 4-4
Figure 4-4
Begin Installation Screen ............................................................................................... 4-4
Figure 4-5
Finish Installation Screen .............................................................................................. 4-5
Figure 4-6
Reboot PC Screen ........................................................................................................ 4-5
Figure 4-7
InMail Utility Install Wizard Welcome Screen ................................................................ 4-6
Figure 4-8
InMail Utility Install Wizard Install Completion Screen .................................................. 4-7
Figure 4-9
Removing the CompactFlash Card from the Blade ....................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-10
InMail Utility Main Screen .............................................................................................. 4-9
Figure 4-11
Utility Select InMail Card Screen ................................................................................. 4-10
___________________________________________________________________________________
InMail System Guide
vii
Issue 8.0
VM8000
___________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 4-12
Updated InMail Portion of InMail Utility Main Screen ..................................................4-10
Figure 4-13
InMail Utility Save As (Backup) Screen .......................................................................4-11
Figure 4-14
Backup Progress Status Screen ..................................................................................4-12
Figure 4-15
Restore Data Report Screen .......................................................................................4-12
Figure 4-16
InMail Utility Database Restore ...................................................................................4-13
Figure 4-17
Restore Message Screen ............................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-18
Manage Languages Screen ........................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-19
InMail Utility Initialize Confirmation Screen .................................................................4-16
Figure 4-20
InMail Utility Initialization Progress Screen ..................................................................4-17
___________________________________________________________________________________
viii
List of Figures
Quick Setup
SECTION 1
INSTALL THE VM8000 INMAIL BLADE
The InMail CompactFlash drive must never be inserted or
removed with the chassis power on. Always turn chassis
power OFF when inserting or removing the InMail
CompactFlash drive.
1.
2.
Take adequate anti-static precautions.

Wear a grounded wrist strap at all times when installing or
removing the VM8000 InMail blade.

Ensure the wrist strap is attached to a known earth ground
(such as the earth ground lug on the CHS2U-US).

Discharge any built-up static electricity by touching the cabinet
earth ground lug.
1
Install four plastic stand-offs included with the VM8000 InMail blade
before installing the CompactFlash card assembly.

Locate stand-offs as shown in Figure 1-1 CPU without InMail
Daughter Board (PZ-VM21) and CompactFlash on page 1-2.

Be sure to install the stand-offs from the back (underneath) side
of the blade.
3.
Install the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash card assembly face up as shown
in Figure 1-2 InMail Daughter Board with CompactFlash Card Assembly
Installed on page 1-2.
4.
Insert the VM8000 InMail blade into the CN4 connector on the CPU.

InMail System Guide
Chapter
Position the VM8000 InMail blade over the CN4 connector —
then push the blade into the connector on the CPU.
1-1
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Figure 1-1 CPU without InMail Daughter Board (PZ-VM21) and CompactFlash
Figure 1-2 InMail Daughter Board with CompactFlash Card Assembly Installed
1-2
Quick Setup
VM8000
SECTION 2
Issue 8.0
UPGRADE THE VM8000 INMAIL BLADE
The InMail CompactFlash drive must never be inserted or removed with
the chassis power on. Always turn chassis power OFF when inserting
or removing the InMail CompactFlash drive.
The VM8000 InMail software is integrated into the telephone system software. The
VM8000 InMail voice prompts and messages are stored on the CompactFlash card
that plugs into the VM8000 InMail blade. You will never have to do a separate
upgrade to get new VM8000 InMail features, but you may need to upgrade the voice
prompts stored on the CompactFlash card to activate those new features.
1.
Power down the system before removing the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash
card.

2.
Ensure the system is powered down.
Slide out the CompactFlash card. See Figure 1-3 Remove the VM8000 InMail
CompactFlash Card.

Be sure to take adequate static precautions.
Figure 1-3 Remove the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card
3.
Use the VM8000 InMail Utility Guide to upgrade the CompactFlash card.

4.
InMail System Guide
Refer to Section 1 VM8000 InMail Utility on page 4-1 for instructions on
how to upgrade the CompactFlash card.
Reinstall the CompactFlash card and power up the system.
1-3
Issue 8.0
SECTION 3
VM8000
LED INDICATION
1.
2.
Power up the system.

Remove the grounded wrist strap.

Mount the PZ-VM21 onto CD-CP00-US.

Install the CD-CP00-US in the SV8100 chassis.

Turn the chassis power switch to On.
Check the VM8000 InMail LED. See Figure 1-4 Checking LED1.

Once the system powers up, check LED1 on the InMail daughter board.
LED1 is viewable on the front panel of the CD-CP00-US.

LED1 will blink quickly only when the InMail CF is being accessed.
Figure 1-4 Checking LED1
SECTION 4
START-UP (DEFAULT) VM8000 INMAIL CONFIGURATION
When you install the VM8000 InMail blade and turn on the system, VM8000 InMail
has the following default programming:
1-4

Subscriber Mailboxes are enabled for extensions 101~164. The mailbox
numbers are the same as the extension numbers.

The Automated Attendant does not answer outside calls.

The VM8000 InMail does not answer internal calls.
Quick Setup
VM8000
SECTION 5
Issue 8.0
BASIC FUNCTIONS WITHOUT MAIN GREETING
To make the VM8000 InMail answer, the following programming must be done. The
example shown is for a 8-port VM8000 InMail. Extension, Group and Pilot Numbers
shown can be adjusted as needed per installation requirements.

47-01-17
Set first port of InMail to 25.

10-09-01
Verify at least one resource is set to ICM/TRK or Common.

11-07-01
Set TEL Group Pilot 2 to 200.
Never use Group 1, as this is the default group for all extensions.
SECTION 6

15-03-01
Set extension 125~132 to DP.

15-03-03
Set extension 125~132 to Special.

16-02-01
Put 125~132 in Group 2.

16-02-02
Assign priorities 1~8 to 125~132.

16-01-01
Set Group 2 name to VM Hunt.

16-01-10
Set Group 2 to Busy/No Answer.

45-01-01
Set to Group 2.
ENABLE THE MAILBOXES FOR ALL INSTALLED EXTENSIONS
Since by default only extensions 101~164 have Subscriber Mailboxes, you should
enable additional Subscriber Mailboxes for all installed extensions.
To enable additional Subscriber Mailboxes:
1.
In 47-02-01 Mailbox Type, enter 1 to enable a Subscriber Mailbox for each
extension.

2.
In 47-02-02 Mailbox Number, select the extension number to be associated with
the mailbox you are programming.

3.
InMail System Guide
To make programming easier, consider associating a mailbox number with a station
port. For example, mailbox 1 should correspond to port 1, which in turn corresponds
to extension 101.
Normally, mailbox 1 should use Mailbox Number 101, mailbox 2 should use Mailbox
Number 102, etc.
For phones with a Message Key, in 15-02-26 Message Key Operation Mode,
enter 1 at each extension for which you are adding a mailbox. This enables the
Message key for Voice Mail access.
1-5
Issue 8.0
SECTION 7
VM8000

You can optionally use 15-07-01 Programming Function Keys to assign a Voice Mail
programmable key (code 77).

If you don’t assign the Message key or a programmable key for Voice Mail access,
an extension user can access his mailbox by the following actions:

Press Speaker key

Dial VM8000 InMail pilot number

Dial mailbox number
SET UP AUTOMATED ATTENDANT TO ANSWER OUTSIDE CALLS
To enable Automated Attendant to answer outside calls, set up Direct Inward Lines
(DILs) and terminate them to VM8000 InMail.
Automated Attendant enables the following capabilities:


All calls are answered by Call Routing Mailbox 1 and Dial Action Table 1. This
happens because:

Answer Table 1 Runs Monday-Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM, and uses Call
Routing Mailbox 1.

At all other times, the Default Mailbox answers – also using Call Routing Mailbox 1.
Dial Action Table 1 allows outside callers to perform the following actions:

Dial system extensions (if installed).

Dial 0 for an operator (extension 101).

Dial * + Extension to leave a Quick Message in a mailbox.

Dial # + Extension to remotely log on to their mailbox.

Wait on the line to be automatically routed to the operator.
To Set up the Automated Attendant to answer outside calls:
1.
Set up trunks as Direct Inward Lines.

22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to be a DIL. Make a separate
entry for each Night Service mode.

1-6
By default, trunks are Service Type 0 (Normal).
Quick Setup
VM8000
Issue 8.0
2.
Have the Direct Inward Lines terminate to VM8000 InMail (extension 200).

22-07-01
DIL Assignment
For each trunk you designated as a DIL above, enter 200. Make a separate
entry for each Night Service mode.

3.
By default, no DIL destinations are programmed.
Review the default Automated Attendant setup.
DIL to Voice Mail Master (200)
22-01-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup
22-07-01 DIL Setup
InMail
Default
Automated Attendant Answering
Trunks Route to Answer Table 1
47-10-01 Answer Table Assignment
Answer Table 1
47-11 Answer Table Options
Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox
47-12 Answer Schedules
47-11-05 Default Mailbox
Call Routing Mailbox 1
47-08 Call Routing Mailbox Options
Dial Action Table 1
47-13 Dial Action Tables
InMail System Guide
All calls route to Call Routing Mailbox 1
Schedule 1 active M-F 8:30AM-5:00PM
Default Mailbox active all other times
From a System Administrator mailbox,
record an Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options:
Dial an extension number, or
O for the operator
1-7
Issue 8.0
SECTION 8
VM8000
SET UP SIMPLE DAY/NIGHT ANSWERING
After you set up DILs to VM8000 InMail, Call Routing Mailbox 1 answers outside calls.
This is because:

All trunks by default are assigned to Answer Table 1.

Answer Table 1, which runs Monday-Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM, uses Call
Routing Mailbox 1.

The Default Mailbox, which runs at all other times (evenings and weekends),
also uses Call Routing Mailbox 1.
To Set up simple Day/Night Answering:
SECTION 9
1-8

In 47-11-03 Default Mailbox Category and in 47-11-03 Default Mailbox Number
change the Default Mailbox for Answer Table 1 to 2.

From the System Administrator Mailbox:
1.
Dial SA + I and record a new Instruction Menu message for Call Routing
Mailbox 1.
2.
Dial SA + I and record a new Instruction Menu message for Call Routing
Mailbox 2.

Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM callers hear the Instruction
Menu message for Call Routing Mailbox 1.
Evenings and weekends, callers hear the Instruction Menu message for Call
Routing Mailbox 2.

Review the feature Automated Attendant on page 2-47.
VM8000 INMAIL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

VM8000 Software

VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Drive

PZ-VM21 Daughter Board
Quick Setup
VM8000
SECTION 10
Issue 8.0
SPECIFICATIONS
VM8000 InMail Part Numbers and Capacities
P/N 670966
VM8000 InMail 1G Drive
o
SECTION 11
(1) 64-Hour Compact Flash Card with software
P/N 670843
VM8000 InMail 16-Port License
P/N 670784
VM8000 InMail 8-Port License
P/N 670873
VM8000 InMail 4-Port License
P/N 670872
VM8000 InMail 2-Port License
P/N 670874
Language License
P/N 670103
o
Mailboxes:
Station Mailboxes = 512
Routing Mailboxes = 32
Group Mailboxes = 32
Total Mailboxes = 576
(1) PZ-VM21 Daughter Board Interface for InMail CF
EXAMPLES OF COMMON APPLICATIONS
The examples below show common applications. The chart in the beginning of each
example provides the following information:

How the relevant programmable options work by default.

The Application Summary providing the basic steps to set up the application.
Following the chart are the step-by-step instructions for setting up the application.
For more information, refer to Programming on page 3-1 in this manual, and to the
UNIVERGE SV8100 Programming Manual.
InMail System Guide
1-9
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Example 1: Set Up Separate Day and Night Greetings
Default Automated Attendant Answering
All trunks answered by the Automated Attendant route to Answer Table 1.
o
o
Answer Table 1 uses Schedule 1 to answer calls from 8:30 AM -5:00 PM Monday through Friday
with Call Routing Mailbox 1.
The Default Mailbox for Answer Table 1 picks up Automated Attendant calls at all other times. The
Default Mailbox for Answer Table 1 is also Call Routing Mailbox 1.
The greeting that plays to outside callers is the Instruction Menu for the Call Routing
Mailbox that answers the call.
Since Schedule 1 and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing Mailbox 1, the Automated
Attendant answers all calls the same way day and night, with the Instruction Menu for Call
Routing Mailbox 1.
Application Summary
Change the Default Mailbox from Call Routing Mailbox 1 to 2.
Record a night Instruction Menu for Call Routing Mailbox 2.
Change the Default Mailbox to Call Routing Mailbox 2.
47-11-03 Default Mailbox Number, change the Default Mailbox assignment to 2.
Record the daytime and night Instruction Menus.
1.
At extension 101, press Message.
2.
Dial SA (72) + I (4).
3.
Dial 001 (for Call Routing Mailbox 1) + R (7).
4.
Record the daytime Instruction Menu message + # twice.
5.
Dial I (4).
6.
Dial 002 (for Call Routing Mailbox 2) + R (7).
7.
Record the night Instruction Menu message + # + hang up.

1 - 10
See the Instruction Menu on page 2-203 in this manual.
Quick Setup
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Example 2: Provide Unique Day and Night Dialing Options for Callers
Default Dial Action Table Options
All Call Routing Mailboxes (1-8 by default) use Dial Action Table 1.
Dial Action Table 1 provides the following dial options:
o
o
o
o
o
Dial extension number.
Dial 0 for the operator.
Dial * + extension to leave a Quick Message.
Dial # + extension to do a Remote Logon to the mailbox.
Timeout to operator if no digits dialed.
Application Summary
Allow callers at night to dial 0 to leave a message for the operator.
Set up separate day and night greetings.
Following example 1, set up separate day and night Instruction Menus using Call Routing
Mailboxes 1 and 2.
1.
Example of the day Instruction Menu: Thank you for calling. For Sales,
dial 101. For Technical Support, dial 102. To talk to an operator, dial 0. If
you know your party’s extension number, please dial it now.
2.
Example of the night Instruction menu: Thank you for calling. Our normal
business hours are 8:30 to 5:00, Monday through Friday. To leave us a
message, please dial 0 now.
Assign a unique Dial Action Table (2) to the night time Call Routing Mailbox (2).
In 47-08-01 Dial Action Table, assign Dial Action Table 2 to Call Routing Mailbox 2.
Change the dialing options for the night time Dial Action Table (2).
In 47-13-01 VM8000 InMail Dial Action Table Actions for Dial Action Table 2, make the
following changes:
InMail System Guide
1.
For the digits 3 and 4, enter 0 for the Action entry to prevent callers from
dialing extensions at night.
2.
For the digit 0, change the Action entry to REC1 (by dialing 3) and the
Data entry to 101. This allows night time callers to dial 0 to leave a
message for the operator.
3.
Note that the * and # entries are left unchanged so that experienced
users can still leave Quick Messages or do Remote Logons at night.
1 - 11
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Example 3: Manual Night Mode Control of the Automated Attendant
Default Scheduling Options
There is no manual control of the Automated Attendant.
All calls answered by the Automated Attendant automatically follow the schedule set up by
Answer Table 1.
o
o
Answer Table 1 uses Schedule 1 to answer calls from 8:30 AM -5:00 PM Monday through Friday
with Call Routing Mailbox 1.
The Default Mailbox for Answer Table 1 picks up Automated Attendant calls at all other times.
The Default Mailbox for Answer Table 1 is also Call Routing Mailbox 1.
Application Summary
Set up a programmable key to switch the system into the night mode.
Assign a Group Mailbox to a virtual extension.
Have calls at night route to the virtual extension, which is Fixed Call Forwarded to voice
mail.
Set up programmable keys to switch the system into the night mode and back into
the day mode.
Night Mode
1.
At the extension that should control the system night mode, press
Speaker + 751.
2.
Press the programmable function key you want to assign as the day
(night mode 1) key.
3.
Dial 09 + 1 (for night mode 1).

You hear three confirmation beeps.

This allows the user to switch the system into the day mode (i.e., night mode 1).
Day Mode
1.
Press the programmable function key you want to assign as the night
(night mode 2) key.
2.
Dial 09 + 2 (for night mode 2).
3.
1 - 12

You hear three confirmation beeps.

This allows the user to switch the system from the day mode to night mode 2.
Press Speaker to hang up.
Quick Setup
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Allow the extension to switch the system night mode.
1.
In 20-07-01 Manual Night Mode Switching, enter 1 to enable night mode
switching in the extension Class of Service.

2.
By default, this ability is disabled.
In 20-06-01 Class of Service for Extensions, assign the extension Class
of Service.

By default, extension 101 has Class of Service 15. All other extensions have
Class of Service 1.
Set up a Group Mailbox as a Call Routing Mailbox.
1.
In 11-07-01 Department Group Pilot Numbers, assign a pilot number
(e.g., 200) to an unused Department Group (e.g., group 10).

2.
In 47-03-02 Group Mailbox Number, enter the pilot number assigned in
step 1 above.

3.
By default, no Group Mailbox numbers are assigned.
In 47-03-03 Group Mailbox Type, enter 1 to assign the Group Mailbox as
a Call Routing Mailbox.

4.
By default, all extensions are assigned to group 1.
By default, Group Mailboxes are assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes (3).
In 11-07-01 Department Group Pilot Numbers, press Hold to remove the
assignment made in step 1 above.

You can use the Department Group for other programming.
Set up a virtual extension that will handle the switching for the trunk.
1.
In 11-04-01 Virtual Extension Numbering, assign the Group Mailbox
Number in step 2 as the extension number for a virtual extension port.

For example, assign extension 200 to virtual extension port 1.

By default, there are no virtual extension numbers assigned.
Terminate the trunk to the virtual extension in the night mode.
1.
2.
In 22-07-01 DIL Assignment, assign the trunk to the virtual extension
(e.g., 200) in night mode 2.

When the extension user presses the night key, the trunk follows this routing.

By default, there are no DIL assignments set up.
Check the setting of 22-02-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup to be sure the
trunk is set up as a Direct Inward Line (4).

InMail System Guide
By default, trunk types are set to normal (0).
1 - 13
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Fixed Call Forward the virtual extension to Voice Mail.
1.
In 24-06-01 Fixed Call Forwarding, enable immediate Fixed Call
Forwarding to the VM8000 InMail Master Number (200).

For example, for virtual extension 400 enter 3 for Call Forward Type and 200 for
the destination.

By default, Fixed Call Forwarding is not set up.
Record the Instruction Menu for the Group Call Routing Mailbox.
1 - 14
1.
At extension 101, press Message.
2.
Dial SA (72) + I (4).
3.
Dial the number of the Group Call Routing Mailbox (e.g., 400) + R (7).
4.
Record the Instruction Menu message + # + hang up.

See Instruction Menu on page 2-203 in this manual.

When the system is in the day mode, the trunk is answered by VM8000 InMail
normally and follows the programmed Answer Table.

When the extension user presses the night mode 2 key, the trunk is answered by
the programmed Call Routing Mailbox, overriding the Answer Table assignment.
Quick Setup
Features
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION TO VM8000 INMAIL FEATURES
If you are not familiar with the VM8000 InMail features, review
the Section 2 Feature Glossary on page 2-2.
Chapter
This chapter provides detailed information on the VM8000 InMail features.
The features are listed alphabetically. Each feature description includes
the following headings.

Description
2
Read Description to get an overview of the feature, its benefit, any
special considerations you should be aware of, and how it works in
the default system.

Related Features
Related Features shows you at a glance how each feature interacts
with other VM8000 InMail features.

Programming
Here you’ll find easy to follow step-by-step programming instructions
for each feature.

Operation
Operation provides charts that show how the feature operates.
InMail System Guide
2-1
Issue 8.0
SECTION 2
VM8000
FEATURE GLOSSARY
Feature Name
Description
Usage
See Security Code on page 2-9.
Voice Mail
See Next Call Routing Mailbox on page 2-7.
Voice Mail
Announcement
Mailbox
Mailbox that allows a recorded greeting to play to callers.
Automated
Attendant
Announcement
Message
The message that the System Administrator records for a specific
Announcement Mailbox.
Automated
Attendant
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on
each trunk, according to the time of the day and day of the week that
the call is ringing.
Automated
Attendant
Answering
Schedule Override
Enables an alternate greeting and alternate dialing options for
callers.
Automated
Attendant
Auto Attendant
Direct to Voice Mail
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail sends Automated Attendant calls
directly to an extension user’s mailbox. Their phone does not ring for
calls from the Automated Attendant.
See Greeting on page 2-5 in this glossary.
Automated
Attendant
Auto Erase or Save
When a mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then
exits their mailbox, VM8000 InMail either automatically archives or
deletes the message.
Voice Mail
After a user listens to a message, VM8000 InMail can optionally
announce the time and date the message was left.
Voice Mail
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone
system incoming calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and
provide dialing options to callers.
Automated
Attendant
Automated
Attendant Transfer
While on a trunk call, an extension user can transfer the trunk call to
the Automated Attendant so the caller can use the Automated
Attendant dialing options.
Voice Mail
Automatic Call
Distribution Delay
Announcement
With the appropriate hardware and system licenses, the VM8000
InMail can be used to store two ACD Delay Announcements.
System
Automatic Call
Routing to a Mailbox
See Go to a Mailbox on page 2-4 in this glossary.
Automated
Attendant
Automatic Message
Erase/Save
See Auto Erase or Save on page 2-2 in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Administrator
Security Code
Control
Alternate Next Call
Routing Mailbox
Answer Table
Auto Time Stamp
Automated
Attendant
2-2
Features
VM8000
Feature Name
Issue 8.0
Description
Usage
If an Automated Attendant caller does not dial any digits, VM8000
InMail automatically routes them to a specified option (such as the
operator or a mailbox).
Automated
Attendant
An extension user can forward calls to their mailbox.
Voice Mail
The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which
dialing options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available
to Automated Attendant callers.
Automated
Attendant
A telephone company service that provides a caller’s number and
optional name. The telephone system can pass this information to
VM8000 InMail to enable Caller ID with Return Call on page 2-3.
System
Caller ID with Return
Call
See Make Call on page 2-6 and Time and Date Stamp on page 2-9.
Voice Mail
Calling (Logging On
to) a Mailbox
See Log On to Voice Mail on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
Automated Attendant callers can use various VM8000 InMail
features and then return to the Automated Attendant for additional
dialing options.
Automated
Attendant
Cascade Message
Notification
If an extension user receives a new message in their mailbox,
Cascading Message Notification calls them, at up to five preset
destinations, to let them know a new voice mail message has arrived.
Voice Mail
Day, Night, and
Holiday Greetings
See Flexible Answering Schedules on page 2-4.
Automated
Attendant
See Message Delete on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
Deleting Mailbox
Security Code
See Mailbox Security Code Delete on page 2-6.
Maintenance
Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for a Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the
active Answer Table, which in turn provides those dialing options to
Automated Attendant callers.
Automated
Attendant
Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing allows an Automated Attendant caller to reach an
extension by dialing the first few letters in the extension user’s name.
Automated
Attendant
Distribution List
A Distribution List shows extensions that receive a message you
record and send to a single Distribution Mailbox. Any message left in
the Distribution Mailbox is automatically sent to all the mailboxes in
the list.
Voice Mail
Automatic Routing
for Rotary Dial
Callers
Call Forward to a
Mailbox
Call Routing
Mailbox
Caller ID
Calling the
Automated
Attendant
Deleting a Message
InMail System Guide
2-3
Issue 8.0
Feature Name
Email Notification
VM8000
Description
Usage
Email Notification automatically sends an email notification when a
Subscriber Mailbox receives a new message. The email can
optionally include the recorded message as a .wav file attachment.
To hear the message, the email recipient double-clicks the .wav
attachment to have the message play in their .wav player (such as
Windows Media Player).
Voice Mail
Lets the System Administrator delete mailbox messages
system-wide.
Maintenance
An extension user can exit their mailbox by dialing a code or by
hanging up.
Voice Mail
The Automated Attendant can detect incoming fax calls and transfer
them to a fax machine.
System
Find-Me-Follow-Me
Find-Me Follow-Me helps an Automated Attendant caller locate an
extension user who is not at their desk.
Automated
Attendant
Flexible Answering
Schedules
The Automated Attendant can answer outside calls with different
announcements and dialing options, depending on the time of day
and day of week.
Automated
Attendant
Flexible Call
Routing
The Automated Attendant can provide outside callers with a wide
variety of dialing (routing) options. There are 3 components to
Flexible Call Routing.
See Answer Table on page 2-2.
See Call Routing Mailbox on page 2-3.
See Dial Action Table on page 2-3.
Automated
Attendant
If the telephone system extension numbers are customized, the
VM8000 InMail mailbox numbers can be customized to match.
System
Forced Unscreened
Transfer
A Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated Attendant
Screened Transfers to Unscreened Transfers.
Automated
Attendant
Forwarding Calls to
a Mailbox
See Call Forward to a Mailbox on page 2-3.
Voice Mail
Getting Recorded
Help
If an extension user dials an incorrect code or forgets what to dial
while in their mailbox, they can request help from the VM8000 InMail
voice prompts.
Voice Mail
Go to a Mailbox
An Automated Attendant caller can dial a digit and route directly to a
mailbox.
Automated
Attendant
Erasing All
Messages
Exiting a Mailbox
Fax Detection
Flexible Mailbox
Numbering Plan
2-4
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Feature Name
Description
Greeting
A Subscriber Mailbox user can record a personalized greeting for
their mailbox. With Multiple Greetings, the mailbox subscriber can
record up to three separate greetings and make one of the three
active. Callers to the user’s mailbox hear the active greeting.
With Remote Greeting, an extension user can call into the Automated
Attendant, access their mailbox, and remotely record their mailbox
greeting.
See Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on page 2-2.
Voice Mail
Group (Shared)
Mailbox
An extension user can share a Group Mailbox with co-workers for
receiving and sending messages.
Voice Mail
Guest Mailbox
An outside party can have their own mailbox for receiving and
sending messages.
Voice Mail
Hang Up
An Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs up the
outside call.
Automated
Attendant
See Getting Recorded Help on page 2-4.
Voice Mail
Individual Trunk
Greetings
See Multiple Company Greetings on page 2-7.
Automated
Attendant
InMail Upload
Download Audio
Allows the user to upload/download audio messages for greetings,
etc.
Voice Mail
Instruction Menu
The Instruction Menu is the announcement that plays to Automated
Attendant callers. Normally, the Instruction Menu provides callers
with the Automated Attendant dialing options.
Automated
Attendant
Language Setting
This feature allows the telephone display language and the InMail
mailbox language to be changed from the telephone.
Voice Mail
Leaving a Message
An extension user can leave a voice message in a co-worker’s
mailbox if that extension is busy, unanswered, or in Do Not Disturb.
Voice Mail
Leaving a Message
at a Busy/DND
Extension
See Leaving a Message on page 2-5.
Voice Mail
See Quick Message on page 2-8.
Automated
Attendant
See Listening to Messages on page 2-5.
Voice Mail
Listening to
Messages
While or after listening to a message, an extension user has many
message handling options from which to choose.
Voice Mail
Live Monitor
Live Monitor lets Voice Mail screen calls, just like an answering
machine at home. When activated, the extension’s incoming calls
route to the user’s subscriber mailbox. The Live Monitor feature is
supported for External and Internal calls. Once the mailbox answers,
the user hears the caller’s incoming message.
Voice Mail
Help
Leave a Quick
Message
Listening Options
InMail System Guide
Usage
2-5
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Feature Name
Description
Live Record
Allows an extension user to record an active call as a message in
their mailbox. VM8000 InMail broadcasts a beep and a voice prompt
to the caller as Live Record begins.
Voice Mail
See Message Notification on page 2-7.
Voice Mail
Log On to Voice Mail
An extension user can press a key to log on to access their VM8000
InMail mailbox.
With Remote Logon, an employee calling through the Automated
Attendant can dial a single digit followed by their own mailbox
number to remotely log on to their mailbox.
Voice Mail
Mailbox
Announcement
Message
The Mailbox Announcement Message is recorded by the System
Administrator, and plays to each subscriber when they log on to their
mailbox. The message plays at each log on until it expires, is deleted,
or made inactive by the System Administrator.
Administration
See Greeting on page 2-5.
Voice Mail
Mailbox Logon
See Log On to Voice Mail on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
Mailbox Name
A mailbox caller can hear the extension user’s recorded name
instead of their mailbox number.
Voice Mail
Mailbox Options
Menu
Sub-menu of a subscriber’s Main Menu that provides access to the
Auto Time Stamp, Mailbox Security Code Delete, and Message
Notification features.
Voice Mail
Mailbox Security
Code Delete
The System Administrator can delete the security code for any
mailbox, effectively unlocking it.
See Security Code on page 2-9.
Maintenance
Mailbox Transfer
See Transfer to a Mailbox on page 2-10.
Voice Mail
Main Menu
The VM8000 InMail options available to an extension user when they
log on to their mailbox.
Voice Mail
Make Call
A Subscriber Mailbox user can listen to a voice message and dial MC
to return the call without knowing their caller’s phone number.
Voice Mail
Message Count
Display
The telephone display can show the number of new messages
waiting in a user’s mailbox.
Voice Mail
Message Delete
An extension user can delete any message left in their mailbox.
Voice Mail
Message Forward
A subscriber can forward a message in their mailbox to a co-worker.
They can optionally record a comment before the forwarded
message.
Voice Mail
Message Length
The System Administrator can set the maximum length of a message
that can be left in a user’s voice mailbox.
Voice Mail
Message Listen
Mode
When a user calls their mailbox, they can dial a code to listen to all
their messages, their new messages, their saved messages, or their
held messages.
Voice Mail
Local Notification
Mailbox Greeting
2-6
Usage
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Feature Name
Description
Message
Notification
Once activated by the mailbox user, a telephone number is dialed to
let the recipient know there are new messages in the mailbox.
Notification can call extensions, local numbers, long distance
numbers and pagers.
Voice Mail
Message Playback
Direction
An extension user can listen to their messages in either LIFO (last-infirst-out) or FIFO (first-in-first-out) order.
Voice Mail
See Record and Send a Message on page 2-8 in this glossary.
Voice Mail
Message Reply
An extension user can reply to a message in their mailbox by dialing
a code, without knowing the caller’s extension number.
Voice Mail
Message Send
See Record and Send a Message on page 2-8.
Voice Mail
Message Storage
Limit
Sets how many messages a mailbox can store.
Voice Mail
Message Waiting
Lamp
An extension Message Waiting lamp flashes on the telephone
indicating new messages are waiting in their mailbox.
Voice Mail
Multiple Company
Greetings
By assigning a unique Answer Table to each trunk, a single VM8000
InMail system can provide individual greetings and dialing options for
several companies.
Automated
Attendant
See Mailbox Name on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
NetLink
NetLink Networking, using an IP network, provides for a seamless
connection; joining multiple SV8100 communication servers into a
“virtual” single communication server.
Voice Mail
Next Call Routing
Mailbox
Provides callers with additional dialing options after they leave a
message in an extension mailbox (depending on the setting of the
Next Call Routing Mailbox Dial Mode).
Voice Mail
See Call Forward to a Mailbox on page 2-3 and Message Forward on
page 2-6.
Voice Mail
One-Touch Mailbox
Access
See Log On to Voice Mail on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
One-Touch Mailbox
Retrieval
See Log On to Voice Mail on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
Park and Page can automatically Park a call at an extension and
Page the user with a recorded Paging Message announcing the
parked call. The called extension user can then go to any telephone
and implement Personal Park to pick up the call.
Automated
Attendant
See Live Monitor on page 2-217.
Voice Mail
See Greeting on page 2-5.
Voice Mail
Message Record
Name
One-Touch
Forwarding
Park and Page
Personal Answering
Machine Emulation
Personalized
Mailbox Greeting
InMail System Guide
Usage
2-7
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Feature Name
Description
Programmable
Security Code
See Security Code on page 2-9 and Mailbox Security Code Delete on
page 2-6.
Voice Mail
You can program (customize) VM8000 InMail by using the PCPro
and WebPro programming applications. Limited programming can
also be done from a System Administrator’s mailbox.
See Programming Voice Mail on page 2-8 for more information.
Also see System Administrator Mailbox on page 2-9.
Maintenance
Automated Attendant callers can dial a digit followed by an extension
number to leave a message directly in a user’s mailbox.
See Quick Message on page 2-8 for more information.
Automated
Attendant
A Subscriber Mailbox user can record and send a message to any
other Subscriber Mailbox.
Voice Mail
Prerecorded voice prompts guide the user through the VM8000
InMail features.
Voice Mail
See Live Record on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
See Record and Send a Message on page 2-8.
Voice Mail
Recording
Conversation Beep
See Live Record on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
Recording Options
See Record and Send a Message on page 2-8.
Voice Mail
See Log On to Voice Mail on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
Remote Greetings
See Greeting on page 2-5.
Voice Mail
Remote Message
Notification
See Message Notification on page 2-7.
Voice Mail
You can remotely program (customize) VM8000 InMail by using the
PCPro and WebPro programming applications. You can also do
limited remote programming from the System Administrator’s
mailbox.
Maintenance
See Make Call on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
See Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers on page 2-3.
Automated
Attendant
Routing Mailboxes are used to route Automated Attendant calls. A
Routing Mailbox can be either an Announcement or Call Routing
Mailbox.
Automated
Attendant
Programming Voice
Mail
Quick Message
Record and Send a
Message
Recorded Help
Recording a
Conversation
Recording a
Message
Remote Log On
Remote
Programming
Return Call (with
Caller ID)
Rotary Dial
Telephones
Routing Mailbox
2-8
Usage
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Feature Name
Description
Screened Transfer
Similar to telephone system screened transfers when the transferring
party controls the transfer.
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000
InMail calls (screens) the destination extension to see if the transfer
can go through.
Usage
Automated
Attendant
o If the destination is busy or in DND, the Automated Attendant does not
extend the call and immediately provides the caller with additional
options.
o If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the
destination answers, the call goes through. If the destination does not
answer in a programmed time, the Automated Attendant does not extend
the call and provides the caller with additional options.
Also see Unscreened Transfer on page 2-10.
Security Code
An extension user’s mailbox can have a security code to protect the
mailbox from unauthorized access.
See Mailbox Security Code Delete on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
Select Listen Mode
See Message Listen Mode on page 2-6.
Voice Mail
Single Digit Dialing
An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to route to an
extension, route to another destination, or use an VM8000 InMail
feature.
Automated
Attendant
Subscriber Mailbox
The mailbox type normally used for telephone system extensions.
Voice Mail
System
Administrator
The extension user that has VM8000 InMail system administration
abilities.
Maintenance
System
Administrator
Mailbox
A Subscriber Mailbox option that enables the system administration
abilities.
Also see System Administrator on page 2-9.
Voice Mail
Re-initializing VM8000 InMail returns all programmed options to
default value.
Maintenance
Time and Date
After listening to a message, an extension user can dial a code to
hear what time the message was sent.
Also see Auto Time Stamp on page 2-2.
Voice Mail
Time and Date
Stamp
With caller ID installed, an extension user can listen to a message
and dial a code to hear the time the message was sent, as well as the
caller’s number.
Also see Caller ID with Return Call on page 2-3 and Time and Date
above.
Voice Mail
See Time and Date Stamp on page 2-9.
Voice Mail
See Screened Transfer on page 2-9 and Unscreened Transfer on
page 2-10.
Automated
Attendant
See Fax Detection on page 2-4.
Automated
Attendant
System Reinitialization
Time and Date
Stamp (with Caller
ID Storage
Transfer by
Extension
Transfer Calls to a
FAX Machine
InMail System Guide
2-9
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Feature Name
Description
Transfer to a
Mailbox
Usage
An extension user can transfer an active call to a co-worker’s
mailbox.
Voice Mail
Transfer to an
Extension
See Screened Transfer on page 2-9 and Unscreened Transfer on
page 2-10.
Automated
Attendant
Transfer to the
Automated
Attendant
See Automated Attendant Transfer on page 2-2.
Voice Mail
Undefined Routing
A dialpad digit for which the Automated Attendant has no routing
defined. When an Automated Attendant caller dials a digit which has
no routing assigned, VM8000 InMail plays a brief error message and
then repeats the dialing options.
Automated
Attendant
Undefined Routing
Intercept
See Undefined Routing on page 2-10.
Automated
Attendant
Similar to telephone system unscreened transfers when the
transferring party immediately extends the call.
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000
InMail immediately transfers the call to the destination and hangs up.
Any recalls or additional routing are handled by the telephone system
– just as with any other unscreened transfer.
Also see Screened Transfer on page 2-9.
Automated
Attendant
Voice Mail Overflow
Ensures that VM8000 InMail picks up calls that do not go through.
System
Volume Control
A mailbox user can turn the volume up or down while listening to a
message.
Voice Mail
Unscreened
Transfer
SECTION 3
FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS
This section provides detailed feature descriptions, programming, operating
procedures and related feature programming
2 - 10
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
ACD Delay Announcement
Description
The InMail can now support Automatic Call Distribution Delay Announcements. Use
Program 41-19 : ACD Voice Mail Delay Announcement to assign InMail Call
Routing Mailboxes (PRG 47-03) as ACD Delay Announcement Mailboxes.
Conditions

The KSU must be licensed for ACD and InMail for this feature to work.

Call Routing Mailboxes used for Delay Announcements cannot be used for
other voice mail features.

Call Routing boxes used for dialing options cannot be used for other voice
mail features.

When Voice Mail Delay Announcements are being played, VM8000 InMail
talk paths (ports) are used.

VM8000 InMail cannot be used for ACD Night Announcement.

If a caller chooses to dial out of a queue during the delay announcement
the caller is immediately removed from the queue.
Default Settings
None
System Availability
Terminals:
Not applicable
Required Component(s):

SV8100 License for VM8000 InMail
Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution
InMail System Guide
2 - 11
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming

41-08-03
Delay Announcement Source Type
Set ACD Delay Announcement source to 2.
Options:
0 = ACI
1 = VRS
2 = VM8000 InMail
Default:
0

41-19-01
Delay Message Start Timer
Determine how long the system waits before playing the Delay Message.
Options:
0~64800 (sec)
Default:
0

41-19-02
Mailbox Number for 1st Announcement Message
Assign Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailbox as the message source for
the 1st Announcement Message.
Options:
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
Default:
No Setting

41-19-03
1st Delay Message Sending Count
Determine the 1st Delay Message Sending Count. This entry must be set to
1 or higher for the message to play.
Options:
0 = No Message is Played, 1~255
Default:
0

41-19-04
Mailbox Number for 2nd Announcement Message
Assign Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes as the message source
for the 2nd Announcement Message.
Options:
Dial (Up to 8 digits)
Default:
No Setting
2 - 12
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

41-19-05
2nd Delay Message Sending Count
Determine the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count. This entry must be set
to 1 or higher for the message to play.
Options:
0 = No Message is Played, 1~255
Default:
0

41-19-06
Wait Tone Type at Message Interval
Determine what the caller will hear between the messages.
Options:
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = Music On Hold Tone
2 = Background Music Source
Default:
0

41-19-07
ACD Forced Disconnect Time After 2nd Announcement
Assign how long the system should wait after the end of the ACD delay
message before disconnecting.
Options:
0~64800 (sec)
Default:
0

41-19-08
Delay Message Interval Time
Set the timer for the interval between the Delayed Messages
Options:
0~64800 (sec)
Default:
20
47-03-02Group Mailbox Extension
For any unused Group Mailbox set the extension number from PRG
41-19-02.
Options: Valid Extension number
Default: Blank

47-03-02
Group Mailbox Extension
For any unused Group Mailbox set the extension number from PRG
41-19-04.
Options: Valid Extension number
Default: Blank
InMail System Guide
2 - 13
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-03-03
Group Mailbox Type First Setting Data
For Group Mailboxes set the mailbox type to Routing.
Options: Undefined, Subscriber, Routing.
Default: Subscriber

47-03-03
Group Mailbox Second Setting Data
For Group Mailboxes set the Routing mailbox to be used.
Options: 1-32
Default: Blank

47-07-02
Routing Mailbox Type
For Routing Mailboxes used in PRG 47-03-03 set to Announcement.
Options: Call Routing, Distribution, Announcement, Directory, Undefined.
Default: Call Routing for mailboxes 1-8, Announcement for mailboxes 9-32
Operation
None
2 - 14
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Announcement Mailbox
Description
An Announcement Mailbox plays a recorded announcement to Automated Attendant
callers without providing dialing options. The Announcement Mailbox is typically set
up to provide information to callers and then route back to the Automated Attendant.
See the following example:

The Automated Attendant instructs the caller to dial a digit for company
directions.

Record this in the Instruction Menu message for the active Call Routing Mailbox.
See Instruction Menu on page 2-203 for more information.

Set the dialing options in the Dial Action Table associated with the active Call
Routing Mailbox. See Dial Action Table on page 2-89 for more information.

The caller dials the digit and listens to the recorded Announcement Mailbox
message for directions.

After playing the directions, the caller routes back to the Automated Attendant
for additional dialing options.

See the Hang Up and Next Call Routing Mailbox options in Programming below.
By default, there are 24 Announcement Mailboxes (Routing Mailboxes 9~32).
However, you can assign any of the 32 Routing Mailboxes as an Announcement
Mailbox.
The Next Call Routing Mailbox Options
The following Mailbox Routing charts show how an Announcement Mailbox handles
Automated Attendant calls.

The first chart explains what happens when the outside call is directly answered
by the Announcement Mailbox. This happens when the Answer Table uses an
Announcement Mailbox for routing instead of a Call Routing Mailbox.

The second chart explains what happens when the outside call is answered by a
Call Routing Mailbox and then routed to the Announcement Mailbox. This can
happen, for example, when a caller dials a digit to hear an announcement of
company directions.

See Answer Table on page 2-27 for more set up information.
InMail System Guide
2 - 15
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing
(If the outside caller routes directly to the Announcement Mailbox)
47-09-01 Next
Call Routing
Mailbox
47-09-02
Repeat
Count
47-09-03
Hang Up
After
0 = Undefined
0 (No
repeats)
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
1-32 (valid Call
Routing Mailbox)
0 (No
repeats)
Action
o If the caller does not dial, after the announcement VM8000
InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, VM8000
InMail says “That is an invalid entry” and hangs up.
o If the caller does not dial, after the announcement they route
to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route
to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
o If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement VM8000
InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route
to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
0 = Undefined
x (x number
of repeats)
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
o If caller does not dial, they hear the announcement x number
of times and then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, VM8000
InMail says “That is an invalid entry” and aborts the
announcement. The announcement repeats (if allowed by the
Repeat Count) and then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
1-32 (valid Call
Routing Mailbox)
x (x number
of repeats)
o If caller does not dial, they hear the announcement x number
of times and then route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route
to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
o If caller does not dial, they hear the announcement x number
of times and then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route
to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
2 - 16
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing
(If the outside caller routes to the Announcement Mailbox from a Call Routing Mailbox)
47-09-01 Next
Call Routing
Mailbox
47-09-02
Repeat
Count
0 = Undefined
0 (No
repeats)
47-09-03
Hang Up
After
Action
o If the caller does not dial, after the announcement the caller goes
back to the initial Call Routing Mailbox.
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, VM8000 InMail
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
says “That is an invalid entry” and routes the caller goes back to the
initial Call Routing Mailbox.
o If the caller does not dial, after the announcement VM8000 InMail
hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, VM8000 InMail
says “That is an invalid entry” and hangs up.
1-32 (valid
Call Routing
Mailbox)
o If the caller doesn’t dial, after the announcement they route to the
0 (No
repeats)
Next Call Routing Mailbox.
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the
Next Call Routing Mailbox.
o If the caller does not dial, after the announcement VM8000 InMail
hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the
Next Call Routing Mailbox.
0 = Undefined
x (x number
of repeats)
o If caller does not dial, they hear the announcement x number of
times and then go back to the initial Call Routing Mailbox.
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, VM8000 InMail
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
says “That is an invalid entry” and aborts the announcement. The
announcement repeats (if allowed by the Repeat Count) and then
VM8000 InMail routes back to the initial Call Routing Mailbox.
o If caller does not dial, they hear the announcement x number of
times and then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, VM8000 InMail
says “That is an invalid entry” and aborts the announcement. The
announcement repeats (if allowed by the Repeat Count) and then
VM8000 InMail hangs up.
1-32 (valid
Call Routing
Mailbox)
x (x number
of repeats)
o If caller does not dial, they hear the announcement x number of
times and then route to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the
Next Call Routing Mailbox.
o If caller does not dial, they hear the announcement x number of
times and then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the announcement, they route to the
Next Call Routing Mailbox.
InMail System Guide
2 - 17
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Related Features
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant routes callers to an Announcement Mailbox.
Routing Mailbox
A Call Routing Mailbox (and the associated Dial Action Table) provides dialing options to
Automated Attendant callers.
Next Call Routing Mailbox
The Next Call Routing mailbox provides additional routing options to Announcement
Mailbox callers.
System Administrator
The System Administrator records the Announcement Mailbox message.
Programming
1.
Set up the Announcement Mailbox:

47-07-02
Routing Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type)
Enter 2 to make the Routing Mailbox an Announcement Mailbox.

2.
By default, Routing Mailboxes 1~8 are Call Routing Mailboxes (1) and Routing
Mailboxes 9~32 are Announcement Mailboxes (2).
Record the Announcement Message:
See Operation on page 2-20.

By default, no message is recorded.
3.
Hang up VM8000 InMail after playing the Announcement Mailbox message
(without providing additional dialing options):

47-09-03
Hang Up After (HangUp)
Enter 1 (Goodbye) to have VM8000 InMail play Goodbye to caller and hang
up after the announcement.

2 - 18
By default, this option is disabled (0).
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
4.
Provide Announcement Mailbox callers with more dialing options (instead of
hanging up):

47-09-03
Hang Up After (HangUp)
Enter 0 (None) to have VM8000 InMail hang up after the announcement.
By default, this option is disabled (0).
Review Next Call Routing Mailbox on page 2-275 to set up additional dialing
options for Announcement Mailbox callers.

5.
Repeat the Announcement Mailbox message while the caller listens:

47-09-02
Repeat Count
Enter the Repeat Count (0~10).

By default, this option is 0 (No Repeats).
6.
Set the maximum length of the Announcement Mailbox message:

47-01-03
Subscriber Message Length (Subs Msg Length)
Enter the maximum length of the Announcement Mailbox message (1~4095
seconds).

InMail System Guide
By default, this interval is 120 seconds.
2 - 19
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Recording an Announcement Mailbox Message
Log On to System Administrator’s mailbox.
SA
(72)
Access System Administrator options.
[Not applicable]
A (2)
Select Announcement Mailbox message.
[Annc]
Enter the Announcement Mailbox number.
L (5)
Listen to current Announcement Mailbox message.
[Lstn]
#
R (7)
Exit listen mode.
Record a new Announcement Mailbox message.
[Rec]
Record message.
#
0
2 - 20
*
Pause or restart recording.
[Resume]
[Pause]
D (3)
Delete recording.
[Del]
#
Exit recording mode.
[Done]
D (3)
Delete the Announcement Mailbox message.
[Del]
#
Go back to the System Administrator options.
[Exit]
Go back to the System Administrator options.
[Exit]
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Announcement Message
Description
The Announcement Message is the voice message that the System Administrator
records for a specific Announcement Mailbox. See Announcement Mailbox on page
2-15 for more.
Related Features
See Announcement Mailbox.
Programming
See Announcement Mailbox.
Operation
See Announcement Mailbox.
InMail System Guide
2 - 21
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 22
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Answer Schedule Override
Description
Answer Schedule Override provides alternate answering for Automated Attendant
calls. When enabled, Answer Schedule Override sends calls to the specified Override
Mailbox. The Override Mailbox can be an Announcement, Call Routing, or Subscriber
mailbox. You can use Answer Schedule Override to provide holiday and bad weather
closing announcements, for example. Enable override when you want callers to hear
the special announcements; disable override to have the Automated Attendant
answer normally. You can enable Answer Schedule Override from system
programming or from the System Administrator Mailbox.

If the Override Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, the outside caller hears
the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement Mailbox is
programmed, VM8000 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or provides
additional dialing options.

If the Override Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox, the outside caller hears the
instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial Action
Table.

If the Override Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the
mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message.
Related Features
Announcement Mailbox
The Override Mailbox can be an Announcement Mailbox.
Routing Mailbox
The Override Mailbox can be a Call Routing Mailbox.
Subscriber Mailbox
The Override Mailbox can be a Subscriber Mailbox.
System Administrator
Optionally enable Answer Schedule Override from the System Administrator Mailbox.
InMail System Guide
2 - 23
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming
1.
Optionally Enable Answer Schedule Override from system programming.

47-11-01
Answer Schedule Override (Schedule Override)
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable Answer Schedule Override.
You can also enable Answer Schedule Override from the System
Administrator Mailbox. See Operation on page 2-25.

By default, Answer Schedule Override is disabled (0).
2.
Specify the Override Mailbox Category.

47-11-02
Override Mailbox Category (Override MB Ctg)
When you enable Answer Schedule Override for the selected Answer
Table, you can choose to route Automated Attendant calls to any of the
following mailbox categories:
1
Station Mailbox
2
Group Mailbox
3
Routing Mailbox
0
Undefined

By default, this option is 0.
3.
Specify the Override Mailbox Number.

47-11-02
Override Mailbox Number (Override MB Num)
For the selected Answer Table, choose the Override Mailbox number
(maximum 3 digits, using 0~9). The mailbox number you select must match
the mailbox category specified in 47-11-02 above.

4.
2 - 24
By default, there is No Entry for this option.
Optionally enable Answer Schedule Override from the System Administrator
Mailbox.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Operation
Enabling Answer Schedule Override
Log On to System Administrator’s Mailbox.
SA
(72)
Access System Administrator options.
[Not applicable]
O (6)
Access Answer Schedule Override.
[Not applicable]
1-8
Enter the number of the Answer Table you want to override.
You go to the Answer Schedule Override Menu.
O (6)
Turn Answer Schedule Override on or off.
[On]
[Off]
C (2)
Select the Override Mailbox.
[MBOX]
Enter the Override Mailbox number.
The Override Mailbox can be an Announcement, Call
Routing, or Subscriber Mailbox.
#
#
#
0
InMail System Guide
Go back to the Answer Schedule
Override Menu without entering an
Override Mailbox.
[Exit]
0
Plays Answer Schedule Override Menu Help
message.
#
Go back to the System Administrator Menu.
[Exit]
Go back to the System Administrator Menu.
[Exit]
Go back to the Main Menu.
[Exit]
Plays Help message.
2 - 25
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 26
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Answer Table
Enhancements
With SV8100 Version 8000 or higher 16 Answer Tables are supported
Description
The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on
each trunk, according to the time of the day and day of the week that the call is
ringing. VM8000 InMail provides 16 Answer Tables. The Answer Table is an integral
part of the Automated Attendant. The Automated Attendant can automatically answer
the telephone system incoming calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide
dialing options to callers. Automated Attendant has 3 major components:

Answer Table
The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside
calls on each trunk, according to the time of the day and day of the week that
the call is ringing. The Answer Table divides the time of day and day of the week
into individual schedules, which in turn assign a Call Routing Mailbox to each
call. When a specific schedule is not in effect, the Answer Table uses its Default
Mailbox to determine routing. With SV8100 Version 8000 or higher 16 Answer
Tables are supported.


By default, all trunks use Answer Table 1. Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs
Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
Routing Mailbox
A Call Routing Mailbox is associated with an individual Answer Table schedule
or the Default Mailbox. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action Table) are
available to callers. It also provides the Instruction Menu to callers which
typically greets the callers and describes the dialing options.


By default, Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from
8:30AM to 5:00PM. This schedule and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing
Mailbox 1.
Dial Action Table
After the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table provides the
dialing options to callers. Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action
(function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial action used depends on the setting
in the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the Answer Table
setup. With SV8100 Version 8000 or higher there are 32 Dial Action Tables.
InMail System Guide
2 - 27
Issue 8.0
VM8000

By default, Call Routing Mailbox 1 uses Dial Action Table 1.
The block diagram below shows the default VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant
configuration.
DIL to Voice Mail Master (200)
22-01-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup
22-07-01 DIL Setup
InMail
Default
Automated Attendant Answering
Trunks Route to Answer Table 1
47-10-01 Answer Table Assignment
Answer Table 1
47-11 Answer Table Options
Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox
47-12 Answer Schedules
47-11-05 Default Mailbox
Call Routing Mailbox 1
47-08 Call Routing Mailbox Options
Dial Action Table 1
47-13 Dial Action Tables
2 - 28
All calls route to Call Routing Mailbox 1
Schedule 1 active M-F 8:30AM-5:00PM
Default Mailbox active all other times
From a System Administrator mailbox,
record an Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options:
Dial an extension number, or
O for the operator
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
The Default Mailbox and Routing Hierarchy
The Default Mailbox provides routing for an Answer Table during periods when a
schedule is not in effect. By default, for example, Answer Table 1 Schedule 1 is active
Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM. The Default Mailbox for Answer
Table 1 is active during all other times (i.e., evenings and weekends). Since Schedule
1 and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing Mailbox 1, initially the routing is the
same 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. See Customizing an Answer Table below for
more information.
When setting up your Answer Tables, keep in mind that a more specific type of
routing has priority over a less specific type of routing. When selecting which routing
to follow when there is more than one choice for a specific time, VM8000 InMail
chooses in the following order:
1.
Date Schedule
2.
Day of Week Schedule
3.
Range of Days Schedule
4.
Default Mailbox
For example, a Date Schedule set up for Christmas day has priority over any other
schedules in effect on December 25.
Customizing an Answer Table
Use the following examples as a guide when customizing your Answer Tables to meet
specific site requirements. Refer to Programming on page 2-31 below for the
specifics.
To set up daytime and evening/weekend answering (2 schedules):
In this example, use the Default Mailbox (Call Routing Mailbox 1) for evening/weekend
answering and specify a new Call Routing Mailbox for daytime answering.
1.
Change the Call Routing Mailbox for Answer Table 1, Schedule 1.
In 47-11 Program Entry, assign Call Routing Mailbox 2 to Answer Table 1,
Schedule 1. Use this setting for daytime answering.
2.
From a System Administrator’s Mailbox, record an evening/weekend Instruction
Menu message for Call Routing mailbox 1.
This message plays to callers Monday through Friday from 5:00 PM to 8:30 AM
and on weekends.
3.
From a System Administrator’s Mailbox, record a daytime Instruction Menu
message for Call Routing Mailbox 2.
This message plays to callers Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM.
InMail System Guide
2 - 29
Issue 8.0
VM8000
To set up daytime, evening, and weekend answering (3 schedules):
This example builds on the example above, but adds a third schedule that plays only on
weekday evenings.
1.
Change the Call Routing Mailbox for Answer Table 1, Schedule 1.
In 47-11 Program Entry, assign Call Routing Mailbox 2 to Answer Table 1,
Schedule 1. As in the 2 schedule example, use this for daytime answering.
2.
Create a new schedule that will run only in the evenings.
In 47-11 Program Entry, create Schedule 2 for Answer Table 1 that will run
Monday through Friday from 5:00 PM to 11:00 PM. Assign Call Routing Mailbox
3 to this new schedule.
3.
From a System Administrator’s Mailbox, record a late night/weekend Instruction
Menu Message for Call Routing mailbox 1.
This message plays Monday through Friday from 11:00 PM to 8:30 AM, and on
weekends.
4.
From a System Administrator’s mailbox, record the weekday Instruction Menu
Message for Call Routing Mailbox 2.
This message plays Monday through Friday from 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM.
5.
From a System Administrator’s Mailbox, record the weekday evening Instruction
Menu Message for Call Routing Mailbox 3.
This message plays Monday through Friday from 5:00 PM to 1:00 PM.
Related Features
Automated Attendant
The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Routing Mailbox
The Call Routing Mailbox provides the dialing instructions (Dial Action Table) and
announcements to Automated Attendant Callers.
Dial Action Table
The Dial Action Table defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by
the Answer Table, which in turn provides those options to Automated Attendant callers.
2 - 30
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Programming
1.
Assign Answer Tables to trunks.

47-10-01
Answer Table Assignment (Answer Table)
Assign an Answer Table (1~16) to each trunk that the Automated Attendant
should answer.

By default, all trunks are assigned to Answer Table 1.
2.
Set up the Automated Attendant to answer trunk calls.

22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to be a DIL. Make a separate
entry for each Night Service mode.


22-07-01
By default, trunks are Service Type 0 (Normal).
DIL Assignment
For each trunk you designated above, enter the VM8000 InMail pilot
number. Make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

By default, there are no DIL destinations programmed.
3.
Select the Answer Table you want to customize.

47-11
VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options
Select the Answer Table you want to customize (1~16).

47-11-04
Next Answer Table
If 10 Answer Schedules in an Answer Table are not sufficient, enter the
number of the Answer Table to which you want to link the selected table.
VM8000 InMail treats the two linked tables as a single 20 entry Answer
Table.


47-11-03
By default, Answer Tables are not linked (Undefined).
Default Mailbox Category (Default MB Ctg) and Default Mailbox Number
(Default MB Num)
Set the mailbox the Answer Table uses if no Answer Schedule is in effect.

By default, this option is 3 (Routing Mailbox) for Answer Table 1 and 0
(undefined) for all other Answer Tables.
4.
Setting up a Type 1 (Day of Week) schedule.

47-12
VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules
Select the Schedule Entry you want to customize.
InMail System Guide
2 - 31
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-12-01
Schedule Type (Entryxx Schedule Type)
Enter 1 to make the Schedule Entry a Day of the Week Schedule.


47-12-02
By default, Schedule Entry 1 of Answer Table 1 is 2 (Range of Days) schedule. All
other Schedule Entries are 0 (Undefined).
Answering Mailbox Category (Entryxx MB Ctg) and Answering Mailbox
Number (Entryxx MB Num)
Select the Routing Mailbox (1~32) to answer calls when this Schedule Entry
is active.
You can optionally assign a Subscriber Mailbox (1), Group Mailbox (2), or
Routing Mailbox (3) for this option.


47-12-03
By default, no Type 1 (Day of Week) schedules are enabled.
Day of the Week (Entryxx Day)
Specify the day of the week the Schedule Entry should be active.


47-12-07
By default, Type 1 (Day of Week) schedule is 1.
Schedule Start Time (Entryxx Start Time)
Set the time of day the Schedule Entry should start on the day specified.


47-12-08
By default, Type 1 (Day of Week) schedule is 0830 (8:30AM).
Schedule End Time (Entryxx End Time)
Set the time of day the Schedule Entry should stop on the day specified.

By default, Type 1 (Day of Week) schedule is 1700 (5:00PM).

Refer to Type 1 (Day of Week) Example on page 3-67.
Review this example if you need help setting up your Schedule Entry.
5.
Setting up a Type 2 (Range of Days) schedule.

47-12
VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules
Select the Schedule Entry you want to customize.

47-12-01
Schedule Type (Entryxx Schedule Type)
Enter 2 to make the Schedule Entry a Range of Days Schedule.


47-12-02
By default, Schedule Entry 1 of Answer Table 1 is a Range of Days (Type 2)
schedule. All other Schedule Entries are undefined.
Answering Mailbox Category (Entryxx MB Ctg) and Answering Mailbox
Number (Entryxx MB Num)
Select the Routing Mailbox (1-32) that will answer calls when this Schedule
Entry is active.

2 - 32
You can optionally assign a Subscriber Mailbox, Group Mailbox, or Routing
Mailbox for this option. By default, Schedule 1 of Answer Table 1 uses Call
Routing Mailbox 1. All other schedules are undefined.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-12-04
Start Day (Entryxx Start Day)
Specify the day of the week the Schedule Entry should be become active
(start).


47-12-05
By default, Schedule 1 of Answer Table 1 starts on Monday (2). All other schedules
are undefined.
End Day (Entryxx End Day)
Specify the day of the week the Schedule Entry should become inactive.


47-12-07
By default, Schedule 1 of Answer Table 1 ends on Friday (6). All other schedules
are undefined.
Schedule Start Time (Entryxx Start Time)
Set the time of day the Schedule Entry should start on the day specified.


47-12-08
By default, Schedule 1 of Answer Table 1 starts at 8:30AM (0830). All other
schedules are undefined.
Schedule End Time (Entryxx End Time)
Set the time of day the Schedule Entry should stop on the day specified.

By default, Schedule 1 of Answer Table 1 ends at 5:00PM (1700). All other
schedules are undefined.

Refer to Type 2 (Range of Days) Example on page 3-69.
6.
Setting up a Type 3 (Date) schedule.

47-11
Program Entry
Select the Schedule Entry you want to customize.

47-12-01
Schedule Type (Entryxx Schedule Type)
Enter 3 to make the Schedule Entry a Date Schedule.


47-12-02
By default, Schedule Entry 1 of Answer Table 1 is a Range of Days (Type 2)
schedule. All other Schedule Entries are undefined.
Answering Mailbox Category (Entryxx MB Ctg) and Answering Mailbox
Number (Entryxx MB Num)
Select the Routing Mailbox (1-32) that will answer calls when this Schedule
Entry is active.
You can optionally assign a Subscriber Mailbox, Group Mailbox, or
Announcement Mailbox for this option.

By default, there are no Type 3 (Date) schedules defined.

47-12-03
Day of the Week (Entryxx Day)

47-12-04
Start Day (Entryxx Start Day)

47-12-06
Date (Entryxx Date)
Specify the date on which the Schedule Entry should become active (start).

InMail System Guide
By default, there are no Type 3 (Date) schedules defined.
2 - 33
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-12-07
Schedule Start Time (Entryxx Start Time)
Set the time of day the Schedule Entry should start on the date specified.


47-12-08
By default, there are no Type 3 (Date) schedules defined.
Schedule End Time (Entryxx End Time)
Set the time of day the Schedule Entry should stop on the date specified.

By default, there are no Type 3 (Date) schedules defined.
Type 3 (Date) Example on page 3-70
Review this example if you need help setting up your Schedule Entry.

Operation
Not applicable.
2 - 34
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Automatic Access to Voice Mail by Caller ID
Enhancements
This feature added with Version 5000.
Description
Before, when a user outside the system accessed their InMail mailbox, they dialed
voice mail, then entered an access code followed by their mailbox number and
password (if enabled). Starting with Version 5000 software a VM8000 InMail mailbox
can be associated with a specific caller ID (CID) number. When the CID number is
presented to the InMail it will automatically log the user into their mailbox. This
enhancement improves VM accessibility for outside callers, allowing them to simply
dial the main voice mail number and be automatically logged into their mailbox.
Two types of voice mail access modes exist for this feature.
1.
Specifying the VM Pilot number as a DID/DIL/DISA/VRS destination.
- OR -
Dialing the VM pilot number after calling in from a Mobile Extension.
2.
Program to forward a call to VM (102) by any of following Programs.

Program 22-05-01 (Incoming Ring Group)

Program 22-11-05 (Transfer Target number -1)

Program 22-11-06 (Transfer Target number -2)

Program 25-03-01 (Incoming Ring Group No.)

Program 25-04-01 (VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group at No answer/Busy)
Figure 2-1 Example – User Access to Voice Mail
InMail System Guide
2 - 35
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Conditions

The VM8000 InMail – Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID (CID) feature
requires Version 5000 or higher software and the Version 5000
Enhancement license.

When using this feature the InMail does not prompt for a password on a
call from the set CID number.

Incoming calls across CCIS are not supported.

Two different mailboxes can not be tied to the same inbound CID
number. If two mailboxes are set for the same inbound CID number the
system uses the first match it finds.

To use this feature, the phone number must be set in Program 13-04-01
and the voice mail box number in Program 13-04-11. If both are not set,
the system requires the normal log in procedure of entering a valid
mailbox number and security code to login.

This feature is only supported for external calls to the InMail.

Mobile Extension users can use this feature by setting the VM box
number in Program 13-04-11 which corresponds to the Speed Dial
number registered in Program 15-22-01.

Common Speed Dial area is used for this feature. Group or Station
Speed Dial areas are not supported with this feature.

When a number in the Common Speed Dial includes a trunk access
code or end code (#), the Redial name indication will work if the number
matches completely.

If the same number is registered in the Common Speed Dial bin, the
latest Speed Dial number is used.

The Flexible ringing feature has priority over the VM8000 InMail –
Automatic Access to VM by Caller ID feature.

The UM8000 does not support setting this feature in SV8100 system
programming. To set this feature for the UM8000, refer to the on line
UM8000 system administration guide.

To enable this feature, Program 14-01-22 (Caller ID to Voice Mail) must
be set to 1.
Default Setting
Disabled
2 - 36
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
System Availability
Terminals
All Multiline Terminals
Trunks
The following Trunks support sending Caller ID:

Analog Line

ISDN Line (BRI)

ISDN Line (PRI)

SIP Line

H.323 Line
Required Component(s)

PZ-VM21

VM8000 InMail Compact Flash

CPU license for VM
Related Features
Speed Dial - System/Group/Station
Caller ID – Flexible Ringing
Mobile Extension
VM8000 InMail
InMail System Guide
2 - 37
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming

13-04-01
Speed Dialing Number and Name – Speed Dialing Data
The bin should contain just the outside telephone number you want
External Transfer to dial.
Refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for more information.


13-04-02
No common Abbreviated Dialing numbers are stored by default.
Speed Dialing Number and Name – Name
Assign a name to each System Speed Dial bin.


13-04-11
Maximum 12 characters. Default is not assigned.
Speed Dialing Number and Name – Automatic Access to Voice Mail by
Caller ID
Per Speed Dial Bin No. (0000~1999), set the voice mail box number.
Incoming Caller ID number will be checked with Speed Dial Data
(PRG 13-04-01). From matched Speed Dial Bin No., the system finds the
voice mail box number according to this PRG.


15-22-01
Mailbox Number 0~544. Default = 0.
Mobile Extension Setup – Mobile Extension Target Setup
Set which Speed Dial bin is used to call when the Mobile extension is called.


22-02-01
0~1999 (0 = No setting; 1~1999 = target of mobile extension). Default = 0.
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk.


22-05-01
Incoming Type for Day/Night Mode (1~8). Default = 0.
Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign Normal Ring Trunks (22-02) to Incoming Ring Groups (22-04).

0 = No Setting; 001~100 Incoming Group); 102 (In-Skin/ External Voice Mail or
VM8000 InMail). Default = 1.

22-11-05
DID Translation Table Number Conversation – Transfer Destination
Number 1

22-11-06
DID Translation Table Number Conversation – Transfer Destination
Number 2
For each DID Translation Table entry (1~2000), specify the first and second
Transfer Destinations if the caller receives a busy or no answer (action
defined in Program 22-11-04).

2 - 38
Applies to 22-11-05 and 22-11-06. Default = 0.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

25-03-01
VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group with Incorrect Dialing
This program defines the Incoming Ring Group when dial tone is timed-out,
or the wrong dialing is received in DID, DISA.


25-04-01
0 = Disconnect; 1~100 = (Incoming Ring Group); 102 = (In-Skin/External Voice
Mail or VM8000 InMail); 103 = (Centralized Voice Mail); 104 = (Speed Dial Bin).
Default = 0.
VRS/DISA Transfer Ring Group with No Answer/Busy
This program defines the Incoming Ring Group when Target extension has
no answer, or is busy in DID.

InMail System Guide
0 = Disconnect; 1~100 = (Incoming Ring Group); 102 = (In-Skin/External Voice
Mail or VM8000 InMail); 103 = (Centralized Voice Mail); 104 = (Speed Dial Bin).
Default = 0.
2 - 39
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 40
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
Description
When a subscriber enables Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail, Automated Attendant
calls to their extension go directly to their mailbox. Their phone does not ring for calls
from the Automated Attendant. You can optionally enable Auto Attendant Direct to
Voice Mail from system programming. A subscriber typically turns on Auto Attendant
Direct to Voice Mail when they need to work at their desk uninterrupted by outside
callers sent from the Automated Attendant.
Keep in mind that Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail does not block Intercom calls
from coworkers or any other type of outside call not routed through the Automated
Attendant. For example, with Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail enabled,
Direct Inwards Lines and transferred outside calls to an extension work normally.
Related Features
Call Forward to a Mailbox
If a subscriber has calls forwarded immediately to his mailbox, Auto Attendant Direct to
Voice Mail is not necessary.
Greeting
A subscriber does not have to have a greeting recorded to activate Auto Attendant Direct
to Voice Mail.
Programming
1.
Enable Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail From Your Subscriber Mailbox.

Refer to Operation on page 2-42.
2.
Optionally enable Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail from System
Programming.

47-02-09
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail (Auto-ATT Direct VM)
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail.

InMail System Guide
By default, this option is disabled (0).
2 - 41
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Recording a Multiple Greeting and Setting Up Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
Log on to Subscriber Mailbox.
G (4)
Access the Mailbox Greeting options.
[Greet]
VM8000 InMail does the following:
o Plays a summary of your current settings.
o Displays the status of your active Greeting (1-3).
[GREETING n: RECORDED], or
[GREETING n: NOT REC]
o Shows the Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail status.
[AUTO-ATTENDANT DND: OFF], or
[AUTO-ATTENDANT DND: ON]
o Provides soft keys for each of the 3 greetings.
[Gr1]
[Gr2]
[Gr3]
Select a Greeting (which also makes it active).
(1)[Gr1]
(2)[Gr2]
(3)[Gr3]
L (5)
Listen to the active greeting (if recorded).
[Lstn]
R (7)
Record a new greeting (if not recorded), or rerecord the
current greeting.
[Rec]
Record at the tone, then press # when done.
*
Pause or restart recording.
[Resume]
[Pause]
D (3)
Delete the greeting.
[Del]
#
End the recording.
[Done]
Delete the currently recorded greeting (if any).
[Del]
#
Go back to the Mailbox Greeting options.
[Exit]
Change Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail.
Setup Access the Mailbox Setup Options
(67)
CallH(26) Select Call Handling Options
DVM
Turn Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
(6)
[AUTO-ATTENDANT DVM: ON]
[AUTO-ATTENDANT DVM: OFF]
Exit (#)
Go back to mailbox Main Menu
0
Plays Help message
2 - 42
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Auto Erase or Save
Description
When a mailbox user listens to a new message completely and then exits the mailbox,
VM8000 InMail either automatically archives or deletes the message. The setting of
this option depends on subscriber preferences.
The subscriber can choose the Auto Erase option, review messages and archive
messages. The subscriber that chooses the Auto Save option is assured that
VM8000 InMail automatically archives all messages when the mailbox is exited.
Auto Save Example:

VM8000 InMail alerts the subscriber to new messages by a Message Waiting Lamp.

The subscriber presses L to listen to a portion of each message and then exits his
mailbox.

If a subscriber chooses the Auto Save option, VM8000 InMail archives partially
listened-to messages but does not illuminate the message waiting lamp for those
messages. VM8000 InMail archives all the messages and turns off the message
waiting lamp.

If you hang up while listening to a new message, VM8000 InMail automatically
saves the message as a new message.
Related Features
Not applicable.
Programming
1.
Set up Auto Erase or Save for a Subscriber Mailbox:

47-02-05
Auto Erase/Save of Messages
Select 1 (Save) to save the message; 0 (Erase) to erase the message.

By default, the Subscriber Mailbox saves (1) the message.
Operation
Not applicable.
InMail System Guide
2 - 43
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 44
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Auto Time Stamp
Description
After a Subscriber Mailbox user listens to a message, VM8000 InMail can optionally
announce the time and date the message was left. The Subscriber can enable Auto
Time Stamp from their mailbox, or you can optionally enable in from system
programming. Auto Time Stamp helps if the subscriber needs to know the time and
date of each message they receive without taking any extra steps. With Auto Time
Stamp turned on, VM8000 InMail automatically announces the date, time, and
(optionally) the caller’s number at the end of each message. With Auto Time Stamp
turned off, the subscriber must dial TI (84) while listening to a message to get the
same information.
Related Features
Mailbox Options Menu
Auto Time Stamp is available on the Mailbox Options Menu.
Time and Date
VM8000 InMail uses the VM8000 InMail Time and Date.
Time and Date Stamp
An extension can listen to a message and dial a code to hear the time the message was
sent.
Programming
1.
Enable Auto Time Stamp from your Subscriber Mailbox.

Refer to Operation on page 2-46.
2.
Optionally Enable Auto Time Stamp from System Programming.

47-02-11
Auto Time Stamp
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable Auto Time Stamp.

InMail System Guide
By default, Auto Time Stamp is disabled (0).
2 - 45
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Turning Auto Time Stamp On or Off
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
OP
(67)
Access the Mailbox Options Menu.
[Not applicable.]
AT
(28)
Access Auto Time Stamp.
[Time]
VM8000 InMail plays a summary of your Auto Time Stamp setting.
By default, Auto Time Stamp is turned off.
O (6)
2 - 46
Turn Auto Time Stamp on or off.
[On]
[Off]
#
Go back to the Mailbox Options Menu.
[Exit]
0
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Automated Attendant
Description
The Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each trunk, according to the time
of day and day of the week. The Answer Table is an integral part of the Automated
Attendant. The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the phone system
incoming calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to
callers. There are three major Automated Attendant components:

Answer Table
The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside
calls on each trunk, according to the time of the day and day of the week. The
Answer Table divides the time of day and day of the week into individual
schedules, which in turn assign a Call Routing Mailbox to each call. When a
specific schedule is not in effect, the Answer Table uses its Default Mailbox to
determine routing.


By default, all trunks use Answer Table 1. Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs
Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
Routing Mailbox
A Call Routing Mailbox is a mailbox associated with an individual Answer Table
schedule or the Default Mailbox. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) are available to callers. It also provides the Instruction Menu to callers
which typically greets the callers and describes the dialing options.


By default, Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from
8:30AM to 5:00PM. This schedule and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing
Mailbox 1.
Dial Action Table
After the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table provides the
dialing options to callers. Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action
(function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial action used depends on the setting
in the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the Answer Table
setup.

InMail System Guide
By default, Call Routing Mailbox 1 uses Dial Action Table 1.
2 - 47
Issue 8.0
VM8000
The block diagram below shows the default VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant
configuration.
DIL to Voice Mail Master (200)
22-01-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup
22-07-01 DIL Setup
InMail
Default
Automated Attendant Answering
Trunks Route to Answer Table 1
47-10-01 Answer Table Assignment
Answer Table 1
47-11 Answer Table Options
Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox
47-12 Answer Schedules
47-11-03 Default Mailbox
Call Routing Mailbox 1
47-08 Call Routing Mailbox Options
Dial Action Table 1
47-13 Dial Action Tables
2 - 48
All calls route to Call Routing Mailbox 1
Schedule 1 active M-F 8:30AM-5:00PM
Default Mailbox active all other times
From a System Administrator mailbox,
record an Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options:
Dial an extension number, or
O for the operator.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Related Features
Answer Table
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each trunk.
Routing Mailbox
The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies the dialing options (Dial
Action Table) and Instruction Menu that announcements are available to Automated
Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer
Table.
Fax Detection
The Automated Attendant can route outside calls to the company fax machine.
Multiple Company Greetings
One VM8000 InMail system can provide individual greetings and dialing options for
several companies.
Programming
1.
Assign Answer Tables to trunks.

47-10-01
Answer Table Assignment (Answer Table)
Assign an Answer Table (1~8) to each trunk that the Automated Attendant
should answer.

By default, all trunks are assigned to Answer Table 1.
2.
Set up the Automated Attendant to answer trunk calls.

22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to be a DIL. Make a separate
entry for each Night Service mode.


22-07-01
By default, all trunks are Service Type 0 (Normal).
DIL Assignment
For each trunk you designated as a DIL above, enter the VM8000 InMail
pilot number. Make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

InMail System Guide
By default, no DIL destinations are programmed.
2 - 49
Issue 8.0
VM8000
3.
Set up the Answer Tables.
Turn to Answer Table on page 2-27 for more information.

4.
Set up the Call Routing Mailboxes.
Turn to Routing Mailbox on page 2-301 for more information.

5.
By default, all trunks use Answer Table 1. Answer Schedule 1 is active and runs
continuously.
The active schedule (Answer Table 1, Answer Schedule 1) uses Call Routing Mailbox 000.
Set up the Dial Action Tables.
Turn to Dial Action Table on page 2-89 for more information.

By default, Call Routing Mailbox 000 uses Dial Action Table 1.
6.
Set the maximum message length for Automated Attendant callers leaving a
message in a mailbox.

47-01-03
Subscriber Message Length (Subs Msg Length)
This sets the maximum message length (1~4095 seconds) for outside
Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a LOGON or GOTO
command.


47-01-04
The default setting is 120 seconds.
Non-Subscriber Message Length (Mbox Msg Length)
This sets the maximum message length (1~4095 seconds) for outside
Automated Attendant callers leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailboxes.

The default setting is 120 seconds.
Operation
Using the Automated Attendant
For the outside caller:
After Automated Attendant answers, voice prompts will instruct you which digits to dial.
2 - 50
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Automated Attendant Transfer
Description
An extension user can transfer a trunk call to the Automated Attendant to enable an
outside caller to use the Automated Attendant dialing options.

Extensions cannot call or be transferred to the VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant.
Related Features
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the phone system incoming calls,
play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Automated Attendant Transfer
To transfer an outside call to the Automated Attendant:
1. While on an outside call, press Hold.
2. Dial the voice mail master number (e.g., 200).
3. Hang up.
InMail System Guide
2 - 51
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 52
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers
Description
If an Automated Attendant caller does not dial any digits, VM8000 InMail
automatically routes that caller to a specified option (such as the operator or a
mailbox). This lets rotary phone users stay on the line to leave a message or have
their call processed. Without Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial Callers, rotary callers
cannot use the Automated Attendant.
Related Features
Guest Mailbox
Consider routing rotary dial callers to a Guest Mailbox to collect messages.
Programming
1.
Program the Dial Action Table Timeout function.

47-13
VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables
Since rotary dial callers can not dial DTMF digits, the Timeout function
provides routing.

By default, TIMEOUT is an Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) to the operator (101).
Operation
Not applicable.
InMail System Guide
2 - 53
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 54
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Call Forward to a Mailbox
Description
A subscriber can easily forward calls to his Subscriber Mailbox by pressing the
Message key instead of dialing an extension as the forwarding destination. With Call
Forward to a Mailbox, the subscriber is assured that when he is unavailable to answer
calls, those calls are saved in Voice Mail.
Unlike with Extension Hunting to Voice Mail, the Call Forward to a Mailbox feature
allows the subscriber to choose when and how to send unanswered calls to voice
mail.
Call Forwarding a Subscriber’s Direct Inward Line to their Mailbox
The following table describes how VM8000 InMail handles a subscriber’s Direct
Inward Line when it is Call Forwarded to the mailbox. The routing occurs when the
caller dials a digit while listening to the recorded or default mailbox greeting.
Dialing Options while Listening to a Subscriber Mailbox Greeting
47-02-14 Next Call
Routing Mailbox
47-02-13
Dialing
Option
Digit
Dialed
Undefined
No
0
1~9
1~32 (valid Call Routing
Mailbox)
1~32 (valid Call Routing
Mailbox)
InMail System Guide
No
Yes
Action
Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the greeting
repeats.
#
VM8000 InMail hangs up.
*
Caller skips greeting and can immediately start
recording.
0
Caller follows 0 action in Next Call Routing Mailbox.
1~9
Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” the greeting
repeats, and the caller is asked to leave a message.
#
Caller routes to the Next Call Routing Mailbox and hears
its Instruction Menu.
*
Caller skips greeting and can immediately start
recording.
0
Caller follows key action in Next Call Routing Mailbox.
1~9
#
Caller routes to the Next Call Routing Mailbox and hears
its Instruction Menu.
*
Caller skips greeting and can immediately start
recording.
2 - 55
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Log On to a Subscriber Mailbox while Listening to the Greeting
A subscriber who wishes to log on to his mailbox while listening to his greeting must
have the option set in Next Call Routing Mailbox. To allow this ability, for example:

Program the Next Call Routing Mailbox # digit as LOGON to IXXX.

While listening to their greeting, the subscriber can dial:

# (to route to their Next Call Routing Mailbox).

# and their mailbox number to log on to their mailbox.
By default, this option is provided in Call Routing Mailbox 1. Additionally, the
subscriber can enable a Security Code to prevent unauthorized logons.
Related Features
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
When enabled, Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail automatically sends all calls from the
Automated Attendant to the subscriber’s mailbox.
Message Forward
A subscriber can forward a message in their Subscriber Mailbox to a coworker.
Next Call Routing Mailbox
The setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Dialing Option options determine the
digits a caller can dial while listening to the recorded or default mailbox greeting.
Programming
1.
Set how long an unanswered call will ring before forwarding.

24-02-03
Delayed Call Forwarding Time
For type 2 and type 4 forwarding, an unanswered call will forward after this
interval.
This time applies to transferred trunk calls, Direct Inward Lines, and
Intercom calls.

2 - 56
By default, this interval is 10 seconds.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Operation
Call Forward to your Mailbox
To forward your calls to your mailbox:
1.
Press Speaker (or lift the handset at the single line telephone) and choose
from the following dial access codes:
741 = Call Forward - Immediate
742 = Call Forward - Busy
743 = Call Forward - No Answer
744 = Call Forward - Busy/No Answer
745 = Call Forward - Both Ring
746 = Call Forwarding - Follow-Me
2.
Dial Voice Mail master number.
3.
Press Speaker to hang up (or hang up handset at the single line telephone).
InMail System Guide
2 - 57
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 58
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Caller ID
Description
Caller ID is a telephone company service that provides an extension with a caller’s
number and optional name. With Caller ID, the display keyset user knows who is
calling before they pick up the call. When used with VM8000 InMail, Caller ID enables
the Make Call feature for outside calls. After listening to a voice message, the
subscriber can dial MC to return the call without knowing the callers phone number.
Related Features
Make Call
An extension user can listen to a voice message and dial a code to return the call without
knowing the caller’s phone number. Make call to an outside telephone number requires
Caller ID.
Screened Transfer
Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant provide Caller ID data only after the
user answers the call.
Unscreened Transfer
Unscreened Transfers from the Automated Attendant provide Caller ID data while the
phone is ringing.
Programming
Be sure the telephone system is configured to pass
Caller ID to the VM8000 InMail voice mail ports.
No additional programming is required to enable Caller ID in VM8000 InMail.
Following is a list of the basic Caller ID programs.
1.
Be sure the telco provides Caller ID to the connected telephone system.
2.
Check your telephone system programming to be sure the telephone system is
set up to receive Caller ID and pass it to the VM8000 InMail voice mail ports.

14-01-22
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Caller ID to Voice Mail
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable this option.

InMail System Guide
By default, this option is disabled.
2 - 59
Issue 8.0
VM8000

14-02-10
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Caller ID
Enable (1) a trunk ability to receive Caller ID data.


20-09-02
By default, a trunk’s ability to receive Caller ID data is disabled (0).
Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) – Caller ID Display
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable the Caller ID display at an extension.
This option does not apply to VM8000 InMail Voice Mail Ports.


20-06-01
By default, this option is disabled.
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service to extensions.

By default, extension 101 has Class 15. All other extensions have Class 1.
Operation
Not applicable.
2 - 60
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Caller ID with Return Call
Description
Refer to Make Call on page 2-239.
Related Features
Refer to Make Call on page 2-239.
Programming
Refer to Make Call on page 2-239.
Operation
Refer to Make Call on page 2-239.
InMail System Guide
2 - 61
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 62
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Calling the Automated Attendant
Description
Automated Attendant callers can use various VM8000 InMail features and then return
to the Automated Attendant for additional dialing options. This lets the caller dial other
extensions, leave messages for co-workers, or use other Automated Attendant
features. The features below describe several ways to return to the Automated
Attendant.
Automated Attendant Transfer
An extension user can transfer their trunk call to the Automated Attendant so the outside
caller can use the Automated Attendant dialing options.
Next Call Routing Mailbox
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options after they
leave a message in a mailbox (depending on the setting of the Dialing Option).
Related Features
Refer to the features referenced in Description on page 2-63 above.
Programming
Refer to the features referenced in Description on page 2-63 above.
Operation
Refer to the features referenced in Description on page 2-63 above.
InMail System Guide
2 - 63
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Cascade Message Notification
Enhancements
Version 6000 or higher provides the following:
• Message Notification now supports day of week scheduling in addition to time of
day. This applies to station and group subscriber mailboxes. This feature requires
the Version 6000 Enhancement license (0035).
• You can now set Cascade Message Notification options from User Pro.
• In addition to User Pro, when language prompt Version 2.30 or higher is
installed on the InMail CF, the Cascade Message Notification Day of Week
schedule options can be set from the mailbox telephone interface.
• With Version 8000 or higher software, the Message Notification can either
Ignore or Queue notification requests for messages left when there is no active
notification destination. Ignore is the common operation and operates the same as
Message Notification in prior software releases. If a message is received outside
an active schedule, the message is ignored when the schedule becomes active.
The Queue feature stores the requests and will attempt to deliver the stored
requests as soon as a destination becomes active. This feature also requires the
Version 8000 enhancement license (0037).
Description
If an extension user receives a new message in their mailbox, Cascading Message
Notification will call them, at up to five preset destinations, to let them know a new
voice mail message has arrived. A destination can be an outside number (such as a
cell phone, pager, or home office) or a co-worker's extension.
The Cascading Message Notification destinations are set up in the Notification
Schedule. Each of the five schedule entries can be individually enabled or disabled
and provides options for:
2 - 64

Type: Voice call or pager.

Start Hour: The time the destinations becomes active.

End Hour: The time the destinations becomes inactive.

Number: The destination telephone, pager, or extension number.

Busy Attempts: The number of times the system will try the destination when it is
busy. The system cancels notification callouts for this entry when the Busy
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Attempts number is met.

RNA Attempts: The number of times the system will try the destination when it is
unanswered. The system cancels notification callouts for this entry when the
RNA Attempts number is met.

Security: Enables or disables the Security Code requirement for the notification
destinations. For example, you may want to disable the Security Code when the
destination is your cell phone and it may be inconvenient to dial digits after
answering the notification callout.
When the extension user enables Cascading Message Notification, the system will try
each enabled destination that is active for the current time (i.e., in-schedule). The
system will not try any destinations that are disabled or are not in-schedule. When the
retries for a particular destination have been met, the system will immediately move to
the next destination.
Service Conditions:

When a mailbox has a new message and the message is deleted using the User
Pro interface, the MWI of the mailbox will be turned off, but message notification
will not be cancelled.

The Message Notification Queue feature requires Version 8000 or higher
software and the Version 8000 enhancement license (0037).

The Message Notification Queue feature can be changed using system
programming only.

The Message Notification Queue feature is set on a per mailbox basis.

Main Software version 4.00 or greater is required to support this feature.

This feature requires the SV8100 R4 Enhancement license (0033).

The InMail language prompts installed on the CF must be version 2.10 or
greater. The VM8000 InMail Utility is used to update the installed language
prompts.

If the InMail CF has version 2.00 instead of version 2.10 prompt sets installed,
only a single destination Message Notification is available using Notification
Schedule entry 1.

Retry Interval timers are set on a system wide basis only.

The pager dial string is set on a system wide basis only.

Notification settings can be changed using the Telephone Mailbox Option
Interface or system programming only.

When the retries for a particular destination have been met the system will
immediately move to the next destination even if there is only one destination
active.
InMail System Guide
2 - 65
Issue 8.0
2 - 66
VM8000

Once the notification process begins, a new message does not restart the
process if it is already in progress. Once the process ends (e.g., if the message
is acknowledged or the maximum number of callout attempts is reached), the
next new message will restart the process.

The system determines which numbers are internal extensions or external
numbers by the system dial plan settings.

Depending on the system, ARS routing may be needed to properly route
external calls.

If no trunks are available when an outside destination is attempted it is counted
as a Busy No Answer attempt.

If language prompt Version 2.30 or higher is not installed on the InMail CF,
Cascade Message Notification schedule options can only be changed from
WebPro, PCPro or system programming for either station subscriber or group
subscriber mailboxes.

When language prompt Version 2.30 or higher is installed on the InMail CF,
Cascade Message Notification schedule options can be set from the mailbox
telephone interface interface for both station and group subscriber mailboxes.

The Cascade Message Notification schedule by day of week requires Version
6000 or higher software and the Version 6000 Enhancement license (0035).
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Figure 2-2 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 1
InMail System Guide
2 - 67
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Figure 2-3 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 2
2 - 68
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Figure 2-4 Cascade Message Notification Flow Chart 3
InMail System Guide
2 - 69
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Message Notification to Normal Telephone Numbers
Below is a basic overview of how Message Notification works with phone numbers,
assuming the retry attempts are at default. The system determines which numbers
are internal extensions or external numbers by the system dial plan settings.
Depending on the system, ARS routing may be needed to properly route external
calls.
1.
The subscriber activates Message Notification for their mailbox.
2.
When the subscriber receives a new message, the InMail dials the first active
destination in the cascade that should receive the Message Notification.

3.
InMail waits up to 30 seconds (approximately 5 rings) for ringback, reorder,
busy, or voice activity from the called number. If nothing is detected, the
callout is considered unanswered (RNA).
If the recipient answers, InMail plays the notification message (“Hello, I have a
message for”) and asks the recipient to dial 1 to log onto their mailbox. The
recipient hears the notification message if:

They say “Hello” after answering the callout, or

The system receives answer supervision from the telco after the recipient
answers the call. (Note that the recipient can skip the announcement by
dialing 1 to log onto their mailbox after answering the callout – without
saying “Hello”.), or

The notification is to a system extension.
4.
Once the recipient logs onto the mailbox, the notification is considered
acknowledged and will not reoccur until the subscriber receives new messages.
5.
If the recipient doesn’t answer, the system follows the Cascading Message
Notification retry attempt settings, and notification will eventually stop if the call
is not answered.
6.
Once the notification process begins, a new message does not restart the
process if it is already in progress. Once the process ends (e.g., if the message
is acknowledged or the maximum number of callout attempts is reached), the
next new message will restart the process.
Message Notification to Pager Numbers
Below is a basic overview of how Message Notification works with pager numbers,
assuming the retry attempts are at default. The system determines which numbers
are internal extensions or external numbers by the system dial plan settings.
Depending on the system, ARS routing may be needed to properly route external
calls.
1.
2 - 70
The subscriber activates Message Notification for their mailbox.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
2.
When the subscriber receives a new message, InMail immediately dials the
pager service.

3.
InMail waits up to 30 seconds (approximately 5 rings) for ringback, reorder,
busy, or voice activity from the called number. If nothing is detected, the
callout is considered unanswered.
After the pager service answers, InMail waits for the timer 47-01-08 then sends
the dial string in 47-01-07 which causes the pager display to show the
subscriber's mailbox number as well as the number of new messages in the
mailbox.

The notification is considered acknowledged if the subscriber logs onto
their mailbox.

If the notification is not acknowledged (within a programmable time frame,
47-01-12) the pager notification is repeated (up to the RNA attempts
count, 47-20-07).

If the pager service doesn't answer, the system follows the Cascading
Message Notification rules and notification will eventually stop if the call is
not answered.
Guide to Feature Programming
Program
Number
47-01-07
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Digital Pager Callback Number
Digital Pager Callback Number
(Pager CBack)
Set the Digital Pager Callback
Number portion of the Message
Notification callout number for a
digital pager. This is the portion of
the callout number that is
appended to the pager service
telephone number. Normally, this
option should be XM#, where
 X is the number of the
extension that generated the
notification.
  is a visual delimiter (to make
the pager display easier to
read).
 M is the number of new
messages in the extension
mailbox.
 # is the digit normally used by
the pager service for positive
disconnect.
InMail System Guide
2
3
Digits (12 maximum,
using 0~9, # and )
M (Number of
messages – entered by
pressing LK1)
X (Extension number –
entered by pressing
LK2)
SV8100 InMail
automatically replaces
the X command with
the number of the
extension that initially
received the message.

(default = XM#)
2 - 71
Issue 8.0
Program
Number
47-01-08
VM8000
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Dialing Digital Pager Callback
Number Delay
Delay in Dialing Digital Pager
Callback Number
(Pager Dial Delay)
47-01-11
47-01-12
47-01-13
2 - 72
Wait Between Digital Pager
Callout Attempts
Wait Between Busy Non-Pager
RNA Non-Pager Callout Attempt
Interval
Number of RNA rings
3
0~99 (sec)
Set the delay that occurs just
before SV8100 InMail dials the
Digital Pager Callback Number
portion of the Message Notification
callout number for a digital pager.
Set this delay so the pager service
has enough time to connect to the
digital pager before sending the
callback number.
47-01-09
2

Use this option to set the minimum
time (1-255 minutes) between
unacknowledged or unanswered
digital pager Message Notification
callouts. (A subscriber
acknowledges a digital pager
notification by logging onto their
mailbox.) After this interval
expires, InMail will try the callout
again.
1~255 (min)
Callout Attempts (Notify Busy
Intvl)
Set the time SV8100 InMail waits
after it dials a busy non-pager
callout destination, before retrying
the callout number.
1~255 (min)
Wait Between RNA Non-Pager
Callout Attempts
(Notify RNA Intvl)
Set the time SV8100 InMail waits,
after it dials an unanswered nonpager callout destination, before
retrying the callout number.
1~255 (min)
Wait for Answer Non-Pager
Callout Attempts
(Notify RNA Rings)
If a non-pager callout rings the
destination longer than this
number of rings, SV8100 InMail
marks the call as unanswered
(Ring No Answer) and hangs up.
1~99 (min)
Default = 15

Default=15
Default=30


Default=5

Features
VM8000
Program
Number
47-01-14
47-02-23
47-06-21
47-20-01
Issue 8.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Number of Cascading Attempts
All Message Notification Enabled
(Subscriber Mailbox)
All Message Notification Enabled
(Group Mailbox)
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification
Number of Cascading Attempts
(Notify Call Attempt)
Set how many attempts SV8100
InMail retries an incomplete
Message Notification callout. This
total includes unacknowledged
callouts, callouts to a busy
destination, and callouts to an
unanswered destination. This
option applies to pager and
non-pager callouts.
1~99 (min)
Use this option to enable or
disable notification for the
subscriber mailbox. If disabled,
enabling the individual notification
entries has no effect.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Use this option to enable or
disable notification for the group
mailbox. If disabled, enabling the
individual notification entries has
no effect.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification. If enabled,
notification will occur when the
mailbox receives a new message
according to the settings for Type,
Start Hour, End Hour, and
notification Phone Number. If
disabled, Message Notification will
not occur.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
2
3
Default=5


Default = 1

Default = 1
Default = 1

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
InMail System Guide
2 - 73
Issue 8.0
Program
Number
47-20-02
VM8000
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification Begin Hour
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set the hour when
Message Notification will start.
Notification will occur only for new
messages received between this
setting and the End Hour setting.
This entry is in 24-hour (military
time). For example, 08 is 8:00 AM
and 20 is 8:00 PM. For 24-hour
notification, make the Start Hour
the same as the End Hour.
2
3
0-23 (24 Hour Clock)
Default = 0

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-20-03
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification End Hour
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set the hour when
Message Notification will stop.
Notification will occur only for new
messages received between the
Start Hour and this setting. This
entry is in 24-hour (military time).
For example, 08 is 8:00 AM and
20 is 8:00 PM. For 24-hour
notification, make the Start Hour
the same as the End Hour.
0-23 (24 Hour Clock)
Default = 0

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-20-04
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification Type
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set the Message
Notification type. The choices are
Voice and Pager. Choose Voice
when the Phone Number entry is
to a regular office, home, or mobile
telephone. Choose Pager when
you want to deliver the notification
to a digital pager.
0 = Undefined
1= Voice
2 = Pager
Default = 1

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
2 - 74
Features
VM8000
Program
Number
47-20-05
Issue 8.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification Number
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set the telephone
number (16 digits maximum)
Message Notification will dial to
notify the subscriber of new
messages. Enter the number
exactly as you want the system to
dial it (including a leading 1 for toll
calls, if required), but do not
include a line access code (such
as 9). If the number you enter is
extension number, it will be an
Intercom call. Otherwise, it will be
an outside call. (The system
decides by referring its numbering
plan.)
2
3
Valid number up to 16
digits.
Default = Blank

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-20-06
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification Busy Attempts
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set how many times
InMail will retry an incomplete
Message Notification callout to a
busy destination. This option
applies to pager and non-pager
callouts. If the Busy Attempts and
RNA Attempts are both met, the
notification callout to the selected
entry is cancelled.
1-99 (Attempts)
Default = 5

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
InMail System Guide
2 - 75
Issue 8.0
Program
Number
47-20-07
VM8000
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification RNA Attempts
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set how many times
InMail will retry an incomplete
Message Notification callout when
the destination does not answer.
This option applies to pager and
non-pager callouts. If the Busy
Attempts and RNA Attempts are
both met, the notification callout to
the selected entry is cancelled.
2
3
1-99 (Attempts)
Default = 5

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-20-08
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Security
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Security Code protection for the
callout. If enabled, the user is
required to enter their security in
order to log on and hear the new
message. If disabled, the Security
Code is not required.
0 = Security code not
required.
1 = Security code
required.
Default = 0

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-20-09
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Sunday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Sunday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-20-10
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Monday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Monday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
2 - 76


Features
VM8000
Program
Number
47-20-11
Issue 8.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Tuesday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Tuesday.
Default = 0
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Wednesday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on
Wednesday.
3
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-20-12
2

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-20-13
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Thursday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Thursday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-20-14
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Friday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Friday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-20-15
Station Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Saturday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Saturday.
InMail System Guide

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.


2 - 77
Issue 8.0
Program
Number
47-22-01
VM8000
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification. If enabled,
notification will occur when the
mailbox receives a new message
according to the settings for Type,
Start Hour, End Hour, and
notification Phone Number. If
disabled, Message Notification will
not occur.
2
3
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Mailbox.
47-22-02
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification Begin Hour
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set the hour when
Message Notification will start.
Notification will occur only for new
messages received between this
setting and the End Hour setting.
This entry is in 24-hour (military
time). For example, 08 is 8:00 AM
and 20 is 8:00 PM. For 24-hour
notification, make the Start Hour
the same as the End Hour.
0-23 (24 Hour Clock)
Default = 0

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Mailbox
47-22-03
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification End Hour
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set the hour when
Message Notification will stop.
Notification will occur only for new
messages received between the
Start Hour and this setting. This
entry is in 24-hour (military time).
For example, 08 is 8:00 AM and
20 is 8:00 PM. For 24-hour
notification, make the Start Hour
the same as the End Hour.
0-23 (24 Hour Clock)
Default = 0

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Mailbox.
2 - 78
Features
VM8000
Program
Number
47-22-04
Issue 8.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification Type
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set the Message
Notification type. The choices are
Voice and Pager. Choose Voice
when the Phone Number entry is
to a regular office, home, or mobile
telephone. Choose Pager when
you want to deliver the notification
to a digital pager.
2
3
0 = Undefined
(Disabled)
1= Voice
2 = Pager
Default = 1

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Mailbox.
47-22-05
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification Number
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set the telephone
number (16 digits maximum)
Message Notification will dial to
notify the subscriber of new
messages. Enter the number
exactly as you want the system to
dial it (including a leading 1 for toll
calls, if required), but do not
include a line access code (such
as 9). If the number you enter is
extension number, it will be an
Intercom call. Otherwise, it will be
an outside call. (The system
decides by referring its numbering
plan.)
Valid number up to 16
digits.
Default = Blank

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Mailbox.
47-22-06
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification Busy Attempts
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set how many times
InMail will retry an incomplete
Message Notification callout to a
busy destination. This option
applies to pager and non-pager
callouts. If the Busy Attempts and
RNA Attempts are both met, the
notification callout to the selected
entry is cancelled.
1-99 (Attempts)
Default = 5

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Mailbox.
InMail System Guide
2 - 79
Issue 8.0
Program
Number
47-22-07
VM8000
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification RNA Attempts
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to set how many times
InMail will retry an incomplete
Message Notification callout when
the destination does not answer.
This option applies to pager and
non-pager callouts. If the Busy
Attempts and RNA Attempts are
both met, the notification callout to
the selected entry is cancelled.
2
3
1-99 (Attempts)
Default = 5

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Mailbox.
47-22-08
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options Notification Security
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Security Code protection for the
callout. If enabled, the user is
required to enter their security in
order to log on and hear the new
message. If disabled, the Security
Code is not required.
0 = Security code not
required.
1 = Security code
required.
Default = 0

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Mailbox.
47-22-09
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Sunday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Sunday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-22-10
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Monday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Monday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-22-11
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Tuesday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Tuesday.
2 - 80

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Subscriber
Mailbox.


Features
VM8000
Program
Number
47-22-12
Issue 8.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Wednesday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on
Wednesday.
2
3
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0

There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-22-13
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Thursday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Thursday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-22-14
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Friday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Friday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-22-15
Group Mailbox Message
Notification Options – Day of
Week Saturday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Message Notification on Saturday.


0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are five separatelyprogrammed Message notification
entries for each Group Subscriber
Mailbox.

Operation
To setup Cascade Notification:
1.
InMail System Guide
Access the All Message Notification Setting menu.
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox
2 - 81
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Mailbox Options menu.
Notification Type Selection menu.
All Message Notifications Setting menu.
2.
All Message Notifications Setting menu.
2.1 Soft key Operation (3-Line Phone/Super Display Phone)
On/On Turn All Notifications on.
Off/Off Turn All Notifications off.
Dest/Destinations Proceed to notification Destination Selection Menu.
Back/Back Go back to Notification Type Selections Menu
2.2 Key Operation
Key 3 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection Menu.
Key 6 Toggle All Notifications on/off.
Key 9 Exit from Mailbox.
Key # Go back to Notification Type Selection menu.
3.
Notification Destination Selection menu
3.1 Soft key Operation (3-Line Phone/Super Display Phone)
2 - 82
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Dest1/Destination1 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 1 Menu.
Dest2/Destination2 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 2 Menu.
Dest3/Destination3 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 3 Menu.
Dest4/Destination4 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 4 Menu.
Dest4/Destination5 Proceed to Notification Destination Selection 5 Menu.
Back
Go back to All Message Notifications Setting menu.
3.2 Key Operation
Key 1
Key 2
Key 3
Key 4
Key 5
Key 9
Key #
4.
Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 1 menu.
Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 2 menu.
Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 3 menu.
Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 4 menu.
Proceed to Phone Notification Destination 5 menu.
Exit from mailbox.
Go back to All Message Notifications Setting menu.
Message Notification main menu
InMail plays a summary of your Message Notification settings.
4.1 Soft key Operation (3-Line Phone/Super Display Phone)
Enbl/Enable
Turn destination[x] notifications on.
Disbl/Disable
Turn destination[x] notifications off.
Change/Change Go to destination[x] notification setting menus.
Back/Back
Go back to Notification Destination Selection menu.
4.2 Key Operation
Key 2
Key 3
Key #
InMail System Guide
Go to destination[x] notification setting menus.
Toggle destination[x] notifications on/off.
Go back to Notification Destination Selection menu.
2 - 83
Issue 8.0
VM8000
5.
Message Notification Programming (Begin Hour)
6.
Message Notification Programming (End Hour)
7.
Message Notification Programming (Notification Type)
8.
Message Notification Programming (Number)
9.
Message Notification Programming (Security Code Required)
9.1 Soft key Operation (3-Line Phone/Super Display Phone)
Req/Required
Turn "Security Code Required" flag On.
NoReq/Not Required Turn "Security Code Required" flag Off.
Next/Next
Keep current setting and proceed to Busy Attempt count
menu.
Exit/Exit
Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu.
9.2 Key Operation
Key 7
Key 6
Key *
Key #
10.
Turn "Security Code Required" flag On.
Turn "Security Code Required" flag Off.
Keep current setting and proceed to Busy Attempt count
menu.
Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu.
Message Notification Programming (Busy Attempt count)
10.1Soft key Operation (3-Line Phone/Super Display Phone)
Next/Next
Keep current setting and proceed to RNA Attempt menu.
2 - 84
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Exit/Exit
Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu.
10.2 Key Operation
Key 0-9
Set Busy Attempt count.
Key *
Keep current setting and proceed to RNA Attempt count
menu.
Key #
Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu.
11.
Message Notification Programming (RNA Attempt count)
11.1Soft key Operation (3-Line Phone/Super Display Phone)
Next/Next
Keep current setting and proceed to main Notification
menu.
Exit/Exit
Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu.
11.2 Key Operation
Key 0-9
Set RNA Attempt count.
Key *
Keep current setting and proceed to main Notification
menu.
Key #
Keep current setting and return to main Notification menu.
The graphics below provide a User Menu for Cascade Message Notification.
InMail System Guide
2 - 85
Issue 8.0
VM8000
2 - 86
Features
VM8000
InMail System Guide
Issue 8.0
2 - 87
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 88
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Dial Action Table
Enhancements
With SV8100 Version 8000 or higher 32 Dial Action Tables are supported.
Description
The Dial Action Table defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen
by the active Answer Table, which in turn provides those dialing options to Automated
Attendant callers. VM8000 InMail provides 32 Dial Action Tables. The Dial Action
Table is an integral part of the Automated Attendant. The Automated Attendant can
automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming calls, play an Instruction Menu
message, and provide dialing options to callers. There are 3 major Automated
Attendant components:

Answer Table
The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside
calls on each trunk, according to the time of the day and day of the week that
the call is ringing. The Answer Table divides the time of day and day of the week
into individual schedules, which in turn assign a Call Routing Mailbox to each
call. When a specific schedule is not in effect, the Answer Table uses its Default
Mailbox to determine routing. With SV8100 Version 8000 or higher 16 Answer
Tables are supported.


By default, all trunks use Answer Table 1. Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs
Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
Routing Mailbox
A Call Routing Mailbox is a mailbox associated with an individual Answer Table
schedule or the Default Mailbox. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) are available to callers. It also provides the Instruction Menu to callers
which typically greets the callers and describes the dialing options.


By default, Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from
8:30AM to 5:00PM. This schedule and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing
Mailbox 1.
Dial Action Table
After the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table provides the
dialing options to callers. Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action
(function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial action used depends on the setting in
the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the Answer Table
setup. With SV8100 Version 8000 or higher there are 32 Dial Action Tables.
InMail System Guide
2 - 89
Issue 8.0
VM8000

By default, Call Routing Mailbox 1 uses Dial Action Table 1.
The following block diagram shows the default VM8000 InMail Automated
Attendant configuration.
DIL to Voice Mail Master (200)
22-01-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup
22-07-01 DIL Setup
InMail
Default
Automated Attendant Answering
Trunks Route to Answer Table 1
47-10-01 Answer Table Assignment
Answer Table 1
47-11 Answer Table Options
Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox
47-12 Answer Schedules
47-11-03 Default Mailbox
Call Routing Mailbox 1
47-08 Call Routing Mailbox Options
Dial Action Table 1
47-13 Dial Action Tables
2 - 90
All calls route to Call Routing Mailbox 1
Schedule 1 active M-F 8:30AM-5:00PM
Default Mailbox active all other times
From a System Administrator mailbox,
record an Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options:
Dial an extension number, or
O for the operator.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Dial Action Table Options
The following table summarizes the Dial Action Table dial (key) actions and their
associated features.
Dial Action Table Key Action Summary
Feature
Reference
Action
Description
TRF
Screened Transfer (1)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place a Screened Transfer to an
extension. VM8000 InMail calls (screens) the destination to see if the call can go
through.
Screened
Transfer on
page 2-307
UTRF
Unscreened Transfer (2)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place an Unscreened Transfer to an
extension.VM8000 InMail transfers the call the destination and then hangs up.
Unscreened
Transfer on
page 2-337
REC1
Quick Message with Greeting (3)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension.
The caller hears the extension personal greeting.
Quick Message
on page 2-293
REC2
Quick Message without Greeting (4)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at an extension.
The caller does not hear the extension personal greeting
Quick Message
on page 2-293
LOGON
Log On to Voice Mail (5)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to log on to a mailbox, either directly or
one of their choosing.
Log On to
Voice Mail on
page 2-221
Hang Up
Hang Up (6)
VM8000 InMail says “Goodbye” and hangs up.
Hang Up on
page 2-181
Go to a Mailbox (7)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to route to another mailbox.
Go To A
Mailbox on
page 2-161
Undefined Routing (0)
This action provides no routing.
Not applicable
GOTO
UND
Related Features
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming
calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers.
Answer Table
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each trunk.
Routing Mailbox
The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial
Action Table) and announcement are available to Automated Attendant callers.
InMail System Guide
2 - 91
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming
1.
Assign a Dial Action Table to each active Call Routing Mailbox.

47-08-01
Dial Action Table
The Call Routing Mailbox uses the Dial Action Table assignment to provide
dialing options to callers.

The default Call Routing Mailboxes (1~8) use Dial Action Table 1.
2.
Customize the Dial Action Table options.

47-13
VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables

The default Dial Action Table dialing options are:
Dial Action Table Default Settings
Key
Dial Action Tables 2-16
0
UTRF to 101
(Unscreened Transfer to operator)
UND
(Undefined)
1
UTRF to XXX
(Unscreened Transfer to operator)
UND
(Undefined)
2
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
3
UTRF to XXX
(Unscreened Transfer to user-dialed extension)
UND
(Undefined)
4
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
5
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
6
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
7
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
8
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
9
HNGUP
(Hangup)
UND
(Undefined)
*
REC1 to IXXX
(Quick Message with Greeting to user-dialed extension)
UND
(Undefined)
#
LOGON to IXXX
(Logon to user-dialed mailbox)
UND
(Undefined)
UTRF to 101
(Unscreened Transfer to operator)
UND
(Undefined)
Timeout
2 - 92
Dial Action Table 1
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
3.
Set the time limit for dialing commands for the Automated Attendant caller.

47-08-03
Time Limit for Dialing Commands (Dialing Timeout)
Enter the Time Limit for Dialing Commands interval (0~5 seconds).

By default, the interval is 5 seconds.
If the caller waits too long to dial:

When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout action
programmed, the caller routes to that destination.

When the associated Dial Action Table does not have a Timeout action
programmed, the Instruction Menu repeats three times and then
VM8000 InMail hangs up.
4.
If using one key dialing from Auto Attendant to a stored speed dial number.

45-01-05
Message Wait
This program must be disabled (0) for one key dialing to a speed dial buffer
from Auto Attendant to work.

By default, this feature is enabled.
Operation
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 93
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 94
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Directory Dialing
Description
Directory Dialing allows an Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by
dialing the first few letters in the extension user’s name. With Directory Dialing, the
caller does not have to remember the extension number of the person they wish to
reach – just their name. Here is how Directory Dialing works:
1.
When the Automated Attendant answers, it sends the call to a Directory Dialing
Mailbox. (Optionally, the caller may be asked to dial a digit to access Directory
Dialing.)
2.
The Directory Dialing Mailbox plays the Directory Dialing Message (recorded by
the System Administrator) which asks the caller to dial letters for the name of
the person they wish to reach.
3.
The caller dials the letters for the person’s name plus #. They can dial by first
name or last name, depending on how the Directory Dialing Message was
recorded and the Directory Dialing Mailbox was set up.
4.
VM8000 InMail searches the list of programmed extension names for a match of
the caller-entered letters.
5.
Voice prompts announce the first three matches, and allow the caller to dial a
digit (1~3) to reach one of the announced matches. Additionally, the caller can
dial 4 to hear additional matches (if any).
6.
The caller dials the digit for the extension they wish to reach, and VM8000
InMail sends the call to that extension. The call is sent as a Screened or
Unscreened transfer, depending on programming.
For callers to use Directory Dialing, the system must have a name programmed for
each extension (up to 12 characters, A~Z, using upper and lower case letters). Each
extension should also have a name recorded in their Subscriber Mailbox. In addition,
each extension used by Directory Dialing must be installed and must have their
Subscriber Mailbox active.
The Directory Dialing Mailbox is a Routing Mailbox assigned as a Directory Dialing
Mailbox. See Use a Routing Mailbox for Directory Dialing on page 2-96 below or Use
a Call Routing Mailbox for Directory Dialing on page 2-99 for more information.
Conditions

InMail System Guide
Remote CCIS extensions are not supported in a centralized directory.
2 - 95
Issue 8.0
VM8000

When set for Unscreened Transfer, calls from the InMail ring at the
extension like other transferred calls and display the incoming Caller ID
data (if provided by Telco and enabled in programming) while the phone
is ringing.

When set for Screened Transfers, calls from the InMail ring like Intercom
calls but do not display incoming Caller ID data (if provided by Telco and
enabled in programming) until after the call is answered.
Related Features
Directory Dialing Mailbox
A Directory Dialing Mailbox is the type of mailbox required to implement Directory Dialing.
System Administrator
Only the System Administrator can record the Directory Dialing Message.
Programming
Use a Routing Mailbox for Directory Dialing
1.
Set up the Directory Dialing Mailbox.

47-07-02
Routing Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type)
Enter 4 to make the selected Routing Mailbox a Directory Dialing Mailbox.

By default, there are no Routing Mailboxes assigned as Directory Dialing
Mailboxes.
2.
Set up the name programming and enter names.

47-01-16
Name Format
Determine how extension names should be entered in 15-01-01 Extension
Name or via the telephone. The options are 0 (first name followed by last
name) or 1 (last name followed by first name).


15-01-01
By default, the system expects names to be entered as first name followed by last
name (0).
Extension Name (Ext Name)
Enter the name for each extension. Refer to 47-01-16 Name Format for
name format.


47-15-03
By default, there are no names entered.
Name Match
Select the portion of the extension name on which the Directory Dialing
Mailbox should route. Enter 0 for first; 1 for last. This option allows for
2 - 96
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
dial-by-first-name and dial-by-last-name Directory Dialing.
For example, if 47-01-16 Name Format is 0 and the name in 15-01-01
Extension Name is entered as first name followed by last name, enter 1 in
this option to set up last name dialing.

By default, the Directory Dialing Mailbox routes on the first portion of the name
(0).
3.
Set up Directory Lists to control which extensions Directory Dialing can access.

47-02-15
Directory List Number
Select the Directory List to which the extension belongs. The entries are
1~8 (for lists 1~8), 0 (for no list), or * (for all lists). Directory Dialing to the
extension can occur only if the list entry matches the setting in 47-15-02
Directory List Number to Use for the Directory Dialing Mailbox.


47-15-02
By default, extensions are not included in a Directory List (0).
Directory List Number to Use
The Directory Dialing Mailbox can route calls only to the members of the
Directory List specified in this option. The entries are 1~8 (for lists 1~8).

By default, the Directory Dialing Mailbox uses list 1.
4.
Specify the required number of letters of the employee name the caller must
dial.

47-15-01
Minimum Number of Letters Required
Specify how many letters of an employee’s name the caller must dial to use
Directory Dialing. If the caller dials less than the specified minimum number
of letters, VM8000 InMail cannot route the call. The entries are 1~3 (1~3
letters).

5.
By default, callers must dial at least 1 letter of the employee’s name (1).
Select Screened or Unscreened Transfer call routing, when Directory Dialing
finds a name match.
Unscreened Transfer

47-15-04
Transfer Option
Enter 1 to route the call as an Unscreened Transfer.

By default, VM8000 InMail routes the call as a Screened Transfer (0).
Screened Transfer

47-15-04
Transfer Option
Enter 0 to route the call as a Screened Transfer.


47-15-05
By default, VM8000 InMail routes the call as a Screened Transfer (0).
Screened Transfer Timeout
Set how long a Screened Transfer from the Directory Dialing Mailbox will
InMail System Guide
2 - 97
Issue 8.0
VM8000
ring an unanswered extension before recalling. The entries are 1~255
seconds or 0 for no recall.

By default, the Screened Transfer Timeout interval is 15 seconds.
6.
Change the amount of time Directory Dialing callers have to dial letters.

47-15-06
Time Limit for Dialing Commands
Enter the new timeout duration (0~99 seconds).
If the caller waits too long to dial, the Directory Dialing Message repeats.

7.
Record a Directory Dialing Message.
See Operation on page 2-103.
The Directory Dialing Message is the Instruction Menu for the Routing Mailbox
programmed as a Directory Dialing Mailbox.


By default, Directory Dialing callers have 5 seconds to dial letters.
By default (without a custom message recorded), the Directory Dialing Message is,
“Please enter one or more letters of the person’s name, then press the pound key.”
47-01-04
Non-Subscriber Message Length (Mbox Msg Length)
This option sets the maximum message length (1~4095 seconds) for
Instruction Menus.

By default, this option is 120 seconds.
8.
Enable or disable the ability of the Directory Dialing Mailbox to detect and route
incoming faxes.

47-15-07
Fax Detection
Enter 1 to enable Fax Detection; 0 to disable. If enabled, when the Directory
Dialing Mailbox detects incoming fax CNG tone, it routes the call to the fax
extension specified in 47-01-06 Fax Extension.
See Fax Detection on page 2-139 for more.

By default, Fax Detection is disabled (0).
9.
Enable the Directory Dialing Mailbox caller to dial 0 for other options or # to
return to the Automated Attendant.

47-15-08
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox (1~32) to the Directory Dialing Mailbox.
To remove an assignment, press Hold.
Once assigned, dialing # returns to the Automated Attendant. Dialing 0
follows the 0 action of the Next Call Routing Mailbox.

10.
Enable Directory Dialing Mailbox to directly answer an outside call.
Make sure the active Answer Table uses the Call Routing Mailbox programmed
as a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
See Answer Table on page 2-27 for more.

2 - 98
By default, no Next Call Routing Mailbox is assigned.
By default, Answer Table 1 routes to Routing Mailbox 000, which is a Call Routing
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Mailbox.
11.
Enable callers to access Directory Dialing from a Dial Action Table action.
Make sure you have an action in the active Dial Action Table that is a GOTO to
the Directory Dialing Mailbox.
See Dial Action Table on page 2-89 for more.

By default, no actions are assigned as a GOTO to a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
Use a Call Routing Mailbox for Directory Dialing
1.
Set up the Directory Dialing Mailbox.

47-03-02
Mailbox Number
Enter the mailbox number for the Call Routing Mailbox. This number must
correspond to a Department Group pilot number set up in 11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers.
When using a Call Routing Mailbox as an additional resource (for example,
as an extra Directory Dialing Mailbox), you can perform the following
actions:

Assign a pilot number to an unused Department Group in 11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers.

Set up the Call Routing Mailbox in 47-03 using this pilot number.

When 47-03 programming is complete, remove the pilot number
assignment in 11-07-01 Department Group Pilot Numbers.


47-03-03
By default, no Call Routing Mailbox numbers are assigned.
Mailbox Type
Enter 3 to make the selected Call Routing Mailbox a Directory Dialing
Mailbox.

By default, all Call Routing Mailboxes are set up as Call Routing Mailboxes (1).
2.
Set up the name programming and enter names.

47-01-16
Name Format
Determine how extension names should be entered in 15-01-01 Extension
Name or via the telephone. The options are 0 (first name followed by last
name) or 1 (last name followed by first name).


15-01-01
By default, the system expects names to be entered as first name followed by last
name (0).
Extension Name
Enter the name for each extension. The format you use should follow the
setting of 47-01-16 Name Format.

InMail System Guide
By default, STA 101 = Ext 101, STA 102 = Ext 102, etc.
2 - 99
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-15-03
Name Match
Select the portion of the extension name on which the Directory Dialing
Mailbox should route. Enter 0 for first; 1 for last. This option allows for
dial-by-first-name and dial-by-last-name Directory Dialing.
For example, if 47-01-16 Name Format is 0 and the name in 15-01-01
Extension Name is entered as first name followed by last name, enter 1 in
this option to set up last name dialing.

By default, the Directory Dialing Mailbox routes on the first portion of the name
(0).
3.
Set up Directory Lists to control which extensions Directory Dialing can access.

47-02-15
Directory List (Directory List)
Select the Directory List to which the extension belongs. The entries are
1~8 (for lists 1~8), 0 (for no list), or * (for all lists). Directory Dialing to the
extension can occur only if the list entry matches the setting in 47-14-02
Directory List Number to Use for the Directory Dialing Mailbox.


47-15-02
By default, extensions are not included in a Directory List (0).
Directory List Number to Use
The Directory Dialing Mailbox can route calls only to the members of the
Directory List specified in this option. The entries are 1~8 (for lists 1~8).

By default, the Directory Dialing Mailbox uses list 1.
4.
How many letters of the employee’s name must the caller dial?

47-14-01
Minimum Number of Letters Required
Specify how many letters of an employee’s name the caller must dial to use
Directory Dialing. If the caller dials less than the specified minimum number
of letters, VM8000 InMail cannot route the call. The entries are 1~3 (1~3
letters).

5.
By default, callers must dial at least 1 letter of the employee’s name (1).
Specify the call routing as a Screened or Unscreened Transfer when Directory
Dialing finds a name match.
Unscreened Transfer

47-15-04
Transfer Option
Enter 1 to route the call as an Unscreened Transfer.

By default, VM8000 InMail routes the call as a Screened Transfer (0).
Screened Transfer

47-15-04
Transfer Option
Enter 0 to route the call as a Screened Transfer.

2 - 100
By default, VM8000 InMail routes the call as a Screened Transfer (0).
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-15-05
Screened Transfer Timeout
Set how long a Screened Transfer from the Directory Dialing Mailbox will
ring an unanswered extension before recalling. The entries are 1~255
seconds or 0 for no recall.

By default, the Screened Transfer Timeout interval is 15 seconds.
6.
To change the amount of time Directory Dialing callers have to dial letters:

47-15-06
Time Limit for Dialing Commands
Enter the new timeout duration (0~99 seconds).
If the caller waits too long to dial, the Directory Dialing Message repeats.

7.
To record a Directory Dialing Message:
Refer to Operation on page 2-103.
The Directory Dialing Message is the Instruction Menu for the Call Routing
Mailbox programmed as a Directory Dialing Mailbox.


By default, Directory Dialing callers have 5 seconds to dial letters.
By default (without a custom message recorded), the Directory Dialing Message is,
“Please enter one or more letters of the person’s name, then press the pound key.”
47-01-04
Non-Subscriber Message Length (Mbox Msg Length)
This option sets the maximum message length (1~4095 seconds) for
Instruction Menus.

By default, this option is 120 seconds.
8.
Enable or disable the ability of the Directory Dialing Mailbox to detect and route
incoming faxes.

47-15-07
Fax Detection
Enter 1 to enable Fax Detection; 0 to disable. If enabled, when the Directory
Dialing Mailbox detects incoming fax CNG tone, it routes the call to the fax
extension specified in 47-01-06 Fax Extension.
See Fax Detection on page 2-139 for more.

By default, Fax Detection is disabled (0).
9.
Enable the Directory Dialing Mailbox caller to dial 0 for other options or # to
return to the Automated Attendant:

47-15-08
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox (1~32) to the Directory Dialing Mailbox.
To remove an assignment, press Hold.
Once assigned, dialing # returns to the Automated Attendant. Dialing 0
follows the 0 action of the Next Call Routing Mailbox.

InMail System Guide
By default, no Next Call Routing Mailbox is assigned.
2 - 101
Issue 8.0
VM8000
10.
Enable the Directory Dialing Mailbox to directly answer an outside call.
Make sure the active Answer Table uses the Call Routing Mailbox programmed
as a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
See Answer Table on page 2-27 for more.

11.
Enable callers to access Directory Dialing from a Dial Action Table action:
Make sure you have an action in the active Dial Action Table that is a GOTO to
the Directory Dialing Mailbox.
See Dial Action Table on page 2-89 for more.

2 - 102
By default, Answer Table 1 routes to Routing Mailbox 000, which is a Call Routing
Mailbox.
By default, no actions are assigned as a GOTO to a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Operation
Recording a Directory Dialing Message
Log On to System Administrator’s mailbox.
SA
(72)
Access System Administrator options.
[Not applicable]
I (4)
Select Instruction Menus.
[Instr]
Enter the Directory Dialing Mailbox number.
L (5)
Listen to the current Directory Dialing Message (if
any).
[Lstn]
#
R (7)
Exit listen mode.
Record a new Directory Dialing Message.
[Rec]
Record message.
#
0
*
Pause or restart recording.
[Resume]
[Pause]
D (3)
Delete recording.
[Del]
#
Exit recording mode.
[Done]
D (3)
Delete the Directory Dialing Message.
[Del]
#
Go back to the System Administrator options.
[Exit]
Go back to the System Administrator options.
[Exit]
Plays Help message.
Using Directory Dialing
To use Directory Dialing:
1.
After the Automated Attendant answers, wait for the Directory Dialing Message.
o The Automated Attendant may ask you to dial a digit for Directory Dialing.
2.
Dial the letters that correspond to the name of the person you wish to reach + #.
o The Directory Dialing Message tells how many letters you need to dial, and whether you
should enter the person’s first name or last name.
o To exit Directory Dialing without selecting a name, just dial #.
3.
The Automated Attendant announces the name matches, and tells you which digit to
dial (1~3) to reach each of the announced names.
o To hear additional name matches (if any), dial 4 instead.
4.
InMail System Guide
After you make your selection, the Automated Attendant routes your call to the name
selected.
2 - 103
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Dialing Options Available while Entering a Name
The following table shows the dialing options available to the caller while they are
entering a name into a Directory Dialing Mailbox.

By default, the caller can dial the digits 2~9 to enter the name or dial # to return
to the Automated Attendant.

If a Next Call Routing Mailbox is specified, the caller can dial the digits 2~9 to
enter a name, dial 0 to follow the 0 action of the Next Call Routing Mailbox, or
dial # to route directly to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Directory Dialing Mailbox Name Entry Options
(Options available while entering a name)
Dialed
Digit
Action
1
Not applicable
Entry is ignored.
2~9
Not applicable
Interprets the digit as a letter and waits about 20
seconds for additional input (i.e., more letters or a
# to conclude name entry). If no additional digits
are dialed for 10 seconds, the Directory Dialing
Message repeats and then VM8000 InMail hangs
up.
UND (Not assigned)
Repeats the Directory Dialing Message (to make
a new name entry) each time the caller dials the
digit.
1-32 (valid Call Routing
Mailbox)
Caller routes according to the 0 action of the Next
Call Routing Mailbox’s Dial Action Table.
*
Not applicable
Repeats the Directory Dialing Message (to make
a new name entry) each time the caller dials the
digit.
#
UND (Not assigned)
Routes to the Automated Attendant (i.e., back to
the Call Routing Mailbox that initially answered
the call).
1~32 (valid Call Routing
Mailbox)
Routes to the Next Call Routing Mailbox and
plays that mailbox Instruction Menu.
UND (Not assigned)
Repeats the Directory Dialing Message (to make
a new name entry) up to two times and then
hangs up.
0
Timeout
2 - 104
47-15-08: Next Call
Routing Mailbox
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Dialing Options Available for duplicate Employee Names
If the name the caller enters is used by more than one employee, VM8000 InMail lets
the caller select the employee to which they want to talk. The caller can dial 1, 2 or 3
to select the employee from the first three name matches, or dial 4 to hear additional
name matches.

By default, the caller can also dial * to make a new entry or dial # to return to the
Automated Attendant.

If a Next Call Routing Mailbox is specified, the caller can also dial * to make a new
entry, dial 0 to follow the 0 action of the Next Call Routing Mailbox, or dial # to route
directly to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Directory Dialing Mailbox Routing Options
(Options available after a name is entered)
Dialed
Digit
Action
1~3
Not applicable
Route to the respective extension from the list
of up to three announced matches.
4
Not applicable
If more than three matches for the entered
name are found, provides access to the next
set of three matches.
5~9
Not applicable
Plays “That is an invalid entry” and repeats the
list of announced matches each time the caller
dials the digit.
UND (Not assigned)
Plays “That is an invalid entry” and repeats the
list of announced matches each time the caller
dials the digit.
1~32 (valid Call Routing
Mailbox)
Caller routes according to the 0 action of the
Next Call Routing Mailbox’s Dial Action Table.
*
Not applicable
Repeats the Directory Dialing Message (to
make a new name entry) each time the caller
dials the digit.
#
UND (Not assigned)
Routes to the Automated Attendant (i.e., back
to the Call Routing Mailbox that initially
answered the call).
1~32 (valid Call Routing
Mailbox)
Routes to the Next Call Routing Mailbox and
plays that mailbox’s Instruction Menu.
UND (Not assigned)
Repeats the list of announced matches (up to
two times). If no response, repeats the
Directory Dialing Message (to make a new
name entry) up to three times and then hangs
up.
0
Timeout
InMail System Guide
47-15-08 Next Call
Routing Mailbox
2 - 105
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 106
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Directory Dialing Mailbox
Description
A Directory Dialing Mailbox is the type of mailbox required to implement Directory
Dialing. A Directory Dialing Mailbox is a Routing Mailbox set as a Directory. See
Directory Dialing on page 2-95 for more on how to set up a Directory Dialing Mailbox.
Related Features
Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing allows an Automated Attendant caller to reach an extension by dialing
the first few letters in the extension user’s name.
System Administrator
Only the System Administrator can record the Directory Dialing Message.
Programming
A Directory Dialing Mailbox can be either a Routing Mailbox or a Master Mailbox. The
type you choose depends only on available resources and your programming
preference, since they work identically.
1.
Assign a Routing Mailbox as a Directory Dialing Mailbox:
2.
Assign a Master Mailbox as a Directory Dialing Mailbox:

47-07-02
Routing Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type)
Enter 3 to make the selected Master Mailbox a Directory Dialing Mailbox.

By default, no Master Mailboxes are assigned as Directory Dialing Mailboxes.
Operation
Turn to Directory Dialing on page 2-95 for more on how to use Directory Dialing and
record a Directory Dialing Message.
InMail System Guide
2 - 107
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 108
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Distribution List
Description
A Distribution List is a list of extensions that will receive a message you record and
send to a single Distribution Mailbox. Any message left in the Distribution Mailbox will
be automatically sent to all the mailboxes in the list. Distribution List saves time when
you need to send the same message to many co-workers. Rather than recording the
message and manually specifying a list of recipients, use a Distribution List instead.
A Distribution List can consist only of Subscriber Mailboxes. The list is managed in a
Distribution Mailbox, which is a type of Routing Mailbox that contains the actual list of
member extensions. The system allows as many Distribution Lists as there are
available Routing Mailboxes (up to 32). Each list can have up to 20 members. You
assign the Distribution Mailbox in system programming, but you can create the
Distribution List and edit the list members from either system programming or a
System Administrator’s Mailbox. The System Administrator can also record a name
for the Distribution List.
Related Features
InMail Features:
Distribution Mailbox
A Distribution Mailbox is a Routing Mailbox that handles Distribution List messages.
System Administrator
The user can edit the members of a Distribution List from a System Administrator Mailbox.
The user can also record a name for the list.
Service Conditions:

When creating a Distribution list there can be no blank destinations within the
list. The system considers a blank entry as the end of the list so entries behind
the blank will not be used.

Messages can only be sent to a Distribution List from a subscriber mailbox.
InMail System Guide
2 - 109
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming
1.
Assign a Routing Mailbox as a Distribution Mailbox:

47-07-02
Routing Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type)
Enter 4 to assign the selected Routing Mailbox a Distribution Mailbox.

By default, no Distribution Mailboxes are assigned.
2.
Enter the destination extensions into the Distribution List:

47-17-01
Distribution Mailbox Category
Set the mailbox type. Use Undefined (0) to skip Mailbox Number setting.
Use Station Mailbox (1) for setting Mailbox Number to 1~512 (Program
47-02). Use Group Number (2) for setting Group Mailbox (1~32) (Program
47-03).

47-17-01
Second Setting Data - Distribution Mailbox Number
Enter the member mailboxes in the Distribution List (20 members
maximum). When setting this data via phone programming or PC/Web
Programming, the mailboxes are entered by their mailbox number (1~512
or 1~32 for Group mailboxes) not by their extension number. When creating
a Distribution list there can be no blank destinations within the list. The
system considers a blank entry as the end of the list so entries behind the
blank will not be used.
2 - 110
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Operation
Recording and Sending a Message to a Distribution List
To record and send a message to a Distribution List:
1.
Log onto the Subscriber Mailbox.
2.
[Rec]
3.
Record your message.
4.
5.
Select Record and Send a Message.
• Alternately dial RS(77).
[Pause]
Pause recording.
• Alternately dial  to pause.
[Resume]
Resume recording if paused.
• Alternately dial  to resume.
[Cncl]
Cancel recording.
• Alternately dial D to delete a recording.
[Done]
End (accept) the recording.
• Alternately dial # to accept the recording.
Dial the Distribution Mailbox extension number.
[Exit]
[Cont]
Send the message to the selected Distribution List.
• Alternately dial # to send the recording.
[Mbox]
Back up and reenter the Distribution Mailbox number.
• Alternately dial  to back up and reenter.
[Exit]
Return to the Main Menu without sending the
message.
Return to the Main Menu after sending the message to the Distribution
List.
• Alternately dial # to return to the Main Menu.
Editing a Distribution List and Recording a Name
To edit a Distribution List and record a name:
1.
Log onto a System Administrator’s Mailbox.
2.
[Mgr]
Select the System Administrator features.
• Alternately dial SA (72).
3.
[DList]
Select Distribution List editing. This is the Distribution List Menu.
• Alternately dial L (5).
4.
Enter the number of the Distribution List you want to edit (e.g., 008).
[Back]
5.
Return to the System Administrator Menu without selecting a list.
• Alternately dial #.
Select one of the following.
InMail System Guide
2 - 111
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Editing a Distribution List and Recording a Name (Continued)
[Modfy]
a.
[Modfy] Select to edit the Distribution List member list. (This is the List
Modify Menu.)
• Alternately dial M (6).
[Add]
[RcNam]
b.
[Back]
2 - 112
Select to add an extension to the list.
• Alternately dial A (2).
• The extension you add is inserted at the current position
in the list.
[OK]
Select to accept the entry and return to the List
Modify Menu.
• Alternately dial #.
[Clear]
[Clear] Select to reenter the mailbox number.
• Alternately dial *.
[Back]
Select to exit to the List Modify Menu.
• Alternately dial *.
[Del]
[Del] Select to remove the currently displayed extension
from the list.
• Alternately dial E (3).
[Next]
Select to go to the next extension in the list without making
any changes.
• Alternately dial N (6).
[Back]
[Back] Select to exit the list.
• Alternately dial #.
[RcNam] Select to record a name for the Distribution List. (This is the
Record Name Menu).
• Alternately dial RN (76).
[Back]
Select to listen to the recorded name (if any).
• Alternately dial L (5).
[Rec]
Select to record a new name.
• Alternately dial R (7).
[Cncl]
Select to cancel without recording and go back to
the Record Name menu.
[Done]
Select to accept the recorded name and go back
to the Record Name Menu.
• Alternately dial #.
[Del]
[Del] Select to delete the recorded name.
• Alternately dial E (3).
[Back]
[Back] Select to exit to the Distribution List Menu.
• Alternately dial #.
Select to exit to the System Administrator Menu.
• Alternately dial #.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Email Notification
Enhancements
Version 6000 or higher provides the following:
• Email Notification now supports options to Save, Delete or Keep as New any
voice message that is forwarded to the email system. This applies to station and
group subscriber mailboxes.
Description
Email Notification automatically sends an email notification when a Subscriber
Mailbox receives a new message. The email can optionally include the recorded
message as a wav file attachment. To hear the message, the email recipient
double-clicks the wav attachment to have the message play in their wav player (such
as Windows Media Player).
Email Notification uses SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) to deliver messages to
the recipient’s email account. If the message recipient has a mobile telephone service
provider with an SMS (Short Message Service) portal, they can optionally choose to
have text messages delivered right to their cell phone. In either case, Email
Notification does not provide synchronization - the email account and the voice
mailbox operate independently. For example, deleting the voice mail message does
not automatically delete the email and visa-versa.
If Email Notification tries to deliver an email and it doesn’t go through because of a
connection problem (i.e., no connection or a dropped connection), it will retry every 15
minutes for 24 hours. If the email still can’t go through, Email Notification cancels the
delivery. Email deliveries that fail because authentication fails or the encryption mode
is incorrect are immediately cancelled.
InMail System Guide
2 - 113
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Collecting the Email Notification Data
In order for the installation site’s VM8000 to send email notifications, it must have a
valid SMTP email account assigned. To save time during programming, use the
following table to help collect the system’s email account information. The email
account provider can supply this information.
Table 2-1 VM8000 Email Account Information
Item
Description
SMTP Email Account
The email account that will handle notifications sent from the
VM8000 (e.g., [email protected]).
SMTP Server Name
The SMTP server (email provider) that will handle email for the
SMTP email account. The SMTP server name is typically
similar to smtp.emailserver.com.
SMTP Port Number
The port the SMTP server uses for SMTP delivery.
SMTP Encryption
Determines whether or not the SMTP server accepts plain text
(unencrypted) or encrypted email (Yes or No).
SMTP Authentication
Enter Yes if the SMTP server requires the SMTP Email
Account’s user name and password each time the system logs
on. Otherwise, enter No.
SMTP User Name
In the SMTP Email Account, this is normally the your-name
portion of [email protected]
SMTP Password
This is the password for the account specified in SMTP Email
Account above.
Email Reply To
If a notification recipient replies to a notification email, this is
the address to which the reply is sent.
System’s Email
Account Data
Explanation of the Message Sender (From) Field
Like any other email client, Email Notification uses the From field to identify the
person that left the message being delivered. In the email message, the data in the
From field is formatted as Name [Reply To], where:

Name identifies the person that left the message.

Reply To 1 is the email address used when the email recipient replies to the
message.

This information is not provided in the recipient’s inbox – just the actual email
message.
For messages left by Intercom callers:
1.
The recipient’s inbox only shows the Name portion of the From field. The Reply To portion is not included.
2 - 114
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

Name is:

The extension name (if programmed).
- OR -


The extension number (if there is no name programmed).
Reply To 1 is:

The email address of the person that left the message (if programmed).
- OR -

The Reply To Email Address data from Program 47-18-09.
- OR -

The Send From Email Address data from Program 47-18-09.
For messages left by Outside callers:

Name is always the text “Outside Caller”.

Reply To 1 is:

The Reply To Email Address data from Program 47-18-09.
- OR -

The Send From Email Address data from Program 47-18-09.
Email from Intercom Caller with Programmed Name
When a voice message is left from an extension with a programmed name, Outlook
2007 shows the following:


Inbox

From – The programmed name for the extension that left the message

Subject – The text “Voice Message from” followed by the extension name, followed
by the message duration.

Received – The date and time the message was received.

Size – The message size, which includes the size of the wav file attachment.
Message Body

From – The name programmed for the extension that left the message, followed by
the programmed Reply To information.

Sent – The date and time the message was sent from the installation site’s SMTP
email server.

Subject – The same subject information shown in the inbox.

Message – The wav file attachment name and the attachment size. In the example
below,

InMail System Guide
John Hancock is the name of the extension that left the message.
2 - 115
Issue 8.0
VM8000


9/19/2011 is the date the message was left.

9:30 AM is the time the attachment was created.
Body text – Includes the date and time the voice message was received and the
message length.
Figure 2-5 Email with Station Name
Email from Intercom without Extension Name
When a voice message is left from an extension without a programmed name, Email
Notification substitutes the extension number for the name. In this example, Outlook
2007 shows the following:

2 - 116
Inbox

From – The number of the extension that left the message.

Subject – The text “Voice Message from” followed by the extension number,
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
followed by the message duration.
InMail System Guide

Received – The date and time the message was received.

Size – The message size, which includes the size of the wav file attachment.
2 - 117
Issue 8.0
VM8000

Message Body

From – The number of the extension that left the message, followed by the
programmed Reply To information.

Sent – The date and time the message was sent from the installation site’s SMTP
email server.

Subject – The same subject information shown in the inbox.

Message – The wav file attachment name and the attachment size. In the example
below,


Extension 103 is the number of the extension that left the message.

09-19-11 is the date the message was left.

9:30 AM is the time the attachment was created.
Body text – Includes the date and time the voice message was received and the
message length.
Figure 2-6 Email – No Station Name
2 - 118
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Email from Outside Caller with Caller ID
When a voice message is left by an outside caller and Caller ID was provided,
Outlook 2007 shows the following:


Inbox

From – Shows that the message is from an outside caller.

Subject – The text “Voice Message from” followed by the caller’s number (provided
by Caller ID), followed by the message duration.

Received – The date and time the message was received.

Size – The message size, which includes the size of the wav file attachment.
Message Body

From – Shows that the message is from an outside caller, followed by the
programmed Reply To information.

Sent – The date and time the message was sent from the installation site’s SMTP
email server.

Subject – The same subject information shown in the inbox.

Message – The wav file attachment name and the attachment size. In the example
below,

InMail System Guide

214-262-3939 is the caller’s number (provided by Caller ID).

09-19-11 is the date the message was left.

9:30 AM is the time the attachment was created.
Body text – Includes the date and time the voice message was received and the
message length.
2 - 119
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Figure 2-7 Email with CID Name
Email from Outside Caller without Caller ID
When a voice message is left by an outside caller and Caller ID was not provided,
Email Notification substitutes “Outside Caller” for the number. Outlook 2007 shows
the following:

2 - 120
Inbox

From – Shows that the message is from an outside caller.

Subject – The text “Voice Message from” followed by “Outside Caller”, followed by
the message duration.

Received – The date and time the message was received.

Size – The message size, which includes the size of the wav file attachment.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

Message Body

From – Shows that the message is from an outside caller, followed by the
programmed Reply To information.

Sent – The date and time the message was sent from the installation site’s SMTP
email server.

Subject – The same subject information shown in the inbox.

Message – The wav file attachment name and the attachment size. In the example
below,


Outside Caller (since there is no Caller ID number).

09-19-11 is the date the message was left.

9:30 AM is the time the attachment was created.
Body text – Includes the date and time the voice message was received and the
message length.
Figure 2-8 Email – CO No CID
InMail System Guide
2 - 121
Issue 8.0
VM8000
SMS Text Message Delivery to a Cell Phone
The table below shows the basic format of a VM8000 InMail email notification
delivered to a cell phone as an SMS Text Message. The information is much the
same as that delivered to an email account. There may be more than one text
message for each notification, depending on the number of characters the provider
allows in each text message (typically 120-160 characters). SMS will not send the
wav file attachment, even if enabled in programming.
An extension set up for notification via SMS Text Messaging should have the Email
Message as Attachment option disabled in system programming. Attempting to
deliver a wav file attachment to an SMS messaging service may have undesirable
results.
SMS Text Message Notification

The following shows a typical SMS Text Message when the VM8000 InMail is
set up to provide email notification only (no wav file of the actual message). In
this case, the provider divided the message into two parts: one for the message
header and one for the message body. This is only an example – your provider
may handle similar content differently.
Table 2-2 Typical SMS Notification (No Wav File)
Description
Text
Text Message for Message Header
Text Message Inbox:
InMail [2 OF 2]
Text Message Body: 1
MESSAGE FROM: VM8000 InMail [2 OF 2]
SENT: 3:51PM 9/17
Text Message for Message Body
1
2 - 122
Text Message Inbox:
SBJ:VOICE MESSAGE
Text Message Body: 1
MESSAGE FROM: XXXX
SUBJ: VOICE MESSAGE FROM XXXX- (0M6S)
VOICE MESSAGE ARRIVED ON MONDAY, SEPT [email protected]:51
PMDURATION: 0M 6S
------------NEC [1 OF 2]
SENT: 3:51PM 09/17
Your cell phone display will automatically break the text lines to best fit the screen.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
POP3 Login
VM8000 InMail Email Notification supports POP3 Login. The logic of this method is
that it allows a user to send e-mail from any location, as long as they can
demonstrably also fetch their mail from the same place. Check with your email
provider to see if this type of login is required.
Some Common SMTP Settings
Table 2-3 Common Email Notification SMTP Server Settings
Provider
Server Name and
Account (1105-02, 08)
SMTP
Port
(1105-03)
Encryption
(1105-04)
Authentication
(1105-05, 06,
07)
Updated
Yahoo
smtp.mail.yahoo.com
465
Yes
Yes
6/28/07
GMail
smtp.gmail.com
465
Yes
Yes
6/28/09
Optimum
Online
mail.optonline.net
587
Yes
Yes
6/28/07
AOL
smtp.aol.com
587
Yes
Yes
6/28/07
InMail System Guide
Comments
Requires
POP Yahoo!
Mail Plus
2 - 123
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Some Common SMS Portals
Table 2-4 Some Common Mobile Telephone Service Provider SMS Portals
Provider
Email Address for SMS Text Message
Some Popular Provider-Specific SMS Portals
Alltel
[email protected]
AT&T Wireless
[email protected] OR [email protected]
Boost Mobile
[email protected]
Cingular
[email protected] OR [email protected]
Nextel
[email protected] OR [email protected]
Sprint PCS
[email protected]
T-Mobile
[email protected] OR [email protected]
Verizon
[email protected]
Virgin Mobile
[email protected]
A Universal SMS Portal
Teleflip
[email protected]
A More Complete SMS Portal Listing
For a more complete SMS portal list, see http://www.livejournal.com/tools/textmessage.bml?mode=details.
Conditions
2 - 124

SV8100 software Version 3.00 or higher is required to support this
feature.

A PZ-ME50 must be mounted on the CD-CP00-US to support this
feature.

The Email Notification feature (1014) is licensed on a per mailbox basis.

When the Email Notification feature is licensed in the system (1013), five
Email Notification license seats (1014) are included. Subsequent
license seats must be purchased.

Email Notification options can only be changed from Web Pro, PC Pro or
system programming for group subscriber mailboxes.

Email Notification options can only be changed from User Pro, Web Pro,
PC Pro or system programming for station subscriber mailboxes.

The Email Notification Save, Delete or Keep as New feature requires
Version 6000 or higher software.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

With Version 6.00 software, a mailbox set for Email Notification can use
the following settings for the forwarded message.

Save: A forwarded voice message is Archived and kept in the mailbox.

Delete: A forwarded voice message is deleted from the mailbox

No Change: A forwarded voice message is kept as "New" in the mailbox.
Default Settings
Email Notification disabled.
System Availability
Terminals:
All multiline terminals
Required Component(s)
PZ-VM21
PZ-ME50
VM8000 InMail CF
Licensing for InMail voice ports and the Email Notification feature.
Related Features
None
InMail System Guide
2 - 125
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Setting Up the System SMTP Options
1. Enable SMTP Email Delivery System Wide.

47-18-01: ENABLE SMTP
Enter 1 to enable SMTP email delivery system-wide.


By default, SMTP email delivery is disabled (0).
47-18-08: SMTP EMAIL ADDRESS
Specify the email account that the SMTP server will use to process email
sent from the VM8000 (e.g., [email protected]).

By default, there is no entry for this option.
2. Specify the site’s SMTP server name and port.

90-11-11: DNS PRIMARY ADDRESS
Enter the IP address of primary Domain Name Server (DNS).
– The DNS (or name server) is the computer connected to the
internet that converts a domain name (such as www.yahoo.com) to a
specific IP address for routing on the internet. If you want to use a
domain name to identify your SMTP server in the following option,
you must make an entry for this option. The entry is the IP address of
your name server.


By default, there is no entry for this option.
90-11-12: DNS SECONDARY ADDRESS
Enter the IP address of secondary Domain Name Server (if any).


By default, there is no entry for this option.
47-18-02: SMTP SERVER NAME
Enter the name of the SMTP server that will handle email delivery for the
installation site. The SMTP server name is typically similar to
smtp.emailserver.com.
– If you didn’t make a name server entry in the previous entry, you
must enter your SMTP server’s IP address in this option (not its
name).

2 - 126
By default, there is no entry for this option.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-18-03: SMTP PORT NUMBER
Enter the port (logical connection) the installation site’s email server uses
for SMTP. Refer to Some Common SMTP Settings on page 2-123 for
setting examples.

By default, SMTP uses port 25.
3. Does the site’s SMTP email server require encryption?

If yes:
47-18-04: SMTP ENCRYPTION
Enter 1.
– The system negotiates “behind the scenes” to determine if
encryption should be TLS or SSL, and then adjusts accordingly.


By default, this option is disabled (0).
If no:
47-18-04: SMTP ENCRYPTION
Enter 0.
– If encryption is disabled, all messaging is in plain text.

By default, this option is disabled (0).
4. Does the site’s SMTP email server require account authentication?

If yes:
47-18-05: SMTP AUTHENTICATION
To enable SMTP Authentication, enter 1.
To enable POP3 Authentication, enter 2. Refer to Setting Up POP3
Login on page 2-128.

By default, this option is disabled (0).
47-18-06: SMTP USERNAME
Enter the user name of the account on the SMTP server that will
process the email sent from the VM8000. For example, if the
subscriber’s email address is [email protected], the User
Name entry would be yourname. Email Notification delivers all
outbound email to this account.

InMail System Guide
By default, there is no entry for this option.
2 - 127
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-18-07: SMTP PASSWORD
Enter the password for the account specified in the previous option.
When SMTP authentication is enabled, this password is required to
log onto the email account.


By default, there is no entry for this option.
If no:
47-18-05: SMTP AUTHENTICATION
Enter 0.

By default, this option is disabled (0).
5. Enter the email reply data (i.e., the email account to which replies should be
sent).
47-18-09: SMTP REPLY-TO ADDRESS
Enter the email reply name.
– This is a required entry.
– Typically, this is the email account that handles inquiries and
administration for the installation site.

By default, there is no entry for this option.
Setting Up POP3 Login
1. Does the site’s SMTP email server require POP3 Login?

If yes:
47-18-05: SMTP AUTHENTICATION
To enable POP3 Authentication, enter 2.

By default, this option is disabled (0).
47-19-01: POP3 SERVER NAME
Enter the name of the POP3 server that will handle email delivery for
the installation site. The POP3 server name is typically similar to
pop.emailserver.com.
– If you didn’t make an entry in the 90-11-11 and 90-11-12 DNS
Server options, this entry must be the IP address of the POP3 server
since there is no way to resolve a name.

2 - 128
By default, there is no entry for this option.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-19-02: POP3 PORT NUMBER
Specify the port (logical connection) the installation site’s email
server uses for POP3. Normally, this is port 110.

By default, this option is 110.
47-19-03: POP3 ENCRYPTION METHOD
Enable or disable POP3 SSL encryption for the site's email server.
The option you choose depends on the requirements of the POP3
email server.

By default, this option is disabled (0).
47-19-04: POP3 USERNAME
Enter the POP3 account’s user name. If the subscriber’s email
address is [email protected], the username would
normally be yourname.

By default, there is no entry for this option.
47-19-05: POP3 PASSWORD
Enter the password for the account specified in the previous option.
When authentication is enabled, this password is required to log onto
the email account.


By default, there is no entry for this option.
If no:
47-18-05: SMTP AUTHENTICATION
To disable POP3 Authentication, enter either 0 (Authentication
disabled) or 1 (SMTP Authentication enabled).

By default, this option is disabled (0).
Setting Up the Subscriber Mailbox Options
1. Should email notification occur for new voice mail messages left in the
Subscriber Mailbox?

If yes:
47-02-20: ENABLE EMAIL
Enter 1 (Yes).
– The subscriber can also do this from their Mailbox Options Menu.

InMail System Guide
By default, this option is disabled (0).
2 - 129
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-02-21: EMAIL ADDRESS
Specify the email address to which the notification for this Subscriber
Mailbox should be delivered.
– If the voice message should be included in the email as a wav file
attachment, in 47-02-22: MESSAGE AS ATTACHMENT, enter 1
(Yes). If not, enter 0 (No).


By default, there is no entry for this option.
If no:
47-02-20: ENABLE EMAIL
Enter 0 (No).
– The subscriber can also do this from their Mailbox Options Menu.

By default, this option is disabled (0).
Setting Up the Group Subscriber Mailbox Options
1. Should email notification occur for new voice mail messages left in a Group
Subscriber Mailbox?

If yes:
47-06-18: ENABLE EMAIL
Enter 1 (Yes).
– The subscriber can also do this from their Mailbox Options Menu.

By default, this option is disabled (0).
47-06-19: EMAIL ADDRESS
Specify the email address to which the notification should be
delivered.
– If the voice message should be included in the email as a wav file
attachment, in 47-06-20: MESSAGE AS ATTACHMENT, enter 1
(Yes). If not, enter 0 (No).

2 - 130
By default, there is no entry for this option.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
If no:

47-06-18: ENABLE EMAIL
Enter 0 (No).
– The subscriber can also do this from their Mailbox Options Menu.
By default, this option is disabled (0).

Operation
Table 2-5 Turn Email Notification On or Off
To Turn Email Notification On or Off
1.
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox
2.
[Optns]
Select Mailbox Options.

3.
[Notfy]
Select Notification.

4.
[Email]
Alternately dial N (6)
Select Email.

5.
Alternately dial OP (67)
Alternately dial E (6)
Do one of the following:
a.
[On]
Select to turn email notification on.

b.
[Off]
Select to turn email notification off.

c.
[Back]
Alternately dial O (6)
Alternately dial O (6)
Select to exit without making any changes.

Alternately dial #
Conditions
None
Default Settings

InMail System Guide
Email Notification disabled.
2 - 131
Issue 8.0
VM8000
System Availability
Terminals:
All multiline terminals
Required Component(s)
None
Related Features
None
2 - 132
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Erasing All Messages
Description
The System Administrator can delete all messages in a Subscriber Mailbox. Erasing
All Messages is an administrator’s maintenance tool. The administrator may need to
use this tool if an employee has left the company or has an excessive number of
messages stored in their mailbox. By deleting the unwanted messages, the
administrator can prevent the VM8000 InMail recording capacity from being reached
(which would disable many of the VM8000 InMail messaging features).
Related Features
Message Delete
A Subscriber Mailbox user can delete any message left in their mailbox.
System Administrator
Only the System Administrator can delete messages in a coworker’s mailbox.
Programming
No additional programming required.
InMail System Guide
2 - 133
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Erasing All Messages System-Wide
Log On to System Administrator’s mailbox.
SA
(72)
Access System Administrator options.
[Not applicable]
S (7)
Select Subscriber Mailbox Maintenance options.
[Subs]
Enter the number of the Subscriber Mailbox you want to maintain.
0
2 - 134
DA
(32)
Delete all Subscriber Mailbox messages.
[Msgs]
#
Go back to System Administrator options.
[Exit]
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Exiting a Mailbox
Description
A Subscriber Mailbox user can dial a code, press a soft key or hang up to exit their
mailbox. After exiting, the subscriber can use their extension for normal call
processing.
Related Features
Not applicable
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Exiting a Mailbox
To exit your mailbox:
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
XX
(99)
Exit your mailbox.
[Exit] + [Exit]
To exit and immediately return to your mailbox:
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
X#
(9#)
0
InMail System Guide
Exit and return to your mailbox.
[Exit] + [Return]
Plays Help message.
2 - 135
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 136
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
External Transfer
Description
External Transfer allows an Automated Attendant caller to automatically route to an
outside telephone number. To set this up, assign a Dial Action Table action as a
UTRF to a Common Abbreviated Dialing bin (e.g., #2000 + Pause for common bin
000). When the Automated Attendant answers, the caller dials the digit and VM8000
InMail automatically routes them to the outside number contained in the bin. External
Transfer allows your callers to easily reach branch offices and important off-site
associates.
Related Features
Dial Action Table
External Transfer uses the active Dial Action Table to route an Automated Attendant caller
to an outside telephone number.
Programming
1.
Assign a Dial Action Table to each active Call Routing Mailbox.

47-08-01
Dial Action Table
The Call Routing Mailbox uses the Dial Action Table assignment to provide
dialing options to callers.

The default Call Routing Mailboxes (1~8) use Dial Action Table 1.
2.
For an available key, set up a UTRF Dial Action Table option for External
Transfer.

47-13-01
VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables – UTRF Action – Unscreened
Transfer (2) (UTRF)
The corresponding Number option should be 2 followed by the Common
Abbreviated Dialing bin, followed by two pauses (each pause entered by
pressing LK4).

Add additional pauses if the entire common bin does not dial out.
For example, to have External Transfer dial common bin 000, enter #2000PP
LK4 LK4.

InMail System Guide
This ability is not assigned by default.
2 - 137
Issue 8.0
VM8000
3.
Program the Common Abbreviated Dialing bin for External Transfer.

13-04-01
Speed Dialing Number and Name – Speed Dialing Data
The bin should contain just the outside telephone number you want
External Transfer to dial.
Refer to the SV8100 Programming Manual for more information.

No common Abbreviated Dialing numbers are stored by default.
4.
Enable Loop Supervision for the trunks you are going to use for External
Transfer.

14-01-13
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Loop Supervision
Enter 1 to enable Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer for each trunk to be used for
External Transfer.

By default, this option is enabled for all trunks.
5.
Enable Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer for all VM8000 InMail extensions.

20-11-14
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) – Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Restriction
For each VM8000 InMail extension to be used for External Transfer, enter 0
to turn off Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction. (Entering 1 disables
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer).


20-06-01
By default, Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction is Off (0) for all VM8000 InMail
extensions.
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service to extensions (1~15).

By default, Extension 101 is Class 15. All other extensions are Class 1
Operation
Operation is automatic once set up in programming.
2 - 138
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Fax Detection
Description
The Automated Attendant can detect incoming fax calls and transfer them to a fax
machine. With Fax Detection enabled, after the Automated Attendant answers a call it
listens for incoming fax CNG tone. If it detects the tone, it does an unscreened
transfer of the call to the specified company fax machine. The incoming fax then
prints out on the company fax machine. If you disable Fax Detection, the Automated
Attendant does not detect and route incoming fax calls.
Related Features
None
Programming
1.
Enable Fax Detection for the active Call Routing Mailbox.

47-08-04
Fax Detection
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable Fax Detection for the Call Routing Mailbox.

By default, this option is 0 (No).
2.
Specify the extension to which VM8000 InMail should send a fax call when the
Automated Attendant detects fax CNG tone.

47-08-05
Fax Extension
Normally, this is the extension number of the analog port to which the fax
machine is connected.

By default, this option is undefined (entered by pressing Hold).
Operation
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 139
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 140
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Find Me Follow Me
Enhancements
Version 6000 or higher provides the following:
• Find Me Follow Me now supports day of week scheduling in addition to time of
day. This applies to station and group subscriber mailboxes. This feature requires
the Version 6000 Enhancement license (0035).
• You can now set Find Me Follow Me options from User Pro.
• In addition to User Pro, when language prompt Version 2.30 or higher is
installed on the InMail CF, the Find Me Follow Me Day of Week schedule options
can be set from the mailbox telephone interface.
Description:
Find-Me Follow-Me helps an outside caller locate an extension user who is not at their
desk. If their call is unanswered and is picked up by voice mail, the caller has the
option of dialing a digit to try up to three alternate Find-Me Follow-Me destinations. A
destination can be an outside number (such as a cell phone or home office) or a
co-worker's extension.
The Find Me Follow Me destinations are set up in the Notification Schedule. Each of
the three entries can be individually enabled or disabled and provides options for:

Start Hour: The time the destinations become active.

End Hour: The time the destinations become inactive.

Number: The destination telephone, pager, or extension number.

Days of week: The Days of week the destinations are active or inactive.
If the caller chooses the Find-Me Follow-Me option, the system will try each enabled
entry that is active for the current date and time (i.e., in-schedule). The system will not
try any entries that are disabled or are not in-schedule.
When trying the destinations, Find-Me Follow-Me skips an active, in-schedule number
that is busy, in DND, or is unanswered. When all active in-schedule destinations have
been tried the caller can then choose to try Find-Me Follow-Me again or select
another option.
InMail System Guide
2 - 141
Issue 8.0
VM8000
You can set up Find-Me Follow-Me for an extension in system programming. In
addition, an extension user can set up Find-Me Follow-Me from their Mailbox Options.
Service Conditions:

Main Software is version 4.00 or greater is required to support this feature.

The features require the SV8100 R4 Enhancment license (0033).

The InMail language prompts installed on the CF must be Version 2.10 or
greater. The VM8000 InMail Utility is used to update the installed language
prompts.

Find Me Follow Me can be used for standard subscriber mailboxes and Group
Mailboxes set to subscriber in PRG 47-03-03.

Find-Me Follow-Me requires that Tandem Trunking be enabled on the line that
rings into the Automated Attendant. If Tandem Trunking is not enabled, the
Find-Me Follow-Me options are not available.

Find Me Follow Me does not work for internal callers.

If language prompt Version 2.30 or higher is not installed on the InMail CF,
Find Me Follow Me schedule options can only be changed from WebPro, PCPro
or system programming for either station subscriber or group subscriber
mailboxes.

When language prompt Version 2.30 or higher is installed on the InMail CF,
Find Me Follow Me schedule options can be set from the mailbox telephone
interface interface for both station and group subscriber mailboxes.

The Find Me Follow Me schedule by day of week feature requires Version 6000
or higher software and the Version 6000 Enhancement license (0035).
Related Features:
Group Mailboxes
Guide to Feature Programming
2 - 142
Features
VM8000
Program
Number
14-01-13
Issue 8.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Basic Trunk Data Setup - Trunkto-Trunk Transfer/Loop
Disconnect Supervision
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
2
3

Default = 1
20-11-14
Trunk-toTrunk Transfer
Restriction
Make sure this option is disabled,
or Find Me Follow Me will not work
for CO calls
0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Default = 0
47-02-24
InMail Station Mailbox Options Enable find Me Follow Option
0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Default = 0
47-06-22
InMail Group Mailbox Options Enable find Me Follow Option
0 = Disable
1 = Enable

Default = 0
47-21-01
47-21-02
47-21-03
47-21-04
InMail Station Mailbox Options Enable/Disable Find Me Follow
Destination
InMail Station Mailbox Options Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour
InMail Station Mailbox Options Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour
InMail Station Mailbox Options Find-Me Follow-Me Destination
Phone Number
InMail System Guide
Use this option to enable or
disable a Find-Me Follow-Me
destination. If enabled, Find-Me
Follow-Me will occur according to
the settings for Start Hour, End
Hour, and Find-Me Follow-Me
Phone Number. If disabled, FindMe Follow-Me will not occur.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Use this option to set the hour
when Find-Me Follow-Me will start.
Find-Me Follow-Me will occur only
between this setting and the End
Hour setting
Two digit number using
24 hour clock.
Use this option to set the hour
when Find-Me Follow-Me will end.
Find-Me Follow-Me will occur only
between this the Start Hour and
this setting.
Two digit number using
24 hour clock.
Use this option to set the
telephone number that Find Me
Follow Me will dial. Enter the
number exactly as you want the
system to dial it (including a
leading 1 for toll calls, if required),
but do not include a line access
code (such as 9). If the number
you enter is an extension number,
it will be an Intercom call.
Otherwise, it will be an outside
call. (The system decides by
referring to its numbering plan.)
Up to 16 digit number.
Default = 0


Default = Blank

Default = Blank
Default = Blank

2 - 143
Issue 8.0
Program
Number
47-21-05
VM8000
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Station Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Sunday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Sunday.
Default = 0
Station Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Monday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Monday.
Default = 0
Station Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Tuesday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Tuesday.
Default = 0
Station Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Wednesday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on
Wednesday.

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-21-08

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-21-07
3
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-21-06
2

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0

There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-21-09
Station Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Thursday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Thursday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-21-10
Station Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week Friday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Friday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
2 - 144


Features
VM8000
Program
Number
47-21-11
Issue 8.0
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Station Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Saturday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Saturday.
Default = 0
47-23-02
47-23-03
47-23-04
47-23-05
InMail Group Mailbox Options Enable/Disable Find Me Follow
Destination
InMail Group Mailbox Options Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour
InMail Group Mailbox Options Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour
InMail Group Mailbox Options Find-Me Follow-Me Destination
Phone Number
Group Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Sunday
Use this option to enable or
disable a Find-Me Follow-Me
destination. If enabled, Find-Me
Follow-Me will occur according to
the settings for Start Hour, End
Hour, and Find-Me Follow-Me
Phone Number. If disabled, FindMe Follow-Me will not occur.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Use this option to set the hour
when Find-Me Follow-Me will start.
Find-Me Follow-Me will occur only
between this setting and the End
Hour setting.
Two digit number using
24 hour clock.
Use this option to set the hour
when Find-Me Follow-Me will end.
Find-Me Follow-Me will occur only
between this setting and the Start
Hour setting.
Two digit number using
24 hour clock.
Use this option to set the
telephone number that Find Me
Follow Me will dial. Enter the
number exactly as you want the
system to dial it (including a
leading 1 for toll calls, if required),
but do not include a line access
code (such as 9). If the number
you enter is an extension number,
it will be an Intercom call.
Otherwise, it will be an outside
call. (The system decides by
referring its numbering plan.)
Up to 16 digit number.
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Sunday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
InMail System Guide



Default = Blank

Default = Blank
Default = Blank

Default = 0
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
3
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-23-01
2

2 - 145
Issue 8.0
Program
Number
47-23-06
VM8000
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Group Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Monday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Monday.
Default = 0
Group Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Tuesday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Tuesday.
Default = 0
Group Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Wednesday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on
Wednesday.

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-23-08
3
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-23-07
2

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0

There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-23-09
Group Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Thursday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Thursday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-23-10
Group Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week Friday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Friday.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.
47-23-11
Group Mailbox Find Me Follow
Me Options – Day of Week
Saturday
For the selected entry (1-5), use
this option to enable or disable
Find Me Follow Me on Saturday.
2 - 146

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Default = 0
There are three separatelyprogrammed Find Me Follow Me
entries for each Subscriber
Mailbox.


Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Operation
Setting Up Find Me Follow Me
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
OP
(67)
Access the Mailbox Options menu.
[Setup]
CH
(26)
Access the Call Handling Options Menu.
[CallH]
(1)
Access the Find Me Follow Me Options Menu.
[FMFM]
VM8000 InMail states your Find Me Follow Me status:
On or Off
O (6)
Turn Find Me Follow Me on or off.
[On]
[Off]
D (3)
Change your Find Me Follow Me destinations.
[Dest]
#
Back up to the previous level without changing your entry.
[Back]
(1)
(2)
(3)
Enter the destination number to change.
[Dest1]
[Dest2]
[Dest3]
#
Back up to the previous level without changing your
entry.
[Back]
The system will provide the status of the destination selected.
E (3)
Enable selected destination.
[Enbl]
D (3)
Disable selected destination.
[Disbl]
C (2)
Change selected destination.
[Chnge]
#
Back up to the previous level without changing your
entry.
[Back]
Enter the hour you want Find Me Follow Me to begin
for the selected destination.
o Enter 2 digits for the hour.
o Press * or [Next] to skip to the next setting.
InMail System Guide
A (2)
Select AM.
[AM]
P (7)
Select PM.
[PM]
2 - 147
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Setting Up Find Me Follow Me (Continued)
#
Back up to the previous level without
changing your entry.
[Exit]
Enter the destination phone or extension number, up
to 16 digits.
#
#
0
2 - 148
OK
Accept entered number.
Clear
Clear entered number.
Next
Skip to next setting.
#
Back up to the previous level without
changing your entry.
[Back]
Go back to the Mailbox Options menu.
[Back]
Go back to the Main Menu.
[Back]
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Flexible Answering Schedules
Description
The Automated Attendant can answer outside calls with different announcements and
dialing options, depending on the time of day and day of week. For example, a
company can set up separate schedules for weekdays, evenings, weekends, and
specific holidays. Each schedule can play a different announcement to callers, as well
as provide them with unique dialing options. Once set up in programming, the
schedule operation is automatic.
The Flexible Answering Schedules are determined by the set up of the VM8000
InMail Answer Tables. See Answer Table on page 2-27 for more.
Related Features
Answer Table
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each trunk.
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming
calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers.
Routing Mailbox
The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial
Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer
Table.
Programming
1.
Determine which Answer Table answers each trunk.

47-10-01
Answer Table Assignment (Answer Table)
For each trunk, enter the number of the Answer Table that handles that
trunk’s Automated Attendant calls. See Answer Table on page 2-27.

InMail System Guide
By default, all trunks use Answer Table 1.
2 - 149
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Not applicable
2 - 150
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Flexible Call Routing
Description
The Automated Attendant provides outside callers with a wide variety of dialing
(routing) options, such as customized announcements. Use Flexible Call Routing to
eliminate or minimize the need for an operator or receptionist to handle outside calls.
There are 3 components to Flexible Call Routing.

Answer Table
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each trunk
according to the time of day and day of the week.

Routing Mailbox
The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing
options (Dial Action Table) and announcement are available to Automated
Attendant callers.

Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active
Answer Table, which in turn provides those dialing options to Automated
Attendant callers.
Related Features
Answer Table
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each trunk.
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming
calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers.
Routing Mailbox
The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial
Action Table) and announcement are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer
Table.
InMail System Guide
2 - 151
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming
Refer to Automated Attendant on page 2-47 for more on how to set up your Flexible
Answering Schedules.
Operation
Not applicable
2 - 152
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan
Description
Flexible Mailbox Numbering Plan allows you to customize site extension numbers and
be assured that VM8000 InMail adapts to the new configuration. When you change a
port extension number, you can change the number of the mailbox assigned to that
port to match. There is no need to reprogram — all of the options remain intact.
Related Features
Dial Action Table
Be sure the Dial Action Table actions accommodate the revised telephone system
numbering.
Programming
Flexible Numbering Plan Example
1.
Optionally change the number of digits in extension numbers.

11-01-01
System Numbering
Optionally change the number of digits required to reach each range of
extensions.

By default, 3-digit extension numbers are 100~199.

By default, 4-digit extension numbers are 3101~3513.
2.
Change the extension number associated with a port.

11-02-01
Extension Numbering
Assign extension numbers to extension ports. The telephone programming
identity follows the port number, not the extension number.

By default, extension-to-port assignments are consecutive starting with 101 (e.g.,
port 1=extensin 101, port 2=extension 102, etc.).
3.
Change the mailbox number to match the new extension number.

47-02-02
Mailbox Number
Change the mailbox number to match the number of the new extension.

InMail System Guide
By default, mailbox numbers are consecutively assigned. Mailbox 1=101,
mailboxes 2~54=102~ 164, mailboxes 65~512= no entry)
2 - 153
Issue 8.0
VM8000
4.
Modify the Dial Action Tables to accommodate the new numbering.

Refer to TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF) on page 3-74.
Optionally modify the active Dial Action Table actions for the new extension
numbers.
For example, to allow Automated Attendant callers to dial extension 5000, for
digit 5:

Change the Action to UTRF (2) or TRF (1).

Change the Data to XXXX.

By default (in the above example), the digit 5 is undefined.
2-Digit Extension Numbering Example
VM8000 InMail Does Not Support 2-Digit Extension Numbers 10-16
When setting up 2-digit extension numbering in a SV8100 with VM8000 InMail, do not use
extensions 10~32. Although you can set up this application in 11-01-01 System Numbering
and 11-02-01 Extension Numbering, Subscriber Mailboxes assigned in 47-02-02 Mailbox
Number do not function. This is because mailboxes 1~32 are reserved for Routing
Mailboxes and cannot be reassigned.
The following example assigns a 2-digit extension number (26) to station port 6 and
enables the Subscriber Mailbox for extension 26. It also changes the * and # digits in
the active Dial Action Table to allow Quick Message and Remote Logon to the new
2-digit extension.
1.
Enable 2-digit extension numbers 20~29.

11-01-01
System Numbering
In 11-01-01 Digit for the digit 2x, enter 2.
In 11-01-01 Type for the digit 2x, enter 2.

By default, the digit 1 is set up as a 3-digit extension number (100~199).
2.
Change the extension number for port 6 to 26.

11-02-01
Extension Numbering
For extension port 6, enter 26.

By default, extension port 6 is assigned to extension 106.
3.
Change the mailbox number to match the new extension number.

47-02-02
Mailbox Number
For mailbox 6, assign mailbox number 26.

2 - 154
By default, mailbox 6 is assigned to mailbox number 106.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
4.
Modify the Dial Action Tables to accommodate the new numbering.

Refer to TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF) on page 3-74.
Make key 1 (digit 1) Action = UTRF (2) and Data = XX.
Make key 11 (*) Action = REC1 (3) and Data = XX.
Make key 12 (#) Action = LOGON (5) and Data = IXX.

By default:
Key 1 is UTRF to XXX.
Key 11 is REC1 to IXXX.
Key 12 is LOGON to IXXX.
Operation
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 155
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 156
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Forced Unscreened Transfer
Description
A Subscriber can optionally convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers to
Unscreened Transfers by enabling this option in the Mailbox user interface.

Calls from the Automated Attendant ring like other transferred calls and display
the incoming Caller ID data (if provided by telco and enabled in programming)
as the call is ringing.

As with Screened Transfers, unanswered calls route to the subscriber’s greeting
(recorded or default) so the caller can leave a message. However, with
Unscreened Transfer the caller cannot dial 2 to reach the Next Call Routing
Mailbox options (if programmed).
Related Features
Dial Action Table
If enabled in the Subscriber Mailbox, VM8000 InMail automatically converts any Screened
Transfers (TRFs) to the subscriber’s extension to Unscreened Transfers (UTRFs).
Screened Transfer
After the Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000 InMail calls (screens)
the destination extension to see if the transfer can go through.
Unscreened Transfer
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000 InMail immediately
transfers the call to the extension and hangs up.
Programming
1.
Enable Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox.

47-02-10
Forced Unscreened Transfer (Forced UTRF)
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable this option to automatically convert Automated
Attendant Screened Transfers to Unscreened Transfers.

InMail System Guide
By default, this option is disabled (0).
2 - 157
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Not applicable
2 - 158
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Getting Recorded Help
Description
If a Subscriber Mailbox user dials an incorrect code or forgets what to dial while in
their mailbox, they can request help from the VM8000 InMail voice prompts.
Recorded Help provides the user with a built-in, interactive user’s guide. To get
recorded help, the user dials 0.
Related Features
None
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Getting Recorded Help
Log On to your mailbox
0
Get recorded help.
o Recorded help is always available from the Main Menu.
o Recorded help may not be available at all levels.
InMail System Guide
2 - 159
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 160
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Go To A Mailbox
Description
An Automated Attendant caller can dial a digit to route to a Call Routing or
Announcement Mailbox. This is called the Go To (GOTO) action. The GOTO action
can route directly to a specific Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox, or allow the
Automated Attendant caller to go to a mailbox of their own choosing. Use the GOTO
action to set up a “tree” of Automated Attendant options.
The block diagram below shows how the Automated Attendant can provide the caller
with a tree of dialing options. Dialing 1 (GOTO 9) routes to Announcement Mailbox 9,
which plays the company directions. Dialing 2 (GOTO 2) routes to Call Routing
Mailbox 2, which is set up to give the caller single-digit dialing to Tech Service
technicians.

The Announcement Message for Announcement Mailbox 9 tells the caller how
to locate the company.

The Instruction Menu for Call Routing Mailbox 2 instructs the caller which digits
to dial for each technician. The Dial Action Table for Call Routing Mailbox 2
contains the TRF or UTRF actions to each technician’s extension.
Automated Attendant
1
GOTO 9
Company
Directions
Announcement Mailbox 9
2
GOTO 2
Call Routing Mailbox 1
Tech Service
Technicians
Call Routing Mailbox 2
The GOTO action can also log on to a Subscriber Mailbox, although the LOGON
action is normally reserved for this function.
InMail System Guide
2 - 161
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Related Features
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming
calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers.
Dial Action Table
The GOTO action is a Dial Action Table option.
Instruction Menu
Be sure the Instruction Menu for the active Call Routing Mailbox describes how to use the
GOTO action.
Programming
1.
Assign a GOTO action to the active Dial Action Table.

47-13-01
Dial Action Table Actions: GOTO Action – Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO)
To have Automated Attendant callers dial a single digit to go to a Call
Routing or Announcement Mailbox, enter the mailbox number in the
corresponding Number option.

For example, to have key 1 go to Call Routing Mailbox 2, for key 1 enter
GOTO for the Action and 2 for the corresponding Number.
To have VM8000 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a Call
Routing or Announcement Mailbox to go to, enter XXX in the corresponding
Number option. The key you choose must represent the first digit in the
mailbox numbers.

For example, to allow callers to go to mailboxes 1~16, for key 0 enter
GOTO for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
To log into any valid Call Routing or Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the
corresponding Number option.

For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Call Routing or
Announcement Mailbox number to go to, for key 1 enter GOTO for the
Action and IXXX for the corresponding Number.

By default, there are no GOTO actions assigned.
Operation
Using the Automated Attendant GOTO Action
For the outside caller:
After Automated Attendant answers, the voice prompts will instruct you on which digits to dial.
2 - 162
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Greeting
Description
A Subscriber Mailbox user can record a personalized greeting for his mailbox. After
the greeting is recorded, callers hear a prerecorded personalized greeting rather than
a default message.
The recorded message can include the following:

Subscriber name

Personal message (such as “Hello - I am on vacation this week”)

Instructions on leaving a message or using other mailbox options

Next Call Routing Mailbox options, if available
While listening to a mailbox greeting, a caller can dial * to immediately skip the
message.
Remote Greetings
A Subscriber Mailbox user can call into the Automated Attendant, access their
mailbox, and remotely record their mailbox greeting.
Following are two of the ways a user can do this:

After the Automated Attendant answers, dial a digit (typically #) followed by their
mailbox number. This method allows outside callers to log into their Subscriber
Mailboxes from outside the company. After logging on to their mailbox, the user
can dial G to record a greeting.

If an extension has a Direct Inward Line that is forwarded to voice mail, the
caller can dial # and log on to their mailbox (instead of leaving a message). After
they log on to their mailbox, the user can dial G to record a greeting. This option
must be set up in the Next Call Routing Mailbox. To allow this ability, for
example:
InMail System Guide

Program the Next Call Routing Mailbox # digit as LOGON to IXXX.

While listening to their greeting, the subscriber can dial:
# (to route to their Next Call Routing Mailbox), then
# and their mailbox number to log on to their mailbox.

By default, this option is provided in Call Routing Mailbox 1. Additionally, the
subscriber should enable a Security Code for their mailbox to prevent
unauthorized logons.
2 - 163
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Multiple Greetings
In systems with Multiple Greetings, the mailbox subscriber can record up to three
separate greetings and make any one of the three active. When a caller leaves a
message in the subscriber’s mailbox, they hear the active greeting. This allows the
subscriber, for example, to record separate greetings for work hours, after work, and
during vacation. Instead of revising the recording when they leave the office, they can
activate the after work greeting instead.
If an active greeting is not recorded, a caller hears, “At the tone, you can leave your
message for (extension number or name).”
Related Features
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail sends Automated Attendant calls directly to a
subscriber’s mailbox. Their phone does not ring for calls from the Automated Attendant.
Dial Action Table
The active Dial Action Table must have a LOGON action assigned to a key to enable
Remote Greeting.
Log On to Voice Mail
A Subscriber Mailbox user can record their greeting after remotely logging on to VM8000
InMail.
Security Code
To prevent unauthorized tampering, the subscriber should enable a Security Code for
their mailbox.
System Administrator
With Multiple Greetings, the System Administrator’s Subscriber Maintenance EG (34)
option simultaneously erases all recorded greetings in a Subscriber Mailbox. Additionally,
the active greeting is reset to 1.
2 - 164
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Programming
1.
Set the maximum length of Subscribe Mailbox greetings.

47-01-03
Subscriber Message Length (Subs Msg Length)
Set the maximum length of Subscriber Mailbox greetings (1-4095 seconds).
This option also sets the maximum length of recorded messages for the
following:

Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.

Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox.

Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a GOTO
command and then dialing RS to record and send a message.

Announcement Messages.

Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus.

By default, Subscriber Mailbox greetings are 120 seconds long maximum.
2.
Enable Remote Greeting by programming a LOGON action in the active Dial
Action Table.

47-13
VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables
To log directly into a specific Subscriber Mailbox, enter the mailbox number
in the corresponding Number option.

For example, to have key 4 log directly into Subscriber Mailbox 305, for
key 4 enter LOGON for the Action and 305 for the corresponding
Number.
To have VM8000 InMail request Automated Attendant callers to select a
Subscriber Mailbox to log on to, enter N in the corresponding Number
option. The key you choose must represent the first digit in the Subscriber
Mailbox numbers.

For example, to have the Automated Attendant request callers to enter
the number of the Subscriber Mailbox into which they wish to log, for
key 3 enter LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding Number.
When callers dial 3, they hear, “Please enter your mailbox number.”
To have VM8000 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a
Subscriber Mailbox to log on to (without playing an announcement), enter
XXX in the corresponding Number option. The key you choose must
represent the first digit in the Subscriber Mailbox numbers.

InMail System Guide
For example, to allow callers to log on to mailboxes 101~199, for key 3
enter LOGON for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
2 - 165
Issue 8.0
VM8000
To log into any valid Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the corresponding
Number option.

For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Subscriber Mailbox
number to log on, for key 1 enter LOGON for the Action and IXXX for
the corresponding Number.

By default, key # Action = LOGON and Number = IXXX.
Operation
Recording a Multiple Greeting and Setting Up Auto Attendant
Direct to Voice Mail
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
G (4)
Access the Mailbox Greeting options.
[Greet]
VM8000 InMail does the following:
o Plays a summary of your current settings.
o Displays the status of your active Greeting (1-3).
[Greeting N: Recorded], or
[Greeting N: Not Rec]
o Shows the Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail status.
[Auto-attendant Dnd: Off], or
[Auto-attendant Dnd: On]
o Provides soft keys for each of the 3 greetings.
[Gr1]
[Gr2]
[Gr3]
Select a Greeting (which also makes it active).
(1)[Gr1]
(2)[Gr2]
(3)[Gr3]
L (5)
Listen to the active greeting (if recorded).
[Lstn]
R (7)
Record a new greeting (if not recorded), or rerecord
the current greeting.
[Rec]
Record at the tone, then press # when done.
*
D (3)
#
Pause or restart recording.
[Resume]
[Pause]
Delete the greeting.
[Del]
End the recording.
[Done]
Delete the currently recorded greeting (if any).
[Del]
#
2 - 166
Go back to the Mailbox Greeting options.
[Exit]
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Recording a Multiple Greeting and Setting Up Auto Attendant
Direct to Voice Mail (Continued)
Change Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail.
O (6)
#
Go back to mailbox Main Menu.
[Exit]
0
InMail System Guide
Turn Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail off or on.
[Auto-attendant Dnd: On]
[Auto-attendant Dnd: Off]
Plays Help message.
2 - 167
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 168
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Group (Shared) Mailbox
Description
Department/Ring Group Mailbox

Group (Shared) Mailbox
A Group Mailbox is a Department Group Mailbox shared by a group of
co-workers. It is normally a Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller leaves a message at
any extension in the group that shares the mailbox, the system stores the
message in the shared Group Mailbox. The voice mail key Message lamp at all
keyset extensions in the group flashes to indicate that there is a new voice mail
message waiting. Any extension user in the group can log onto their mailbox to
hear and process the shared message. The message count on all keyset
displays increments and decrements as group messages are received, listened
to, or deleted.
Any extension sharing a Group Mailbox can record and activate the Greeting.
The system automatically uses the most recent Greeting, regardless of which
member of the group recorded it.
Group Mailboxes are helpful in both residential installations and larger business
workgroups, since extensions share a common voice mailbox. Messages in the
Group Mailbox can be listened to, forwarded, deleted, and otherwise processed
by any member of the group.
Group Mailbox uses Department/Ring Group programming. You can separately
set up Department/Ring Group members to have the same Department/Ring
Group Mailbox. Since the system provides 32 Department/Ring Groups, there
are a total of 32 Ring Group Mailboxes available.
The Department/Ring Group Mailbox can optionally be a Routing Mailbox. Refer
to Understanding Group Mailbox Types on page 2-170.

Mailbox for a Ring Group
A Ring Group Mailbox can also be the mailbox for a stand-alone Ring Group in
which the members do not share the mailbox, but have personal mailboxes
instead. The following types of unanswered calls route to this type of Ring
Group Mailbox:
InMail System Guide

Outside calls transferred to the Ring Group master number.

Automated Attendant transfers (UTRF or STRF) to the Ring Group master number.

Direct Inward Lines to the Ring Group master number.
2 - 169
Issue 8.0
VM8000
UCD Group Mailbox
If a UCD Group is set to overflow to voice mail, an unanswered call into the group is
picked up by the UCD Group Mailbox. The UCD Group Mailbox can be a Subscriber
Mailbox (to allow the caller to leave a message) or a Routing Mailbox (to provide
additional dialing options or an announcement). Refer to Understanding Group
Mailbox Types.
Understanding Group Mailbox Types

If the Group Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox (1):




2 - 170
The Group Mailbox has all the features of any other personal Subscriber Mailbox.
If the Group Mailbox redirects to a Call Routing Mailbox (2):

A co-worker attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the Group
Mailbox hears: “Your call cannot go through. Goodbye.” InMail then hangs up.

An outside caller attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the
Group Mailbox hears the prerecorded Instruction Menu message and can dial
options allowed by the associated Dial Action Table.

If the Group Mailbox user presses their voice mail key, they are asked to enter their
mailbox number. After entering the number, they hear, “That mailbox does not exist.”

An Automated Attendant caller attempting to leave a Quick Message or do a
Remote Logon at an extension assigned to the Group mailbox hears, “That mailbox
does not exist.” They then return to the Auto-mated Attendant.
If the Group Mailbox redirects to an Announcement Mailbox (2):

A co-worker attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the Group
Mailbox hears: “Your call cannot go through. Goodbye.” InMail then hangs up.

An outside caller attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the
Group Mailbox hears the prerecorded announcement and can use all other
Announcement Mailbox features.

If the Group Mailbox user presses their voice mail key, they are asked to enter their
mailbox number. After entering the number, they hear: “That mailbox does not
exist.”

An Automated Attendant caller attempting to leave a Quick Message or do a
Remote Logon at an extension assigned to the Group mailbox hears, “That mailbox
does not exist.” They then return to the Automated Attendant.
If the Group Mailbox redirects to a Directory Dialing Mailbox (2):

A co-worker attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the Group
Mailbox hears: “Your call cannot go through. Goodbye.” InMail then hangs up.

An outside caller attempting to leave a message at an extension assigned to the
Group Mailbox hears the Directory Dialing message and can use any of the options
programmed for the Directory Dialing Mailbox.

If the Group Mailbox user presses their voice mail key, they are asked to enter their
mailbox number. After entering the number, they hear: “That mailbox does not
exist.”
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

An Automated Attendant caller attempting to leave a Quick Message or do a
Remote Logon at an extension assigned to the Group mailbox hears, “That mailbox
does not exist.” They then return to the Automated Attendant.
Programming
1.
Assign extensions to the Department Group.

11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers
Assigns pilot numbers for Department Group.


16-02-01
By default, this entry is 0 (no pilot number assigned).
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension
priority when a group is called.

By default, all extensions are assigned to Department Group 1.
2.
If co-workers should share this mailbox, enter Group as the mailbox type for
each extension in the Department/Ring Group. This step should be skipped for
a “stand-alone” Ring Group.

47-02-01
Mailbox Type
Use this option to enable or disable the mailbox. An extension mailbox is
not accessible when it is disabled (even though its stored messages and
configuration are retained in memory.) If disabled, a user pressing
Message initiates a remote logon and is asked to enter their mailbox
number. A voice prompt then announces: “That mailbox does not exist.”
Options are: 0 (None), 1 (Personal), 2 (Group)

3.
By default, station mailboxes are set to Personal.
For the Department/Ring Group Mailbox that corresponds to the extension’s
Department/Ring Group, assign the mailbox type.
For a Subscriber Mailbox:

16-02-01
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension
priority when a group is called.


11-07
By default, all extensions are assigned to Department Group 1.
Department Group Master Numbers
Check to see to which Department Group the extension belongs (1~32).

InMail System Guide
By default, Department Groups do not have master numbers assigned.
2 - 171
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-03-02
Mailbox Number
The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the Department Group master
(pilot) number. Use this option to select the Department Group master
(pilot) number associated with the Group Mailbox you are programming.


47-03-03
By default, Department Group Mailbox Numbers are not assigned.
Mailbox Type
Enter 1 to assign the mailbox as a Subscriber Mailbox. Use this option to
set the Group Mailbox type. There are two types of InMail mailboxes:
Subscriber (1) and Routing (2).

By default, Group Mailboxes are set as Subscriber Mailboxes.
For a Routing Mailbox:

47-02-01
Mailbox Type
Settings are: 0 (None), 1 (Personal), 2 (Group). Set to 2.


16-02-01
By default, station mailboxes are set to 1.
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number and the extension
priority when a group is called.


11-07-01
By default, all extensions are assigned to Department Group 1.
Department Group Master Numbers
Check to see to which Department Group the extension belongs (1~32).


47-03-02
By default, Department Groups do not have master numbers assigned.
Mailbox Number
The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the Department Group master
(pilot) number. Use this option to select the Department Group master
(pilot) number associated with the Group Mailbox you are programming.


47-03-03
By default, Department Group Mailbox Numbers are not assigned.
Mailbox Type
Enter 1 to assign the mailbox as a Subscriber Mailbox. Use this option to
set the Group Mailbox type. There are two types of InMail mailboxes:
Subscriber (1) and Routing (2).


47-07
By default, Group Mailboxes are set as Subscriber Mailboxes.
InMail Routing Mailbox Options
Set the type of Routing Mailbox and select the voice prompt language.

2 - 172
By default, all Routing Mailboxes use US English for the voice prompt language.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-08
Call Routing Mailbox Options

47-09
Announcement Mailbox Options
4.
Set up the Subscriber Mailbox options for the Department Group Mailbox.
For Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail:

47-06-07
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
Enable (Yes) or disable (No) Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail for the
Group Mailbox.


47-06-03
By default, this option is disabled.
Auto Erase/Save of Messages
Set the auto save option for new messages (1 = Save, 0 = Erase).


47-06-09
By default, this option is set to 1 (Save).
Auto Time Stamp
Enable (Yes) or disable (No) Auto Time Stamp for the Group Mailbox.


47-06-05
By default, this option is disabled.
Recording Conversation Beep
Enable (Yes) or disable (No) the Conversation Recording Beep for the
Group Mailbox.


47-06-13
By default, this option is enabled.
Directory List Number
Specify the Directory List number (1~8, 0 = None,  = All lists) to which the
Group Mailbox belongs.


47-06-08
By default, this option is 0.
Forced Unscreened Transfer (Forced UTRF)
Enable (Yes) or disable (No) Forced Unscreened Transfer for the Group
Mailbox.


47-06-02
By default, this option is disabled.
Message Playback Order
Set the Group Mailbox message playback order (1 = LIFO, 0 = FIFO).


47-06-04
by default, this option is set to 0.
Message Retention
Set how long the Subscriber Mailbox will retain saved messages.

InMail System Guide
By default, this option is 0 (indefinite).
2 - 173
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-06-01
Number of Messages
Set the maximum number of messages (0~99) that can be left in the Group
Mailbox.


47-06-06
By default, this option is 20.
Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp)
Enable (Yes) Message Waiting lamping at the extensions sharing the
Group Mailbox.


47-06-11
By default, this option is enabled.
Dialing Option
Enable (Yes) or disable (No) additional dialing options for Next Call Routing
Mailbox calls.


47-06-12
By default, this option is disabled.
Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CW Mbox)
Optionally assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox (0~32) to the Group Mailbox.


47-06-10
By default, this option is 1.
System Administrator (System Admin)
Enter 1 (Yes) to optionally designate the Group Mailbox as a System
Administrator.

By default, this option is (0) disabled.
Related Features
Greeting
Any extension sharing a Department Group Mailbox can record and activate the Greeting.
The system automatically uses the most recent Greeting, regardless of which member of
the group recorded it.
Voice Mail Overflow
An unanswered DIL to the Department Group master number can be picked up by the
Department Group Mailbox.
2 - 174
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Operation
Refer to the following features for operation of the specific Group Mailbox type:
Announcement Mailbox
Routing Mailbox
Directory Dialing
Subscriber Mailbox
InMail System Guide
2 - 175
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 176
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Guest Mailbox
Description
An outside party can have their own Guest Mailbox mailbox for receiving and sending
messages. A Guest Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox that does not have an extension
associated with it. It is instead associated with a virtual extension. A Guest Mailbox
has many of the VM8000 InMail features of a Subscriber Mailbox. A company visitor
with a Guest Mailbox could, for example:

Go to any extension, press Speaker + Dial the VM8000 InMail master number
(e.g., 200), then dial their mailbox number.

Review their messages, leave messages for associates, or record a new
greeting for their mailbox.

Use many other features available to a Subscriber Mailbox.
For a brief overview of the features available at a Guest Mailbox, review the Related
Features below. Then, go to the individual feature to find out how it operates and any
programming required to make it work.
Related Features
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant GOTO and LOGON actions (assigned to the active Dial Action
Table) can route callers to a Guest Mailbox.
Auto Erase or Save
After a guest listens to a message in their Guest Mailbox, VM8000 InMail can
automatically erase or save the message.
Greeting
A Guest Mailbox can have a recorded greeting that plays to callers leaving a message.
Listening to Messages
Review this feature to learn which features are available to the guest while listening to
messages.
Mailbox Name
A Guest Mailbox can have a recorded name.
InMail System Guide
2 - 177
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Make Call
A Make Call callback to a Guest Mailbox is helpful only if an extension has a Call
Coverage key for the virtual extension associated with the Guest Mailbox. Otherwise, the
callback cannot be answered.
A Guest Mailbox user can use Make Call to return a call left in the Guest Mailbox.
Main Menu
The Main Menu provides assess to the features available to a Guest Mailbox.
Message Listen Mode
Set the type of messages a guest listens to when they dial L (5) after logging into their
Guest Mailbox.
Message Notification
Once activated, Message Notification dials a telephone number to let the user know they
have new messages in the Guest Mailbox.
Message Playback Direction
Set the Guest Mailbox message playback order.
Message Record
Review this feature to learn which features are available to the Guest Mailbox while
recording and sending a message.
Message Storage Limit
Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the mailbox.
Next Call Routing Mailbox
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides additional dialing options after a caller leaves a
message in a Guest Mailbox.
Security Code
If enabled, a Guest Mailbox caller must enter a security code before logging on to the
mailbox.
Transfer to a Mailbox
To transfer an outside call to a Guest Mailbox, the extension user presses Hold +
Message (or the Voice Mail key) + Dials the Guest Mailbox number + Speaker to hang up.
2 - 178
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Programming
1.
Set up a virtual extension for the Guest Mailbox.

11-04-01
Virtual Extension Numbering
Assign an unused extension number to an available virtual station port.
For example, assign extension 400 to virtual station port 1.
2.
Activate an unused mailbox for the virtual extension.

47-02-01
Mailbox Type
Enter 1 to activate a personal mailbox for the virtual station port.
Choose a mailbox that is not likely required for an installed extension (e.g.,
128).

By default, all mailboxes are set to 1.
3.
Assign a mailbox number to the mailbox you activated for the virtual extension.

47-02-02
Mailbox Number
The mailbox number you choose should be the same as the virtual
extension number (e.g., 400).

4.
By default, mailboxes 1~64 are assigned to extensions 101~164, mailboxes 65~512
no entry.
Refer to Subscriber Mailbox on page 2-319 for additional details on Guest
Mailbox setup and operation.
Operation
Logging On to a Guest Mailbox
To log on to a Guest Mailbox:
1. Press Speaker + Dial the VM8000 InMail master number (e.g., 200).
2. When VM8000 InMail answers, dial the Guest Mailbox number.
Logging On to a Guest Mailbox from the Automated Attendant
To log on to a Guest Mailbox from the Automated Attendant:
1. After the Automated Attendant answers, dial # + The Guest Mailbox number.
o
o
InMail System Guide
This ability may be disabled for the Automated Attendant.
Your automated attendant may have GOTO or LOGON actions assigned to the Guest
Mailbox. Check with your Communications Manager.
2 - 179
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Transferring your call to a Guest Mailbox
To transfer your active call to a coworker’s mailbox:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2 - 180
Press Hold.
Press Message.
Dial the Guest Mailbox number.
Press Speaker to hang up.
o To transfer a call to a coworker’s mailbox from a single line telephone, use the
following procedure:
Hookflash + Dial *8 + Dial the coworker’s mailbox + Hang up.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Hang Up
Description
Hang Up is an Automated Attendant option that immediately hangs up the outside
call. When setting up a Dial Action Table, you may want to use Hang Up for unused
actions (rather than the caller hearing the standard error message). You might also
want to use the Hang Up action as the Timeout destination for callers that wait too
long to dial after the Automated Attendant answers.
Related Features
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming
calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers.
Dial Action Table
The Hang Up action is a Dial Action Table option.
Programming
1.
Assign the Hang Up action to an available Dial Action Table key.

47-13-01
VM8000 InMail Dial Action Table Actions: Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP)
When the outside caller dials the key programmed with the Hang Up action,
the Automated Attendant immediately hangs up.

By default, the digit 9 is assigned as a Hang Up action.
Operation
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 181
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 182
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
InMail Upload Download Audio
Description
The InMail Upload Download Audio feature allows the upload of mailbox greetings up
to 1MB in size, recorded on a PC or professionally, to any valid subscriber mailbox in
the system. It also allows users to listen to, download and/or delete voice mail
messages from callers. Access to the InMail compact flash drive is via the HTML User
Pro (Web Pro).
Starting with version 4.00 software, the User Admin (UA Mode) can change Routing
Mailbox greetings for the following Routing mailbox types: Instruction (Call Routing),
Announcement and Group.
Audio Prompt Format:
In order for uploaded greetings to properly play on the VM8000 InMail they must be in
the proper format. Audio files not recorded in the proper format may not playback on
the InMail. The proper format is:

Bit Rate:
64kbps

Sampling Size:
8 bits

Channel:
1 (Mono)

Sampling Rate:
8 kHz

Audio Format:
CCiTT u-law
User Pro Access Options:
There are two different User Pro login types available to make changes. To login,
open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV8100 LAN port in the address line.
At default the IP Address is 192.168.0.10.
1.
User Admin Mode (UA Mode): This mode allows the user admin to access any
telephone and mailbox in the system. This mode must be used to change VRS
and Routing Mailbox greetings. At default the login ID is USER1 and the
password is 1111.
2.
User Mode (UB Mode): This mode allows a user to access only their own
telephone and mailbox when logged in. They will not be able to change any
other telephone, mailbox, VRS or Routing Mailbox. At default the login ID is the
“Extension Number” and the password is 1111.
InMail System Guide
2 - 183
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Below is the page layout diagram for the two different User Pro login IDs:
UA Home Page
Telephone Setting
? Individual Extension?
VM messages
and Greetings
(All mailboxes)
VRS messages
UB Home Page
Feature Setup
One Touch Key
Function Key
Assignment
Virtual
Extension Ring
InMail Station
Options
VM messages
(Own subscriber mailbox)
Message Name Format:
Downloaded messages are automatically assigned a name by the SV8100. This
name includes the mailbox number the message was left in, type of message, the
message number, the date and time to the second the message was left. The table
below shows how to interpret the message name to determine this information.
2 - 184
File name format:
BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS.wav
(maximum 32 characters)
B
Mailbox number (max. 8 digit) or “VRS” for the VRS
message.
T
Message type
“ + ”:Greeting or VRS message
“‐”:Recorded message
NNN
Message number (3 digits)
YYYY
Year
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
MM
Month (01~12)
DD
Day (01~31)
HH
Hour (00~23)
MM
Minute (00~59)
SS
Second (00~59)
Service Conditions

With version 3.xx software or lower uploading audio files to any type of Call
Routing box and Group mailboxes are not supported. This means auto
attendant and group mailbox greetings cannot be uploaded or deleted in the
End User Web Pro interface.

With version 4.xx software or higher uploading audio files to any type of Call
Routing box and Group mailboxes is supported. This means auto attendant and
group mailbox greetings can be uploaded or deleted using End User Web Pro
interface with the UA login.

VRS and InMail messages are recorded in an ADPCM format which may not be
easily opened on the support PC.

It is not possible to upload/download/delete multiple files simultaneously.

The mailbox will be inaccessible from the telephone under these conditions:

Mailbox XXX will not be accessible when opening the telephone setup screen of
extension XXX by UA or UB mode in User Pro.

Mailbox XXX will not be accessible when selecting the extension XXX on the file
upload/download screen of UA mode User Pro.

Mailbox XXX will be inaccessible when logging in the UB mode User Pro for
extension XXX.

While uploading an audio file via User Pro the greeting is not accessible by
telephone.

When downloading/deleting an audio file via User Pro, the file is not accessible
by another User Pro session or from the telephone.

This feature is only supported using a LAN connection.

When uploading an audio file the extension will be checked whether it is “WAV”
or not however, the format of the uploaded file will not be checked. If the
uploaded file is not in the proper format it may not playback properly.

When a mailbox has a new message and the message is deleted using the User
Pro interface the MWI of the mailbox will NOT be cancelled.
InMail System Guide
2 - 185
Issue 8.0
VM8000

The largest allowed upload file size is approximately 1MB. Files larger than this
cannot be uploaded.

There is no size limitation when downloading audio files.

User Pro does not check the uploaded file for correct naming format (i.e.
BTNNN_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS.wav). The file name will be automatically
changed when the file is written in the CF.

The actual file name of the messages is not displayed in User Pro. The
message number, modified date and file size are displayed instead. If there is
not any message file, “—“ will be displayed and the download/delete icon will not
be displayed.

The User Pro message page does not refresh automatically, to see new
messages the page must be refreshed. For instance if a new message is
received via regular operation on the system while a user is viewing the upload/
download screen. The new message is not shown until the page is reloaded by
clicking the
icon.

At default Microsoft Windows will automatically open and play the downloaded
WAV. To make “Open” or “Save” selectable, following settings are required:

Windows XP:
1. Choose file type from “Control Panel” → “Folder Options”.
2. Click on “File Types” tab.
3. Select “WAV” extension from the list, then click “Advanced”.
4. Check “Confirm to open the file after download”, then click “OK”.
5. Close the folder option by clicking “OK” again.

Windows Vista: It is not possible to change the save to folder option. So the
downloaded file is always automatically opened for playback.
Troubleshooting
The table below shows possible Error messages and their causes.
Error Message
2 - 186
Cause
VMDB is not attached.
The PZ-VM21 is not attached.
Mailbox “XXX” does not exist.
(XXX = mailbox number)
The mailbox does not exist.
The mailbox is being used by
another session.
When the mailbox is being used by another
session, either PC or phone.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Error Message
Cause
There is no available space in
the CF.
When there is no available space in the CF.
The file is being used by
another session. Please try
again later.
When the file to be downloaded is being
used by another session, either PC or
phone.
The selected file has already
been deleted.
When the file selected for download has
already been deleted.
The file is being used by
another session. Please try
again later.
When the file selected for deletion is being
used by another session.
The selected file has already
been deleted.
When the file selected for deletion has
already been deleted.
Cannot upload the file since
the original file is being used
by another session. Please
try again later.
When the file to be replaced is being used
when trying to upload the replacement.
Programming

90-02-01
Programming Password Setup – User Name
Set the system user names. By default each mailbox can be accessed
using the extension number as the user name. The User Administrator
login user name of USER1.

90-02-02
Programming Password Setup – Password
The default password for the User Administrator and mailbox user login is
1111.

90-02-03
Programming Password Setup – User Level
Used to set the Set the system password user levels.
InMail System Guide
2 - 187
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Listening to Voice Mail Messages Using User Admin Mode (UA)
All messages stored on the VM8000 InMail can be accessed via the Mailbox User
Mode for playback, or deletion.
2 - 188
1.
To log in, open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV8100 LAN port in
the address line. At default the IP Address is 192.168.0.10.
2.
At the login screen, enter username = USER1 and password = 1111.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
3.
At the main menu, click on the InMail Audio Up/Down Load icon.
4.
Choose the extension number to be changed, and make sure Audio Data is set
to Incoming Messages.
The message numbers correspond to the same message number when accessed via
the telephone. Message 1 is the first message, message 2 is the second message,
etc.
5.
To delete a message:

InMail System Guide
click on the red X icon to the right of the appropriate message.
2 - 189
Issue 8.0
VM8000
6.
2 - 190
To listen to a message:

To the right of the message you want to hear, click on the download icon.

Depending on the settings of your browser, you may get a security prompt.

Click on the menu and choose to allow the file to download.

Depending on the Windows configuration, you may be prompted again to
either Open or Save the message. If you want to listen to the message,
click Open and the default .wav file player will play the message. If you
want to save the message, click on the Save icon and you can browse to
the location you want the message saved on the local PC.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Listening to Voice Mail Messages Using Mailbox User Mode (UB)
1.
To log in, open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV8100 LAN port in
the address line. At default the IP Address is 192.168.0.10.
2.
At the login screen enter username = “The Extension Number” and password =
1111.
3.
In the Main Menu, click on the InMail Audio Up/Down Load icon.
InMail System Guide
2 - 191
Issue 8.0
VM8000
4.
The message numbers correspond to the same message number when
accessed via the telephone. Message 1 is the first message, Message 2 is the
second message, etc.
5.
To delete a message:

2 - 192
click on the red X icon to the right of the appropriate message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
6.
InMail System Guide
To listen to a message:

To the right of the message you want to hear, click on the download icon.

Depending on the settings of your browser, you may get a security prompt.

Click on the menu and choose to allow the file to download.

Depending on the Windows configuration, you may be prompted again to
either Open or Save the message. If you want to listen to the message,
click Open and the default .wav file player will play the message. If you
want to save the message, click on the Save icon and you can browse to
the location you want the message saved on the local PC.
2 - 193
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Changing Mailbox Greetings using User Admin Mode (UA)
Audio files up to 1MB may be uploaded to the VM8000 InMail for any mailbox
greeting. In order for uploaded greetings to properly play on the VM8000 InMail they
must be in the proper format. Audio files not recorded in the proper format may not
playback on the InMail. The proper format is:
2 - 194

Bit Rate:
64kbps

Sampling Size:
8 bits

Channel:
1 (Mono)

Sampling Rate:
8 kHz

Audio Format:
CCiTT u-law
1.
To log in, open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV8100 LAN port in
the address line. At default the IP Address is 192.168.0.10.
2.
At the login screen, enter username = USER1 and password = 1111.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
3.
At the main menu, click on the InMail Audio Up/Down Load icon.
4.
Choose the extension number to be changed, and make sure Audio Data is set
to Outgoing Messages.

InMail System Guide
The greeting numbers correspond to the same greeting number when accessed via the
telephone. Greeting 1 is GR1, Greeting 2 is GR2 and Greeting 3 is GR3. Greeting 7 is the
paging greeting used with the Park and Page feature.
2 - 195
Issue 8.0
VM8000
5.
To delete a greeting:

6.
To upload a greeting:

2 - 196
Click on the red X icon to the right of the appropriate greeting.
Under message number, enter the greeting number you want replaced on
the VM.
Features
VM8000
InMail System Guide
Issue 8.0

Browse to find the location on the PC where the greeting file is stored.

Click on the upload icon to the right of the selected file name.

Depending on the file size and LAN connection, it may take several
minutes to upload the greeting.

The uploaded greeting will appear in the assigned location.
2 - 197
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Changing Mailbox Greetings using Mailbox User Mode (UB)
Audio files up to 1MB may be uploaded to the VM8000 InMail for any mailbox
greeting. In order for uploaded greetings to properly play on the VM8000 InMail they
must be in the proper format. Audio files not recorded in the proper format may not
playback on the InMail. The proper format is:
2 - 198

Bit Rate:
64kbps

Sampling Size:
8 bits

Channel:
1 (Mono)

Sampling Rate:
8 kHz

Audio Format:
CCiTT u-law
1.
To log in, open an Internet browser and enter the IP of the SV8100 LAN port in
the address line. At default the IP Address is 192.168.0.10.
2.
At the login screen, enter username = “The Extension Number” and password
= 1111.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
3.
The main menu will display. Click on the InMail Audio Up/Down Load icon. At
the main menu, click on the InMail Audio Up/Down Load icon.

InMail System Guide
The greeting numbers correspond to the same greeting number when accessed via the
telephone. Greeting 1 is GR1, Greeting 2 is GR2 and Greeting 3 is GR3. Greeting 7 is the
paging greeting used with the Park and Page feature.
2 - 199
Issue 8.0
VM8000
4.
To delete a greeting:

5.
2 - 200
Click on the red X icon to the right of the appropriate greeting.
To upload a greeting:

Under message number, enter the greeting number you want replaced on
the VM.

Browse to find the location on the PC where the greeting file is stored.

Click on the upload icon to the right of the selected file name.
Features
VM8000
InMail System Guide
Issue 8.0

Depending on the file size and LAN connection, it may take several
minutes to upload the greeting.

The uploaded greeting will appear in the assigned location.
2 - 201
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 202
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Instruction Menu
Description
The Instruction Menu is the announcement that plays to Automated Attendant callers.
Normally, the Instruction Menu greets callers and provides them with the Automated
Attendant dialing options. The Instruction Menu is associated with the active Call
Routing Mailbox. Normally, you should have the System Administrator customize
(rerecord) the Instruction Menu to match the dialing options enabled in the site’s Dial
Action Table. If a custom Instruction Menu is not recorded, the Automated Attendant
callers hear: “If you are calling from a touch tone phone, please dial the extension
number you wish to reach, or dial 0 for assistance. If you are calling from a rotary dial
phone, please stay on the line for assistance.”
Related Features
Answer Table
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each trunk.
Automated Attendant
The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls, and assigns
the Call Routing Mailbox to the call.
Routing Mailbox
The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial
Action Table) and Instruction Menu are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer
Table.
Single Digit Dialing
An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to route to an extension, route to
another destination, or use an VM8000 InMail feature.
System Administrator
Only the System Administrator can record the Instruction Menu.
InMail System Guide
2 - 203
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming
Not applicable
Operation
Recording an Instruction Menu for a Call Routing Mailbox
Log On to System Administrator’s mailbox.
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options.
[Not applicable]
I (4)
Select Instruction Menus.
[Instr]
Enter the Call Routing Mailbox number.
L (5)
Listen to the current Instruction Menu (if any).
[Lstn]
#
R (7)
Exit listen mode.
Record a new Instruction Menu.
[Rec]
Record message.
#
0
2 - 204
*
Pause or restart recording.
[Resume]
[Pause]
D (3)
Delete recording.
[Del]
#
Exit recording mode.
[Done]
D (3)
Delete the Instruction Menu.
[Del]
#
Go back to the System Administrator options.
[Exit]
Go back to the System Administrator options.
[Exit]
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Language Setting
Description:
The Language setting feature allows the telephone display language and the InMail
mailbox language to be changed from the telephone. This can be used to change
either the user's phone or another specified telephones display and InMail language if
allowed in system programming. Either a dial access code or Softkey operation is
available. The program that controls the default InMail system voice prompt language
is PRG 40-07-01.
Service Conditions:

Main Software Version 4.00 or greater is required to support this feature.

The InMail prompt version must 2.10 or higher to support this feature.

The telephone display language can be changed using dial access codes or
softkeys only.

The InMail language can be changed using dial access codes, softkeys only or
End User Web Pro.

The ability to change other extensions language options is allowed on a class of
server basis in PRG 20-13-53.

The system will not allow an InMail language to be selected if that language
prompt set has not been loaded onto the InMail CF. When an invalid language is
selected an error tone is heard.
Supported Languages:

01 (US English)

02 (UK English)

03 (Australian English)

04 (French Canadian)

05 (Dutch)

06 (Mexican Spanish)

07 (Latin America Spanish)
InMail System Guide
2 - 205
Issue 8.0
VM8000

08 (Italian)

09 (German)

10 (Madrid Spanish)

11 (Norwegian)

12 (Parisian French)

13 (Brazilian Portuguese)

14 (Japanese)

15 (Mandarin Chinese)

16 (Korean)

17 (Iberian Portuguese)

18 (Greek)

19 (Danish)

20 (Swedish)

21 (Thai)

22 (Taiwan)

23 (Flemish)

24 (Turkish)
Related Features:
Group Mailboxes
2 - 206
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Guide to Feature Programming:
Program
Number
11-11-13
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) - Display
Language Selection for Keyset
2
3
Any valid service code

Default = 678
11-11-68
11-11-69
20-13-53
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) - IntraMail
Language Selection for own
extension
Any valid service code
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) - IntraMail
Language Selection for specific
extension
Any valid service code
Service Code Setup (for Setup/
Entry Operation) - Language
Selection for specific extension
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

Default = Blank

Default = Blank

Default = 0
40-07-01
Voice Prompt Language
Assignment for VRS
InMail System Guide
Specify the default language
used for InMail prompts.
1= US English
2 = UK English
3 = AU English
4 = Canadian French
5 = Dutch
6 = Mexican Spanish
7 = Latin America Spanish
8 = Italian
9 = German
10 = Madrid Spanish
11 = Norwegian
12= Parisian French
13 = Brazilian Portuguese
14 = Japanese
15 = Mandarin Chinese
16 = Korean
17 = Iberian Portuguese
18 = Greek
19 = Danish
20 = Swedish
21 = Thai
22 = Taiwanese
23= Flemish
24 = Turkish
25 = Arabic
(Default = 1)

2 - 207
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Language Setting Operation
From an Idle Display Phone
Down
Press down arrow
Prog
Press Program Softkey
Down
Press down arrow
Down
Press down arrow again
Lang
Press Language Softkey
Disp
To change telephone display language press Display Softkey
Own
To change your own extension display language
press Own Softkey
Choose
Lang
Select desired language, press down arrow
to advance to next page. Press Softkey for
desired language.
Press Speaker to Exit
Other
To change another extension display language press
Other Softkey
Ext #
Enter the extension number to be changed.
Choose
Lang
Select desired language, press
the down arrow to advance to
the next page. Press Softkey for
desired language.
Press Speaker to Exit
VMail
To change spoken InMail mailbox language, press
VMail Softkey
Own
To change your own spoken mailbox
language, press Own Softkey
Change
Lang
Select desired language, press
down arrow to advance to the
next page. Press Softkey for
desired language
Press Speaker to Exit
Other
To change another spoken mailbox
language, press Other Softkey
Ext #
Enter the extension number to
be changed
Choose
Lang
Select desired language, press
down arrow to advance to the
next page. Press Softkey for
desired language
Press Speaker to Exit
2 - 208
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Leaving a Message
Description
An extension user or outside caller can leave a voice message in a coworker’s
mailbox if that extension is busy, unanswered, or in Do Not Disturb. Leaving a voice
message is a handy and efficient way to communicate with coworkers that avoids
post-it notes, message pads, and unnecessary email.
Additional Options While Leaving a Message
The following chart shows the additional dialing options a caller may have while
listening to the mailbox greeting prior to leaving a message. What happens depends
on the setting of the Next Call Routing and Dialing Option options.
InMail System Guide
2 - 209
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Dialing Options While Leaving a Message
47-02-14 Next Call
Routing Mailbox
47-02-13 Dialing
Option
Undefined
No
Digit
Dialed
0
1~9
1~32 (valid Call
Routing Mailbox)
No
Yes
Trunk Call
Intercom Call
Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the
greeting repeats.
#
VM8000 InMail hangs up.
*
Caller skips greeting and can immediately
start recording.
0
Caller follows 0
action in Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
1~9
1~32 (valid Call
Routing Mailbox)
Action
Caller hears, “That is
an invalid entry,” and
the greeting repeats.
Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and the
greeting repeats.
VM8000 InMail
hangs up.
#
Caller routes to the
Next Call Routing
Mailbox and hears its
Instruction Menu.
*
Caller skips greeting and can immediately
start recording.
0
Caller follows key’s
action in Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
Caller hears, “That is
an invalid entry,” and
the greeting repeats.
#
Caller routes to the
Next Call Routing
Mailbox and hears its
Instruction Menu.
VM8000 InMail
hangs up.
*
Caller skips greeting and can immediately
start recording.
1~9
Related Features
Next Call Routing Mailbox
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options after they
leave a message in a mailbox (depending on the setting of the Dialing Option option).
Quick Message
Quick Message allows Automated Attendant callers to leave a message in a Subscriber
Mailbox.
2 - 210
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Leaving a Message for a Coworker
To leave a message in the mailbox of an unanswered extension:
1. Press Message.
2. Leave message and hang up.
OR
Leave message and dial #.
 Dialing # sends the message and hangs up.
Leaving a Message from Outside the Company
To leave a message in a mailbox:
1. Leave message and hang up.
OR
Leave message and dial #.
 Dialing # may provide you with additional dialing options. This depends on how the called
mailbox’s Next Call Routing Mailbox is set up.
To leave a message in an extension mailbox, you can be:
o Transferred to an extension mailbox by another user.
o Automatically routed to a mailbox when the called party does not answer or is unavailable.
o Sent to the mailbox from the Automated Attendant after dialing * plus the called party’s mailbox
number.
o Routed from the Automated Attendant after dialing a uniquely programmed digit set up to send you
to an extension’s mailbox.
InMail System Guide
2 - 211
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 212
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Listening to Messages
Enhancements
Version 6000 or higher provides the following:
• Auto Play: Mailboxes can now be set to automatically start playing new messages
on log in for station and group subscriber mailboxes. This applies when logging in
remotely as well as when logging in from inside the system. This feature requires
the Version 6000 Enhancement license (0035).
• The Save as New feature has been added which allows users the ability to mark
a message as “New” after listening is finished. InMail currently marks messages as
“to be saved” (auto-save) or “to be deleted” (auto-erase) after listening has
finished. This new feature allows users to override the “to be saved” or “to be
deleted” setting and return the message back to the “New” state. This feature
requires the Version 6000 Enhancement license (0035).
• The Message Playback Order option has been added to the main Mailbox
Options menu. In addition User Pro has been changed to allow user access to the
message playback order setting (FIFO/LIFO). In past versions this option was only
available from PcPro, PhonePro and WebPro.
Description
While or after listening to a message, a Subscriber Mailbox user has many message
handling options from which to choose. The listening options let you quickly and
efficiently manage your voice mail messages, respond to the message sender, or
forward the message to a coworker for additional handling. The following table shows
these options.
Message Listen Options
Option
RE (73)
[Not applicable]
Record a reply.
See Message Reply on page 2-265.
MF (63)
[Not applicable]
Forward the message to another mailbox.
See Message Forward on page 2-247.
MC (62)
[Not applicable]
Make a call to the message sender.
See Make Call on page 2-239.
TI (84)
InMail System Guide
Description
Hear the time and date the message was sent.
See Time and Date on page 2-329.
2 - 213
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Message Listen Options (Continued)
Option
SA (72)
D (3)
[Del]
Description
Enter the System Administration menu if allowed.
Delete the message.
See Message Delete on page 2-245 for more.
L (5)
[Next]
Listen to the next message.
B (2)
Back up a few seconds.
BB (22)
Back up to the beginning of the message.
[Rpt]
G (4)
Go ahead a few seconds.
*
Pause/resume recording.
1N (16)
[Not applicable]
Select New Message List
See Message Listen Mode on page 2-251.
1S (17)
[Not applicable]
Select Saved Message List
See Message Listen Mode on page 2-251.
1A (12)
[Not applicable]
Select All Message List
See Message Listen Mode on page 2-251.
#
[Exit]
Exit the listen mode.
X (9)
Exit your mailbox.
Dial 0 while listening to hear the list of options.
Service Conditions

Auto Play options must be changed from Web Pro, PC Pro or system
programming for group subscriber mailboxes.

Auto Play options can only be changed from User Pro, Web Pro, PC Pro or
system programming for station subscriber mailboxes.

The Auto Play, and Save as New features require Version 6000 or higher
software and the Version 6000 Enhancement license (0035).

The Message Playback Order feature requires Version 6000 or higher software.
Notes:
If a subscriber’s mailbox is set to Auto Save messages, VM8000 InMail archives partially
listened-to messages but does not relamp the keyset for those messages. For example:
2 - 214

A subscriber with new messages calls his mailbox.

The subscriber presses L to listen to a portion of each message and then exits his
mailbox.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

VM8000 InMail archives all the messages and turns off the message waiting lamp.
If you hang up before listening to the complete new message, VM8000 InMail
automatically retains the message as a new message.
Telephone Display while Listening to a Message
While listening to a message, your telephone display shows you important information
about the message. This includes:

The caller’s telephone number (if available).

The selected Message List.

The message number in the selected list.

The date and time the message was left.
Keyset Display
Caller’s phone number
(requires Caller ID)
Currently selected
Message List
Date message was left
Message number (in
selected Message
Time message was left
Related Features
Auto Erase or Save
When a mailbox user completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox,
VM8000 InMail either automatically archives or deletes the message.
Message Record
While recording a message, an Subscriber Mailbox user has many recording options from
which to choose.
Programming
1.
Set the Message Backup/Go Ahead Time.

47-01-05
Message Backup/Go Ahead Time (Msg Bkup/Adv Time)
This interval sets how far VM8000 InMail backs up (1~60 seconds) when a
mailbox user dials B while recording or listening to their messages.
InMail System Guide
2 - 215
Issue 8.0
VM8000
This interval also sets how far VM8000 InMail jumps ahead (1~60 seconds)
when a user dials G while listening to messages.


47-02-26
By default, this interval is 5 seconds.
InMail Station Mailbox Options - Auto Play
Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message auto play option.
When a subscriber logs into their mailbox, InMail can automatically play
new messages, or not.

By default, this setting is disabled.
Operation
Listening to Messages
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox
L (5)
0
Access the Message Listen mode
[Lstn]
See Message Listen Options on page 2-213 for an explanation of the available
options.
Plays Help message
Setting Message as New
Wait until message hs played back completely, then dial 66 or press:
[More]
[More]
[More]
66 [New]
Setting Message Playback Order
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox
67 [More]
[Setup]
[More]
1 [Order]
6 or press [FiFo / LiFo]
2 - 216
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Live Monitor
Description
Live Monitor lets Voice Mail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at
home. If activated, the extension’s incoming calls route to the user’s subscriber
mailbox. The Live Monitor feature is supported for External and Internal calls. Once
the mailbox answers, the user hears the caller’s incoming message. The multiline
terminal user can then:

- Let the call go through to their mailbox.

- Intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox.
Related Features
Subscriber Mailbox
Subscriber Mailbox users can take advantage of Live Monitoring.
Programming
Assign a Live Monitor Key to the extension.

15-07-01 Programmable Function Keys
Assign a programmable key as a Live Monitor Key (code 91).

By default, no Live Monitor Keys are assigned.
- OR -
InMail System Guide
1.
Press speaker
2.
Dial 751
3.
Press key to program
4.
Dial 91
5.
Press speaker.
2 - 217
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Live Monitor
To enable Live Monitor:
1. While phone is idle, press Live Monitor One-Touch key.
2. The One-Touch key begins to flash.
To disable Live Monitor:
1. While phone is idle, press Live Monitor One-Touch key.
2. The One-Touch key stops flashing.
To use this feature:
If enabled, when callers start leaving a message the phone display will show ANSW, MON
and Exit soft keys, you can then:
o Press MON to monitor the caller as they leave a message. While monitoring a caller you can
press ANSW and lift the handset to take the call or EXIT to stop monitoring.
o Press EXIT to not monitor the caller as they leave a message.
o Press ANSW then lift the handset to take the call. Any message that the caller has left up to that
point will be a new message.
2 - 218
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Live Record
Description
Live Record allows a subscriber to record their active call as a new message in their
mailbox, which they can review later on. Live Record can be helpful when an
extension user is on a call that involves a lot of detail (such as a technical discussion
or extensive directions). Rather than taking notes as the call progresses, the user can
record the conversation and carefully review it later on. VM8000 InMail broadcasts a
beep and a voice prompt to the callers as Live Record begins. After calling their
mailbox, the subscriber can archive, edit, or delete the recorded conversation.
Caution
The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or
record telephone conversations or other sound activities, whether or not contemporaneous
with transmission, may be illegal in certain circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal
advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any
telephone conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification to all
parties to a telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or other notification
methods or requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to
monitoring or recording the telephone conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict
penalties.
Related Features
Subscriber Mailbox
Live Record is available only to subscriber extensions.
Programming
1.
Assign a Voice Mail Record Key to the extension.

15-07-01
Programmable Function Keys
Assign a programmable key as a Voice Mail Record Key (code 78).
By default, no Voice Mail Record Keys are assigned.
Optionally assign a Live Record One-Touch key.


To assign the key: Speaker + Dial 751 + Press key + Dial 78 + Speaker.

To use the key: While on a call press the One-Touch key.
 By default, no Live Record One-Touch keys are assigned.
InMail System Guide
2 - 219
Issue 8.0
VM8000
2.
Enable or disable the Live Record beep.

47-02-07
Recording Conversation Beep (Rec Conv Beep)
Enable (1) the Live Record beep.


45-01-06
By default, the beep is enabled (1).
Record tone Alert Tone Interval
Optionally set the repeat interval (0~64800 seconds) for the additional Live
Record beep provided by the telephone system. Entering 0 disables the
additional beep.

By default, the additional beep interval is 30 seconds (30).
3.
Set the maximum length of recorded conversations.

47-01-03
Subscriber Message Length (Subs Msg Length)
The length of a recorded conversation is 10 times this interval.
The range for this option is 1~4095 seconds.
Since the Live Record time cannot exceed 4095 seconds, any setting in this
option larger than 409 has no effect on the length of recorded
conversations.

By default, this option is 120 seconds. This means the default length of recorded
conversations is 1200 seconds (20 minutes).
Operation
Live Record
To record your active call in your mailbox:
1. Press your Voice Mail Record key.
o
o
o
You hear 2 beeps and your Voice Mail Record key flashes.
The beeps periodically repeat to remind you that you are recording.
You and your caller hear the voice prompt “recording.”
 Only one party on a call can use Live Record at any time. This includes Intercom calls and
Conference calls.
To turn live record off:
1. Press your Voice Mail Record key.
o
o
2 - 220
Recording stops.
No options are available while recording (such as pause, resume, and exit).
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Log On to Voice Mail
Description
A subscriber can log on to their mailbox using a method that best suits their needs
and location. While at their own phone, the subscriber just presses a single key to log
on to their mailbox. To use their mailbox while at a co-worker’s phone, the subscriber
dials the VM8000 InMail master number, followed by their mailbox number (which is
normally the same as their extension number). If they are away from the office, the
subscriber can still use their mailbox by calling in through the Automated Attendant.
Local (On-site) Logon
An extension user can log on to their mailbox in the following ways:

Press their Message key to log on to their Subscriber Mailbox.

Dial the VM8000 InMail master number (e.g., 200), followed by their mailbox
number. This method is typically used by Guest Mailbox users, as well as
subscribers attempting to log into their Subscriber Mailbox from a coworker’s
phone.
Remote Log On
A Subscriber Mailbox user can call into the Automated Attendant and log on to their
mailbox. Following are two of the ways a user can do this:

After the Automated Attendant answers, dial a digit (typically #) followed by their
mailbox number. This method allows outside callers to log into their mailboxes
from outside the company. After they log on to their mailbox, they can use the
allowed features in the mailbox main menu.


To avoid unauthorized access to their mailbox, the user can enable his own unique
Security Code.
If an extension has a Direct Inward Line that voice mail picks up, the caller can
dial # during their greeting to log on to their mailbox (instead of leaving a
message). This method allows subscribers to dial their own number and then
use the features of their mailbox. This ability must be set up in the user Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
For example:

InMail System Guide
Program the Next Call Routing Mailbox # digit as LOGON to IXXX.
2 - 221
Issue 8.0
VM8000

While listening to their greeting, the subscriber can dial:
# (to route to their Next Call Routing Mailbox), then
# and their mailbox number to log on to their mailbox.

By default, this option is provided in Call Routing Mailbox 1. Additionally, the subscriber
should enable a Security Code for their mailbox to prevent unauthorized logons.
Related Features
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant allows Subscriber Mailbox users to log into their mailboxes.
Greeting
After remotely logging on to their mailbox, a subscriber mailbox user can remotely record
their greeting.
Guest Mailbox
A guest can log on to their mailbox by dialing the VM8000 InMail master number followed
by the Guest Mailbox number.
Security Code
To avoid unauthorized access to their mailbox (particularly with Remote Log On), the user
should enable their own unique Security Code.
Subscriber Mailbox
A subscriber can log into their mailbox by pressing a key on their telephone, dialing the
InMail master number (followed by their mailbox number), or logging on through the
Automated Attendant.
Programming
1.
Log on to a mailbox through the Automated Attendant:

47-13-01
Dial Action Table Actions: LOGON Action – Log On to Voice Mail (5)
(LOGON)
To log directly into a specific Subscriber Mailbox, enter the mailbox number
in the corresponding Number option.

For example, to have key 4 log directly into Subscriber Mailbox 305, for key
4 enter LOGON for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Number.
To have VM8000 InMail request Automated Attendant callers to select a
Subscriber Mailbox to log into, enter N in the corresponding Number option.
The key you choose must represent the first digit in the Subscriber Mailbox
number.
2 - 222
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

For example, to have the Automated Attendant request callers to enter the
number of the Subscriber Mailbox into which they wish to log, for key 3
enter LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding Number. When
callers dial 3, they hear, “Please enter your mailbox number.”
To have VM8000 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a
Subscriber Mailbox to log into (without playing an announcement), enter XXX in
the corresponding Number option. The key you choose must represent the first
digit in the Subscriber Mailbox numbers.

For example, to allow callers to log on to mailboxes 101~199, for key 3
enter LOGON for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.

To enter an X, press LK2.
To log into any valid Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the corresponding
Number option.

For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Subscriber Mailbox number
to log on, for key 1 enter LOGON for the Action and IXXX for the
corresponding Number.

To enter an I, press LK3.To enter an X, press LK2.
See Automated Attendant on page 2-47 for more on how to set up VM8000
InMail to answer outside calls.

By default, key # Action = LOGON and Number = None.
Operation
Logging On to Your Mailbox
To log on to your Subscriber Mailbox:
Press Message.
-ORPress Voice mail key (PGM 15-07 or SC 751: 01 + Pilot e.g. 200).
-ORFrom an on-premise single line telephone, lift handset and dial *8.
To log on to your Guest Mailbox or your Subscriber Mailbox from a coworker’s extension:
Press the Speaker key + Dial the VM8000 InMail master number (e.g., 200) + Dial your
mailbox number.
To log on to your Subscriber Mailbox from the Automated Attendant:
1. Wait for the Automated Attendant to answer.
2. Dial # and your mailbox number.
 This option may be different in your system. Check with your Communications Manager.
InMail System Guide
2 - 223
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 224
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Mailbox Announcement Message
Description
The Mailbox Announcement Message is a message, recorded by the System
Administrator, that plays to each subscriber when they log onto their mailbox. The
message will play at each log on until it expires, is deleted, or made inactive by the
System Administrator. Similar to the Broadcast Message, the Mailbox Announcement
Message is also used for important company announcements such as weatherrelated schedule changes and personnel updates. Unlike the Broadcast Message, the
Mailbox Announcement Message cannot be deleted, forwarded, or archived by the
subscriber.
After recording the Mailbox Announcement Message, the System Administrator can
choose how long they want the announcement to last. The choices are a specific
number of days or indefinite. Once the specific number of days passes, the message
expires (i.e., is made inactive but not deleted). The message can be reactivated later
on if required. The System Administrator can also make the message inactive before
it expires.
If a subscriber has a Security Code enabled for their mailbox, the Mailbox
Announcement Message will play after they enter their security code.
Related Features
Security Code
The Mailbox Announcement Message will play after the subscriber enters their security
code.
System Administrator
Only the System Administrator can record and set up a Mailbox Announcement Message.
Programming
Not applicable.
InMail System Guide
2 - 225
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Recording a Mailbox Announcement Message
To record a Mailbox Announcement Message:
1.
Log onto System Administrator’s Mailbox.
2.
[System Admin]
[Mgr]
Select the System Administrator Menu.
• Alternately dial SA (72).
[MboxAn]
Select to go to the Mailbox Announcement Message Menu.
• Alternately dial 3.
3.
4.
Do one of the following:
a.
[Lstn]
Select to listen to the current Mailbox Announcement Message (if any).
• Alternately dial L (5).
#
b.
[Rec]
Select to record the Mailbox Announcement Message.
• Alternately dial R (7).
[Cncl]
Select to delete the recording.
• Alternately dial E (3).
[Done]
Select to confirm the recording and exit the recording mode.
• Alternately dial #.
• If you don’t set the Days in step c below, the message is
automatically set to active (i.e., indefinite).
[Days]
Enter the number of days the Mailbox Announcement Message
will be active (01~99, 00 for inactive).
• Alternately dial A (2).
c.
[Reset]
2 - 226
Exit the listen mode.
[OK]
Select to confirm your entry.
• Alternately dial C (2).
[Clear]
Select to back up to the previous level
without making any changes.
• Alternately dial I (4).
[Exit]
Select to return to the Mailbox
Announcement Message Menu without
making any changes.
• Alternately dial #.
Select to make the Mailbox Announcement Message active
indefinitely.
• Alternately dial .
[OK]
Select to confirm your entry.
• Alternately dial C (2).
[Clear]
Select to back up to the previous level without
making any changes.
• Alternately dial I (4).
[Exit]
Select to return to the Mailbox Announcement
Message Menu without making any changes.
• Alternately dial #.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Recording a Mailbox Announcement Message (Continued)
c.
d.
[Del]
Select to delete the Mailbox Announcement Message.
• Alternately dial D (3).
[Exit]
Select to go back to the System Administrator Menu.
• Alternately dial #.
Listening to a Mailbox Announcement Message
To listen to a Mailbox Announcement Message:
1.
Log onto Subscriber Mailbox.
2.
Enter your Security Code (if enabled).
3.
You hear the Mailbox Announcement Message.
[Skip]
4.
Optionally select to skip the Mailbox Announcement Message.
When the Mailbox Announcement Message completes, you go to the Mailbox Main Menu.
InMail System Guide
2 - 227
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 228
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Mailbox Name
Description
A caller leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox can hear the mailbox’s
prerecorded name instead of the mailbox number. The prerecorded Mailbox Name
gives the subscriber’s mailbox that personal touch. Prior to leaving a message, callers
hear the name instead of the default “extension xxx” prompt. The recorded name can
be up to 10 seconds.
Related Features
Subscriber Mailbox
A subscriber can record a name for their mailbox, or have the System Administrator
record one for them.
System Administrator
The System Administrator can record names for Subscriber Mailboxes.
Programming
Not applicable
Operation
Recording Your Mailbox Name
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
RN
(76)
Access the Mailbox Name Menu.
[Not applicable]
L (5)
Listen to the currently recorded name (if any).
[Lstn]
#
R (7)
Exit listen mode.
Record a new name.
[Rec]
Record message.
InMail System Guide
2 - 229
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Recording Your Mailbox Name
2 - 230
*
Pause or restart recording.
[Resume]
[Pause]
D (3)
Cancel recording.
[Cncl]
#
Exit recording mode.
[Done]
D (3)
Erase the currently recorded name.
[Del]
#
Go back to the Mailbox Main Menu.
[Exit]
0
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Recording or Erasing Co-worker’s Names from a System Administrator’s Mailbox
Log On to System Administrator’s Mailbox.
SA
(72)
Access System Administrator options.
[Not applicable]
S (7)
Select Subscriber Mailbox Maintenance options.
[Subs]
Enter the number of the Subscriber Mailbox you want to maintain.
D (3)
Delete the mailbox name.
[Name]
N (6)
Record a new mailbox name.
[Not applicable]
L (5)
Listen to currently recorded name (if any).
[Lstn]
#
R (7)
Exit listen mode.
Record a new name.
[Rec]
Record message.
#
0
InMail System Guide
*
Pause or restart recording.
[Resume]
[Pause]
D (3)
Delete recording.
[Del]
#
Exit recording mode.
[Done]
D (3)
Erase the currently recorded name.
[Delete]
#
Go back to Subscriber Maintenance Menu.
[Exit]
Go back to System Administrator options.
[Exit]
Plays Help message.
2 - 231
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 232
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Mailbox Options Menu
Description
The Mailbox Options Menu is a sub-menu of a subscriber’s Main Menu that provides
access to the Auto Time Stamp, Mailbox Security Code Delete, and Message
Notification features. The chart below summarizes these options. Auto Time Stamp
helps if the subscriber needs to know the time and date of each message they receive
without taking any extra steps. If mailbox security is not an issue, the subscriber can
delete their security code to simplify logging on to their mailbox.
Mailbox Options Menu
Option
Description
S (7)
[Code]
Set or delete the mailbox’s Security Code.
See Mailbox Security Code Delete on page 2-235.
N (6)
[Notif]
Set up Message Notification.
See Message Notification on page 2-253.
AT (28)
[Time]
Enable or disable Auto Time Stamp.
See Auto Time Stamp on page 2-45.
To hear the list of Mailbox Options, dial 0.
Related Features
Auto Time Stamp
VM8000 InMail can optionally announce the time and date the message was left.
Mailbox Security Code Delete
The System Administrator can delete the security code for any Subscriber Mailbox.
Message Notification
Message Notification dials a telephone or pager number to let the user know they have
new messages in their mailbox.
Service Conditions
When migrating an IntraMail CF to a SV8100, the IntraMail mailbox softkeys are replaced
with VM8000 InMail softkeys. As such, some audio prompts will not match the softkey that
is displayed. To match the audio prompts to the SV8100 softkeys, use the VM8000 InMail
Utility to update the prompt language files. Greetings and messages stay intact as long as
the update prompts option is chosen. For more information on InMail Utility, Refer to
VM8000 InMail Utility on page 4-1.
InMail System Guide
2 - 233
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Accessing the Mailbox Options Menu
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
OP
(67)
Access the Mailbox Options Menu.
[Not applicable]
0
2 - 234
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Mailbox Security Code Delete
Description
The System Administrator can delete the security code for any Subscriber Mailbox.
This effectively unlocks the mailbox. If mailbox security is not necessary, deleting a
mailbox security code speeds up mailbox log on. Without a security code, the
subscriber just presses their Message key to immediately log on to their mailbox.
Related Features
Mailbox Options Menu
Mailbox Security Code Delete is available on the Mailbox Options Menu.
Security Code
Subscriber Mailboxes can have Security Codes.
System Administrator
The System Administrator can delete a mailbox security code.
Service Conditions
When migrating an IntraMail CF to a SV8100, the IntraMail mailbox softkeys are replaced
with VM8000 InMail softkeys. As such, some audio prompts will not match the softkey that
is displayed. To match the audio prompts to the SV8100 softkeys, use the VM8000 InMail
Utility to update the prompt language files. Greetings and messages stay intact as long as
the update prompts option is chosen. Refer to VM8000 InMail Utility on page 4-1 for InMail
Utility information.
Programming
No additional programming required.
InMail System Guide
2 - 235
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Deleting a Mailbox Security Code
Log On to System Administrator’s Mailbox.
SA
(72)
Access System Administrator options.
[Not applicable]
S (7)
Select Subscriber Mailbox Maintenance options.
[Subs]
Enter the number of the Subscriber Mailbox you want to maintain.
* (7)
#
0
2 - 236
Delete the mailbox Security Code.
[Not applicable]
Go to the System Administrator Menu.
[Exit]
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Main Menu
Description
After a Subscriber Mailbox user logs into their mailbox, VM8000 InMail provides them
with the Main Menu of options. The Main Menu provides quick access to the most
commonly used mailbox features in a central location. It includes listening and
recording options, as well as additional selections for recording mailbox names and
greetings. The chart below summarizes these options.
Mailbox Main Menu
Option
L (5)
[Lstn]
RS (77)
[Rec]
G (4)
[Greet]
Description
Listen to messages.
See Listening to Messages on page 2-213.
Record and send a message.
See Message Record on page 2-263.
Record a mailbox greeting.
See Greeting on page 2-163.
RN (76)
[Not applicable]
Record a mailbox name.
See Mailbox Name on page 2-229.
1N (16)
[Not applicable]
Select the New Message List.
See Message Listen Mode on page 2-251.
1S (17)
[Not applicable]
Select the Saved Message List.
See Message Listen Mode on page 2-251.
1A (12)
[Not applicable]
Select the All Message List.
See Message Listen Mode on page 2-251.
OP (67)
[Not applicable]
Use the Mailbox Options. See the following:
See Security Code on page 2-311.
See Message Notification on page 2-253.
See Auto Time Stamp on page 2-45.
SA (72)
[Not applicable]
Access the System Administrator options.
See System Administrator on page 2-323.
TI (84)
X (9)
[Exit]
Check the current time and date.
See Time and Date on page 2-329.
Exit your mailbox.
See Exiting a Mailbox on page 2-135.
To hear the complete Main Menu of options, dial 0 while in the Main Menu.
InMail System Guide
2 - 237
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Related Features
See the Mailbox Main Menu on page 2-237.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Service Conditions
When migrating an IntraMail CF to a SV8100, the IntraMail mailbox softkeys are
replaced with VM8000 InMail softkeys. As such, some audio prompts will not match
the softkey that is displayed. To match the audio prompts to the SV8100 softkeys, use
the VM8000 InMail Utility to update the prompt language files. Greetings and
messages stay intact as long as the update prompts option is chosen. Refer to
VM8000 InMail Utility on page 4-1 for InMail Utility information.
Operation
Accessing the Mailbox Main Menu
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
You automatically go to the mailbox Main Menu.
0
2 - 238
Plays Help message which summarizes the Main Menu options.
See Mailbox Main Menu on page 2-237 for the Main Menu options.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Make Call
Description
Make Call lets a Subscriber Mailbox user listen to a voice message and dial MC to
return the call without knowing their caller’s phone number. Make Call automates
returning messages since you don’t have to dial the message sender’s telephone
number. Make Call is always available for messages received from coworkers. Make
call is available for messages received from outside callers if the system has Caller ID
enabled (and provided by the connected telco).
While listening to a message, the telephone display shows the callers number (or
extension) in addition to the date and time the message was left.
Automatic Route Selection
Since trunk Caller ID data is always received as 10 digits, you must set up Automatic
Route Selection (ARS) to properly process the digits dialed during a Make Call
callout. For example, it may be necessary to add a leading 1 for all long distance calls
or strip the leading 1 and area code from all local calls. Refer to Automatic Route
Selection in the SV8100 Programming Manual for more information. Without ARS, all
Make Call callouts are dialed exactly as the Caller ID data is received.
Related Features
Caller ID
Make Call for outside calls is available only if the telco provides Caller ID to the telephone
system and the telephone system passes that Caller ID data to the VM8000 InMail voice
mail ports.
Message Reply
Message Reply cannot automatically reply to a message left by an outside caller. Use
Caller ID with Return Call instead.
Programming
1.
Be sure the telco provides Caller ID to the connected telephone system.
2.
Check your telephone system programming to be sure the telephone system is
set up to receive Caller ID and pass it to the VM8000 InMail voice mail ports.
InMail System Guide
2 - 239
Issue 8.0
VM8000

14-02-10
Analog Trunk Data Setup – Caller ID
Enable (1) a trunk’s ability to receive Caller ID data.


14-01-22
By default, a trunk’s ability to receive Caller ID data is disabled (0).
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Caller ID to Voice Mail
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable this option.


20-09-02
By default, this option is disabled.
Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) – Caller ID Display
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable the Caller ID display at an extension.


20-06-01
By default, this option is disabled.
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service to extensions.

3.
By default, extension 101 has Class 15. All other extensions have Class 1.
Set up Trunk Group Routing.
Make Call callouts use Trunk Group Routing (dial 9) when selecting outbound routes.

47-08-02
Screened Transfer Timeout (Scrn Trf Timeout)
Set how long a Screened Transfer (TRF) from the Automated Attendant
rings (0~255 seconds) an unanswered extension before recalling.
Be sure that the 24-02-04 Transfer Recall Time is longer than the setting of
this option. If the Transfer Recall is shorter, Screened Transfers recalls the
same as Unscreened Transfers.


14-05-01
By default, this option is 15 seconds.
Trunk Groups
Assign trunks to trunk groups (1~8).


14-06-01
By default, all trunks are in group 1.
Trunk Group Routing
Set up Trunk Group Routing. There are 8 routing tables, with 4 routes in
each table.

By default, the first route in routing table 1 is trunk group 1. No other entries are
defined. This makes trunk group 1 the dial 9 route by default.
Refer to Trunk Group Routing in the VM8000 InMail Programming Manual
for more.
4.
Enable Loop Supervision for the trunks on which you are going to allow remote
logons to use Make Call.

14-01-13
Basic Trunk Data Setup – Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Enter 1 to enable Loop Supervision for each trunk to be used for External
Transfer.

2 - 240
By default, this option is enabled for all trunks.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
5.
If you are going to allow remote logos to use Make Call, enable Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer for all VM8000 InMail extensions.

20-11-14
Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) – Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer Restriction
For each VM8000 InMail extension to be used for External Transfer, enter 0
to turn Off Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction. (Entering 1 disables
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer).

20-06-01
Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service to extensions (1-15).
Operation
Using Make Call from your Mailbox
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
L (5)
Listen to the message for which you want to make a return call.
[Lstn]
MC
(62)
Dial this code while listening to the message you want to return.
[Not applicable]
o Make Call automatically places a return call to the co-worker that left you the
message.
o If your system has Caller ID, Make Call can automatically place a return call
to your outside caller.
o If you hear “Your call cannot go through,” your system’s Caller ID is not
properly set up. You go right back to the listen mode for the message you
were listening to when you tried the Make Call.
InMail System Guide
2 - 241
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 242
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Message Count Display
Description
The telephone display provides interactive status updates for the subscriber’s
mailbox. When initially logged on to the mailbox, the telephone display shows the
number of new and archived messages. The message count automatically updates
as the subscriber receives new messages and processes older messages.
22- and 34-Button Display
If an extension Message key is optionally assigned as a Message Waiting key (see
Programming on page 2-244), the telephone display can show the number of new
Voice Mail messages without the user logging on to their mailbox. If the user has 1
new Voice Mail message in their mailbox, for example, they see the following display:
Enhanced Message Key Operation
When a keyset has 15-02-26 Multiline Telephone Basic Setup: Message Key
Operation Mode set to 1, the Message key provides one-button access to VM8000
InMail. When the user presses Message, they immediately call their mailbox.
When a keyset has 15-02-26 Multiline Telephone Basic Setup: Message Key
Operation Mode set to 0, the following occurs:

If a user has new voice mail messages waiting, pressing Message shows the
number of waiting voice mail messages. Pressing Message a second time calls
voice mail.

If a user has new Message Waiting indications left, pressing Message shows
the extension that left the Message Waiting. Pressing Message a second time
places an Intercom call to the coworker that left the Message Waiting.
InMail System Guide
2 - 243
Issue 8.0
VM8000

If a user has both new Voice Mail messages and Messages Waiting:

Pressing Message shows the number of new voice mail messages.

Pressing Vol Up and Vol Down scrolls between the voice mail messages count and
the Message Waiting count.

Pressing Message a second time either calls Voice Mail or returns the Message
Waiting call, depending on which count is displayed.
Related Features
Not applicable
Programming
1.
Optionally assign an extension’s MSG key as a Message key.

15-02-26
MSG Key Operation Mode
Enter 0 to optionally assign the Message key as a Message Waiting key.


15-07-01
By default, extensions 101~108 have the Message key assigned for Voice Mail (1).
All other extensions have the Message key assigned for Message Waiting (0).
Programming Function Keys
For one-button access to the Subscriber Mailbox, set up a Voice Mail key
(code 01 + 8).

By default, no Voice Mail keys are assigned.
Operation
Using the Message Count Display
Operation is automatic.
2 - 244
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Message Delete
Description
A Subscriber Mailbox user can delete any message left in their mailbox. Message
Delete lets the subscriber do their own mailbox maintenance. They can delete
messages they no longer need and archive messages that contain essential
information. With Message Delete, the subscriber doesn’t have to rely on the System
Administrator to perform these routine mailbox maintenance functions.
Related Features
Erasing All Messages
The System Administrator can delete all messages in a Subscriber Mailbox.
Subscriber Mailbox
A subscriber can log on to their mailbox and delete any of their messages.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Deleting a Message
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
L (5)
Access Message Listen mode (to listen to the message that you want to delete).
[Lstn]
D (3)
Delete the message.
[Del]
o You automatically return to the Message Listen mode.
o The message count updates after the user hangs up.
InMail System Guide
2 - 245
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 246
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Message Forward
Description
A Subscriber Mailbox user can forward a message in their mailbox to a coworker or
coworkers. Forwarding is helpful when a subscriber receives a message with which a
coworker can assist them. Rather than sending a new message, the subscriber can
just forward the message with which they need help. If needed, they can send the
message to up to 10 other mailboxes. They can also optionally record a comment
before the forwarded message. Typically, the comment would describe the reason for
the message forwarding.
VM8000 InMail deletes the message in the subscriber’s mailbox after they forward it.
The Message Forward destination receives the forwarded message as a new
message.
Related Features
Call Forward to a Mailbox
An extension user can easily forward calls to their mailbox.
Programming
No additional programming required.
InMail System Guide
2 - 247
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Forwarding a Message
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
L (5)
Access the Message Listen mode (to listen to the message that you want to
forward).
[Lstn]
MF
(63)
Access the Message Forward Menu.
[Not applicable]
Enter the number of the mailbox to which you want to forward the
message.
#
Start recording.
[Cont]
Record a comment that will precede the forwarded
message, OR
Dial # to forward without a comment.
While recording a comment for your forwarded
message.
*
#
#
0
2 - 248
*
Pause or restart recording.
[Resume]
E (3)
Cancel the forwarding and exit your
mailbox.
[Cncl]
#
End the recording.
[Done]
Back up and re-enter the mailbox number.
[MBOX]
Go back to the Message Listen mode.
[Exit]
Exit the Message Listen mode and go to the Mailbox Main Menu.
[Exit]
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Message Length
Description
You can set the maximum message length that can be left in a Subscriber Mailbox.
When a caller tries to leave a message that exceeds the limit, they hear, “You have
reached the recording limit.” VM8000 InMail sends the portion of the message that fits
within the allowed Message Length and hangs up. The Message Length option helps
maximize the storage space reserved for messages. If you find that callers are
leaving unusually long messages, shorten the Message Length. VM8000 InMail cuts
off the message when the caller reaches the Message Length limit. On the other
hand, if you hear that VM8000 InMail is cutting off caller’s messages prematurely,
increase the Message Length for more time.
Related Features
Not applicable
Programming
1.
Set the maximum length of recorded messages.

47-01-03
Subscriber Message Length (Subs Msg Length)
This option sets the maximum length (1~4095 seconds) of recorded
messages for:
2.
InMail System Guide

Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.

Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox.

Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a GOTO
command and then dialing RS to record and send a message.

Subscriber Mailbox Greetings.

Mailbox Names.

Announcement Messages.

Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus.

By default, these messages are a maximum of 120 seconds.
Set the maximum length of recorded Quick Messages.
2 - 249
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-01-04
Non-Subscriber Message Length (Mbox Msg Length)
This option sets the maximum length (1~4095 seconds) of recorded
messages for:

Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in a
Subscriber Mailbox.

Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber Mailbox.

By default, these messages are a maximum of 120 seconds.
Operation
Not applicable
2 - 250
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Message Listen Mode
Description
After logging on to their mailbox, the subscriber can select the category of messages
they want to hear. Then they can listen to just new messages, just archived
messages, or all messages. Message Listen Mode lets the subscriber customize their
mailbox to initially play just the list of messages they want to hear. For example, if a
subscriber has many archived messages and just a few new messages, then can log
on to their mailbox and dial 1N to select the new message list. When they press L,
they then cycle through just their new message.
Initially, a Subscriber Mailbox uses the All Message List. If they select a different
message list, VM8000 InMail reinstates the all Message List the next time they log on
to their mailbox.
Related Features
Main Menu
The Message Listen mode options are mailbox Main Menu selections.
When migrating an IntraMail CF to a SV8100, the IntraMail mailbox softkeys are replaced
with VM8000 InMail softkeys. As such, some audio prompts will not match the softkey that
is displayed. To make the audio prompts match the SV8100 softkeys, the VM8000 InMail
Utility must be used to re-initialize the IntraMail CF turning it into an InMail. Refer to
VM8000 InMail Utility on page 4-1 for InMail Utility information.
Service Conditions
When migrating an IntraMail CF to a SV8100, the IntraMail mailbox softkeys are replaced
with VM8000 InMail softkeys. As such, some audio prompts will not match the softkey that
is displayed. To match the audio prompts to the SV8100 softkeys, use the VM8000 InMail
Utility to update the prompt language files. Greetings and messages stay intact as long as
the update prompts option is chosen. Refer to VM8000 InMail Utility on page 4-1 for InMail
Utility information.
Programming
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 251
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Message Listen Mode
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
[Not applicable]
1N
(16)
1S
(17)
1A
(12)
0
2 - 252
Listen to new messages.
[Not applicable]
Listen to archived messages.
[Not applicable]
Listen to all messages.
[Not applicable]
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Message Notification
Description
Once activated by the Subscriber Mailbox user, Message Notification alerts a
telephone number to let the user know when there are new messages in their
mailbox. With Message Notification, a subscriber who is out of the office does not
have keep calling their mailbox remotely to find out if they have new messages. InMail
lets them know automatically. Notification can call extensions, local numbers, long
distance numbers and digital pagers. When a Subscriber Mailbox user sets up
Message Notification, they choose from the following options:

If Message Notification is enabled or disabled.
(Message Notification can only occur if it is enabled.)

The time of day Message Notification should begin and end.
(Callouts only occur between the begin and end times.)

The type of device Message Notification is calling.
(Message Notification can call a normal telephone number or a digital pager.)

The telephone or pager service phone number.
To protect your mailbox from unauthorized access, be sure to record a security code
for your mailbox before enabling Message Notification.
How Message Notification Works to Normal Telephone Numbers
1.
The subscriber activates Message Notification for their mailbox (see Operation
on page 2-258).
2.
When the subscriber receives a new message, VM8000 InMail immediately
dials the destination that should receive the Message Notification.

3.
VM8000 InMail waits up to 30 seconds for ringback, reorder, busy or voice activity
from the called number. If nothing is detected, the callout is considered
unanswered.
If the recipient answers, VM8000 InMail plays the notification message (“Hello, I
have a message for”) and asks the recipient to dial 1 to log on to their mailbox.
The recipient hears the notification message if:

They say “Hello” after answering the callout.
- OR -

The system receives answer supervision from the telco after the recipient answers
the call.


InMail System Guide
The recipient can skip the announcement by dialing 1 to log on to their mailbox after
answering the callout – without saying “Hello.”
The notification is to a system extension.
2 - 253
Issue 8.0
VM8000
4.
After the recipient logs on to the mailbox, the notification is considered
acknowledged and does not reoccur until the subscriber receives new
messages.
5.
If the recipient doesn’t answer, the system retries the callout number. After
completing the programmed number of callout attempts, Message Notification
stops.
6.
After the notification process begins, a new message does not restart the
process if it is already in progress. After the process ends (e.g., if the message
is acknowledged or the maximum number of callout attempts is reached), the
next new message restarts the process.
How Message Notification Works to Digital Pager Numbers
1.
The subscriber activates Message Notification for their mailbox (see Operation
on page 2-258).
2.
When subscriber receives a new message, VM8000 InMail immediately dials
the pager service.

3.
VM8000 InMail waits up to 30 seconds for ringback, reorder, busy or voice activity
from the called number. If nothing is detected, the callout is considered
unanswered.
After the pager service answers, VM8000 InMail sends a dial string which
causes the pager display to show the subscriber’s mailbox number as well as
the number of new messages in the mailbox.

The notification is considered acknowledged if the recipient logs on to the mailbox.
Notification does not reoccur until the subscriber receives new messages.

If the pager service doesn’t answer, VM8000 InMail retries the callout number.
Message Notification may eventually cancel if the callout remains unacknowledged.
Related Features
Security Code
To protect their mailbox from unauthorized access, the subscriber should be sure to
record a Security Code for your mailbox before enabling Message Notification.
Programming
Programming that Applies to All Types of Message Notification
1.
Set up Trunk Group Routing.
Message Notification callouts use Trunk Group Routing (dial 9) when selecting
outbound routes.
2 - 254
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

14-05-01
Trunk Groups
Assign trunks to trunk groups (1~8).


14-06-01
By default, all trunks are in group 1.
Trunk Group Routing
Set up Trunk Group Routing. There are 8 routing tables, with 4 routes in
each table.

By default, the first route in routing table 1 is trunk group 1. No other entries are
defined. This makes trunk group 1 the dial 9 route by default.
Refer to Trunk Group Routing in the SV8100 Programming Manual for
more.
2.
Set the maximum number on incomplete callout attempts.

47-01-14
Number of Cascading Attempts (Notify Call Attempt)
Set how many times (1~99 attempts) VM8000 InMail retries an incomplete
Message Notification callout. This total includes unacknowledged callouts,
callouts to a busy destination, and callouts to an unanswered destination.
This option applies to pager and non-pager callouts.

The default setting for this option is 5 attempts.
3.
Be sure Message Waiting lamp for Subscriber Mailboxes is on.

47-02-08
Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp)
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable Message Waiting lamp.
If Message Waiting lamp is disabled (0), Message Notification will not
function.

By default, this option is 1 (Yes).
Unique Programming for Non-Pager Message Notification
1.
Set the intervals VM8000 InMail waits between incomplete non-pager Message
Notification callouts.

47-01-10
Wait Between Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify N-Pgr Intvl)
Set the minimum time (1~255 minutes) between non-pager Message
Notification callouts in which the destination answers, says “Hello,” dials 1
to acknowledge and then enters the wrong security code.


47-01-11
The default for this option is 20 minutes.
Wait Between Busy Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify Busy Intvl)
Set how long VM8000 InMail will wait (1~255 minutes), after it dials a busy
non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout number.

InMail System Guide
The default for this option is 15 minutes.
2 - 255
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-01-12
Wait Between RNA Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify RNA Intvl)
Set how long VM8000 InMail will wait (1~255 minutes), after it dials an
unanswered non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout
number. The default setting for this option is 30 minutes.
There are three types of unanswered non-pager callouts:

If the callout rings the destination longer than the 47-01-13 Wait for Answer
Non-Pager Callout Attempts option.

If the destination answers, says “Hello” (or the system detects answer
supervision) and then hangs up without dialing 1 to log on to their mailbox.
This typically happens if someone unfamiliar with notification answers the
callout, or if the callout is picked up by an answering machine.

If the destination answers and then hangs up without saying “Hello.” This
typically happens if someone unfamiliar with the notification answers the
callout (like the above example), or if the call is picked up by an answering
machine which insufficient outgoing message volume.

The default for this option is 30 minutes.
2.
Set how VM8000 InMail determines when a non-pager callout rings without
being answered.

47-01-13
Wait for Answer Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify RNA Rings)
If a non-pager callout rings the destination longer than this option (1~99
rings), VM8000 InMail marks the call as unanswered (Ring No Answer) and
hangs up.

The default for this option is 5 rings.
Unique Programming for Digital Pager Message Notification
1.
Set up the system-wide options that apply to the digital pager callback number.

47-01-07
Digital Pager Callback Number (Pager CBack)
Set the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification
callout number for a digital pager. This is the portion of the callout number
that is appended to the pager service telephone number.
2 - 256

By default, this option is XM#, where:

X is the number of the extension that generated the notification.

 is a visual delimiter (to make the pager display easier to read).

M is the number of new messages in the extension’s mailbox.

# is the digit normally used by the pager service for positive disconnect.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-01-08
Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number (Pager Dial Delay)
Set the delay (0~99 seconds) that occurs just before VM8000 InMail dials
the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the Message Notification
callout number for a digital pager. Set this delay so the pager service has
enough time to connect to the digital pager before sending the callback
number. Your pager service may be able to help you determine the best
value for this option (0~99 seconds). When placing a digital pager
notification, the system:

Seizes the trunk specified by the Trunk Group Routing setup.

Dials the user-entered notification number (in Message + OP + N).

Waits the 47-01-08 Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number interval.

Dials the number entered in 47-01-07 Digital Pager Callback Number.
The system assumes that the notification number completes dialing
approximately 4 seconds after trunk seizure. This means that, by default, the
Digital Pager Callback Number is dialed into the pager service about 13
seconds after trunk seizure.
Your pager service may be able to help you determine the best value for
this option.

By default, this option is nine seconds.
2.
Set up the system-wide options that apply to digital pager callouts.

47-01-09
Wait Between Digital Pager Callout Attempts (Notify Pager Intvl)
Set the minimum time (1~255 minutes) between unacknowledged or
unanswered digital pager Message Notification callouts. (A subscriber
acknowledges a digital pager notification by logging on to their mailbox.)
After this interval expires, VM8000 InMail tries the callout again (for up to
the number of times set in 47-01-14 Number of Cascading Attempts).
If the system dials the callout number and the pager service is busy, it
retries the number in one minute.


47-01-15
By default, this option is 15 minutes.
Send Pager Callout Until Acknowledged (Retry Until Ack)
When this option is enabled (1), VM8000 InMail continues to retry a digital
pager Message Notification callout until the notification is acknowledged. If
this option is disabled (0), VM8000 InMail retries a digital pager Message
Notification the number of times specified in 47-01-14 Number of Cascading
Attempts. This option does not apply to Message Notification callouts to
telephone numbers.
A digital pager notification is acknowledged when the recipient logs on to
the mailbox.

InMail System Guide
By default, this option is disabled (0).
2 - 257
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Setting Up Message Notification
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
OP
(67)
Access the Mailbox Options menu.
[Not applicable]
N (6)
Access the Message Notification Options Menu.
[Notif]
VM8000 InMail plays a summary of your Message Notification settings.
The your telephone display shows your current notification settings (see
sample below).
For telephone numbers
Notify On 8am- 5pm
Number: 12039265400
- OR For Pager Numbers
Notify On 8am- 5pm
Pager: 12039265400
O (6)
Turn Message Notification on or off.
[On]
[Off]
C (2)
Change your Message Notification setup.
[Chnge]
When you see: Notification Begin
Enter the hour you want Message Notification to
begin.
Enter 2 digits for the hour
A (2)
Select AM
[AM]
P (7)
Select PM
[PM]
*
Skip this option without changing your entry.
[Next]
#
Back up to the previous level without
changing your entry.
[Exit]
When you see: Notification End
Enter the hour you want Message Notification to end.
o Enter 2 digits for the hour.
o For 24-hour notification, make the End Time the same as
the Start Time.
2 - 258
A (2)
Select AM
[AM]
P (7)
Select PM
[PM]
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Setting Up Message Notification (Continued)
*
Skip this option without changing your entry.
[Next]
#
Back up to the previous level without
changing your entry.
[Exit]
When you see: Notify Via
N (6)
The notification destination is a telephone
number.
[Num]
D (3)
The notification destination is a digital pager.
[Pager]
*
Skip this option without changing your entry.
[Next]
#
Back up to the previous level without
changing your entry.
[Exit]
When you see: Number
Enter the Message Notification callout number (16
digits max).
o Enter the number exactly as you want the system to dial
it (including a leading 1 for toll calls, if required).
o If the number you enter is 4 digits or less, it is an
Intercom call. If it is more than 4 digits, it is an outside
call.
#
#
0
InMail System Guide
#
Accept the number entered and
back up to the previous level.
[OK]
[Clear]
Delete the number you just
entered.
*
Skip this option without changing your entry.
[Next]
#
Back up to the previous level without
changing your entry.
[Exit]
Go back to the Mailbox Options menu.
[Exit]
Go back to the Main Menu.
[Exit]
Plays Help message.
2 - 259
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Answering a Message Notification Callout to a Telephone
To answer a Message Notification to a telephone:
1. Answer the callout at the programmed destination.
If VM8000 InMail does not hear your voice (or you do not speak), go to the next step
and dial 1 to proceed.
2. Dial 1 to accept the Message Notification.
- OR hang up to have the Message Notification call back later.
3. When you dial 1, you automatically log on to the subscriber mailbox that left you the
Message Notification.
o If you do not log on to your mailbox, VM8000 InMail resends your notification.
o
Answering a Digital Pager Message Notification Callout
To answer a Digital Pager notification:
1. Operation is automatic.
o
2 - 260
If you do not call and log on to your mailbox, VM8000 InMail resends your pager
notification.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Message Playback Direction
Description
When a user dials L (5) after logging on to their mailbox, VM8000 InMail plays their
messages in either LIFO (last-in-first-out) or FIFO (first-in-first-out) order. Since
Message Playback Direction lets a subscriber listen to messages in the order they
find most helpful, check with them to find out how they want this option set. If the
subscriber prefers to hear their new messages first, enable LIFO (last-in-first-out)
listening order. The newest (last-in) messages are at the top of the message list and
the oldest messages are at the bottom of the list. If the subscriber wants to be
reminded of their oldest messages first, enable FIFO (first-in-first-out) listening order.
The oldest (first-in) messages are at the top of the message list and the newest
messages are at the bottom.
Related Features
Listening to Messages
Programming
1.
Set the Message Playback Direction for a Subscriber Mailbox.

47-02-04
Message Playback Order
The options are:
0 - FIFO (first-in-first-out, or oldest messages first).
1 - LIFO (last-in-first-out, or newest messages first).

By default, this option is 0 (FIFO, or first-in-first-out).
Operation
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 261
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 262
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Message Record
Description
See Record and Send a Message on page 2-297.
Related Features
See Record and Send a Message on page 2-297.
Programming
See Record and Send a Message on page 2-297.
Operation
See Record and Send a Message on page 2-297.
InMail System Guide
2 - 263
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 264
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Message Reply
Description
A Subscriber Mailbox user can reply to a message from a coworker by dialing RE,
without knowing the caller’s extension or mailbox number. Message Reply saves the
subscriber valuable time since they don’t need to know the sender’s extension
number or send a separate message to respond. The subscriber can just listen to the
coworker’s message, dial a code, and record their answer. The message sender
receives the reply as a new message.
Related Features
Make Call
Message Reply does not apply to outside calls. If the telephone system provides Caller ID
information to VM8000 InMail, a subscriber can use Make Call (MC) to call the person
back.
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Message Reply
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
L (5)
Listen to your messages.
[Lstn]
While listening to a message.
RE
(73)
Reply to the message.
[Not applicable]
If the mailbox does not exist, you are prompted to enter the
mailbox number to receive the reply. This can occur if you dial RE
while listening to a message from an outside caller.
#
Start recording.
[Cont]
Options available while recording.
InMail System Guide
2 - 265
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Message Reply
*
[Exit]
#
0
2 - 266
*
Pause or restart recording.
[Resume]
[Pause]
D (3)
Delete recording.
[Cncl]
#
End the recording.
[Done]
Back up and re-enter the mailbox number.
[MBOX]
Exit without recording and go back to the
Message Listen menu.
Exit and go back to the mailbox Main Menu.
[Exit]
Plays Help message
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Message Storage Limit
Description
Message Storage Limit sets how many messages can be left in a Subscriber Mailbox.
Message Storage Limit is another invaluable tool for managing VM8000 InMail’s voice
message storage space. To conserve storage space and make it available for new
messages, decrease the Message Storage Limit. If storage space is not an issue,
increase the Message Storage Limit so subscribers can store additional messages.
Be sure to let the subscribers know how many messages their mailboxes can hold. By
default, VM8000 InMail can store up to 99 messages in System Admin mailbox 101
and 20 messages in all other Subscriber Mailboxes.
Related Features
Erasing All Messages
The System Administrator can delete all messages in a Subscriber Mailbox.
Message Delete
A Subscriber Mailbox user can delete any messages left in their mailbox.
Programming
1.
Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in a Subscriber Mailbox.

47-02-03
Number of Messages
Enter the maximum number of messages the mailbox can store (0~99).
If a caller tries to leave a message after the maximum number is reached,
they hear: “That mailbox is full.” VM8000 InMail then hangs up.

By default, the maximum number of messages that can be left is 99 for extension
101 and 20 for all others.
Operation
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 267
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 268
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Message Waiting Lamp
Description
An extension’s Message Waiting (MSG) lamp flashes on the telephone to indicate
that the user has new messages waiting in their mailbox. After VM8000 InMail is
properly installed and programmed, telephone Message Waiting Lamp operation is
automatic. The lamp flashes fast when new messages are in the extension user’s
mailbox. The Message Waiting Lamp is a visual reminder of new messages. The
subscriber does not have to call their mailbox and listen to the voice prompts to find
out when they have new messages.
Related Features
None
Programming
1.
Turn Message Waiting lamp for Subscriber Mailboxes on or off.

47-02-08
Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp)
Enter 0 (No) to disable Message Waiting lamp.
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable Message Waiting lamp.
If Message Waiting lamp is disabled (0), Message Notification does not
function.

By default, this option is 1 (Yes).
2.
Select Message Waiting Lamp color.

15-02-28
Message Waiting LED Color
Enter 0 = Flashes Green
Enter 1 = Flashes Red

By default, this option is set to 1 (Flashes Red).
Operation
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 269
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 270
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Multiple Company Greetings
Description
The Automated Attendant can answer each individual trunk (outside line) with a
unique greeting and unique set of dialing options. Since there are a total of 8 Answer
Tables, this allows up to 8 companies or departments to share a single VM8000
InMail. Callers to each company hear the company greeting (Instruction Menu) and
can dial options that may be only available to that specific company. Set this up as
follows:

Assign a unique Answer Table (1~8) to each trunk that you want to have an
individual greeting.

For each Answer Table, assign the Call Routing Mailbox that handles the call.

For each assigned Call Routing Mailbox, set up the dialing options (Dial Action
Table) and record an Instruction Menu.
If multiple companies or departments share an VM8000 InMail, messaging and calling
between the workers of each company or department is not restricted.
Related Features
Answer Table
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each trunk.
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming
calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers.
Routing Mailbox
The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial
Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer
Table.
InMail System Guide
2 - 271
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming
1.
Assign an Answer Table to each trunk.

47-10-01
Answer Table Assignment (Answer Table)
Assign an Answer Table (1~8) to each trunk that the Automated Attendant
should answer.

2.
By default, all trunks are assigned to Answer Table 1.
See the following features for more:
Answer Table on page 2-27.
Automated Attendant on page 2-47.
Routing Mailbox on page 2-301.
Dial Action Table on page 2-89.
Operation
Not applicable
2 - 272
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
NetLink
Description
NetLink Networking, using an IP network, provides for a seamless connection; joining
multiple SV8100 communication servers into a “virtual” single communication server.
A unified numbering plan allows users to access any extension in the network as if
they were in the same location. Starting with Version 4000 software, the VM8000
InMail can be used for the Centralized Voice Mail portion of that feature. Refer to the
Univerge SV8100 Networking Manual for more information.
Service Conditions

Main Software Version 4000 or greater is required for the InMail to support
NetLink centralized voice mail.

When using InMail for centralized voice mail in a NetLink network, replication
should be scheduled during non-peak hours of operation.

With Version 4000 or greater software, up to 16 ports of InMail are supported.

VM8000 InMail voice mail is NOT supported for centralized voice mail in a KTS
to KTS network for K-CCIS.

When using InMail in a CCIS or NetLink network, 8-digit extensions and
mailboxes are not supported.
Related Features
None
Guide to Feature Programming
Refer to the Univerge SV8100 Networking Manual for information on configuring
NetLink.
InMail System Guide
2 - 273
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 274
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Description
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides callers with additional dialing options while
listening to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded, or the default greeting. It also provides
additional dialing options to callers routed to an Announcement Mailbox. Next Call
Routing Mailbox lets the caller choose how VM8000 InMail should handle their call.
For example, if an Automated Attendant caller dials a subscriber’s extension and
hears the greeting, Next Call Routing Mailbox (if programmed) allows them to dial
other options instead of hanging up.
Subscriber Mailbox Options
The following chart shows the additional dialing options a caller has while listening to
a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller can dial
depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and Dialing Option options.
For an explanation of the options a caller can dial while recording, see Record and
Send a Message on page 2-297.
InMail System Guide
2 - 275
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Dialing Options while Listening to a Subscriber Mailbox Greeting
47-02-14 Next
Call
Routing
Mailbox
47-02-13
Dialing Option
Digit
Dialed
Undefined
No
0
Action
1~9
1~32 (valid Call
Routing
Mailbox)
No
2 - 276
Yes
Intercom Call
Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and
the greeting repeats.
#
VM8000 InMail hangs up.
*
Caller skips greeting and can immediately
start recording.
0
Caller follows 0
action in Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
1~9
1~32 (valid Call
Routing
Mailbox)
Trunk Call
Caller hears, “That is
an invalid entry,” and
the greeting repeats.
Caller hears, “That is an invalid entry,” and
the greeting repeats.
#
Caller routes to the
Next Call Routing
Mailbox and hears its
Instruction Menu.
*
Caller skips greeting and can immediately
start recording.
0
Caller follows key
action in Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
Caller hears, “That is
an invalid entry,” and
the greeting repeats.
#
Caller routes to the
Next Call Routing
Mailbox and hears its
Instruction Menu.
VM8000 InMail
hangs up.
*
Caller skips greeting and can immediately
start recording.
1~9
VM8000 InMail
hangs up.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Logging On to a Subscriber Mailbox while Listening to the Greeting
A subscriber who wishes to log on to their mailbox while listening to their greeting
must have the option set in their Next Call Routing Mailbox. To allow this ability, for
example:
Program the Next Call Routing Mailbox # digit as LOGON to IXXX.
While listening to their greeting, the subscriber can dial:
# (to route to their Next Call Routing Mailbox), then
# and their mailbox number to log on to their mailbox.
By default, this option is provided in Call Routing Mailbox 1. Additionally, the
subscriber should enable a Security Code for their mailbox to prevent unauthorized
logons.
Announcement Mailbox Options
The following charts show how an Announcement Mailbox handles Automated
Attendant calls.
The first chart explains what happens when the outside call is directly answered by the
Announcement Mailbox. This happens when the Answer Table uses an Announcement
Mailbox for routing instead of a Call Routing Mailbox.
The second chart explains what happens when the outside call is answered by a Call
Routing Mailbox and then routed to the Announcement Mailbox. This can happen, for
example, when a caller dials a digit to hear an announcement of company directions.

InMail System Guide
For more information, see Answer Table on page 2-27.
2 - 277
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing
(If the outside caller routes directly to the Announcement Mailbox)
47-09-01 Next
Call
Routing
Mailbox
47-09-02
Repeat
Count
Undefined
0 (No repeats)
47-09-03
Hang Up
After
o If the caller doesn’t dial, after the
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
1~32 (valid
Call Routing
Mailbox)
0 (No repeats)
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
x (x number of
repeats)
x (x number of
repeats)
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, VM8000 InMail says
“That is an invalid entry” and hangs up.
announcement they route to the Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, they route to the Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
o If the caller doesn’t dial, after the
announcement VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, they route to the Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
o If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
1~32 (valid
Call Routing
Mailbox)
announcement VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If the caller doesn’t dial, after the
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
Undefined
Action
announcement x number of times and
then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, VM8000 InMail says
“That is an invalid entry” and aborts the
announcement. The announcement
repeats (if allowed by the Repeat Count)
and then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
announcement x number of times and
then route to the Next Call Routing
Mailbox.
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, they route to the Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
o If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
announcement x number of times and
then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, they route to the Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
2 - 278
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing
(If outside caller routes to Announcement Mailbox from Call Routing Mailbox)
47-09-01
Next Call
Routing
Mailbox
47-09-02
Repeat
Count
Undefined
0 (No repeats)
47-09-03
Hang Up
After
Action
o If the caller doesn’t dial, after the
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
announcement the caller goes back to
the initial Call Routing Mailbox.
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, VM8000 InMail says
“That is an invalid entry” and routes the
caller goes back to the initial Call Routing
Mailbox.
o If the caller doesn’t dial, after the
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
1~32 (valid
Call Routing
Mailbox)
0 (No repeats)
announcement VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, VM8000 InMail says
“That is an invalid entry” and hangs up.
o If the caller doesn’t dial, after the
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
announcement they route to the Next Call
Routing Mailbox.
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, they route to the Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
o If the caller doesn’t dial, after the
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
Undefined
x (x number of
repeats)
announcement VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, they route to the Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
o If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the
announcement x number of times and
then go back to the initial Call Routing
Mailbox.
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, VM8000 InMail says
“That is an invalid entry” and aborts the
announcement. The announcement
repeats (if allowed by the Repeat Count)
and then VM8000 InMail routes back to
the initial Call Routing Mailbox.
o If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the
announcement x number of times and
then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
InMail System Guide
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, VM8000 InMail says
“That is an invalid entry” and aborts the
announcement. The announcement
repeats (if allowed by the Repeat Count)
and then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
2 - 279
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing (Continued)
(If outside caller routes to Announcement Mailbox from Call Routing Mailbox)
47-09-01
Next Call
Routing
Mailbox
1~32 (valid
Call Routing
Mailbox)
47-09-02
Repeat
Count
x (x number of
repeats)
47-09-03
Hang Up
After
Action
o If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
announcement x number of times and
then route to the Next Call Routing
Mailbox.
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, they route to the Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
o If caller doesn’t dial, they hear the
0 = None
1 = Goodbye
2 = Silent
announcement x number of times and
then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
o If the caller dials a digit during the
announcement, they route to the Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Related Features
Call Forward to a Mailbox
The Next Call Routing Mailbox dial options also apply to a subscriber’s Direct Inward Line
while it is forwarded to their mailbox.
Record and Send a Message
Turn to this feature for an explanation of the options a caller can dial while recording.
Programming
Programming Subscriber Mailboxes
1.
Assign the Next Call Routing Mailbox to a Subscriber Mailbox (if required).

47-02-14
Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox)
Specify the Routing Mailbox (1~32) that should provide the caller leaving a
message with additional dialing options.

2.
2 - 280
By default, this option is 1 (Call Routing Mailbox 1). Call Routing Mailbox
numbers are 1~8.
Optionally allow the caller to dial additional digits (not just 0) once in the Next
Call Routing Mailbox.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-02-13
Dialing Option
Enter 1 to enable additional dialing options.

By default, this option is disabled (0).
Programming Announcement Mailboxes
1.
Assign the Next Call Routing Mailbox for the Announcement Mailbox (if
required).

47-09-01
Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox)
Specify the Routing Mailbox (1~32) to which the caller should route after
hearing the Announcement Mailbox message.

By default, this option is 0 (Undefined).
2.
Enter the number of times the Announcement Mailbox message should repeat
before routing to the Next Call Routing Mailbox.

47-09-02
Repeat Count
Specify the number of Announcement Mailbox message repeats (1~10, or 0
for no repeats).

By default, this option is 0 (no repeats).
3.
Be sure the Announcement Mailbox does not hang up after playing its message.

47-09-03
Hang Up After (HangUp)
Enter 0 (None) to disable this option.

By default, this option is disabled (0).
Operation
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 281
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 282
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Park and Page
Description
VM8000 InMail Park and Page can automatically Park a call at an extension and
Page the user with a recorded Paging Message announcing the parked call. The
called extension user can then go to any telephone and implement Personal Park to
pick up the call. With VM8000 InMail Park and Page, InMail tries to locate the person
instead of just sending the call to their mailbox. Additionally, there is no need for an
operator or receptionist to manually answer the call, park it, and then try to track down
the employee.
The Paging Message is usually recorded in the user’s own voice and typically says
something like, “Mike Smart, you have a call.” If the Paging Message is not recorded
for the extension, a built-in message announces the called party’s name or extension
number (if the name is not recorded).
VM8000 InMail Park and Page is available for all trunk calls that are redirected to
voice mail via forwarding or overflow, including transferred calls, Direct Inward Lines,
and Direct Inward Dialing. Park and Page is also available for Automated Attendant
Screened (STRF) and Unscreened (UTRF) Transfers. Optionally, an extension can
have calls from the Automated Attendant immediately Park and Page without trying
their extension first.
When VM8000 InMail Park and Page intercepts the call, it normally offers the caller
three options:
1.
Dial 1 to leave a message in the called extension’s mailbox.
(The caller hears the mailbox Greeting, if recorded.)
2.
Dial 2 to Park and Page.
(The caller returns to these options if the Park is not picked up.)
3.
Dial 3 for Find Me Follow Me if enabled.
(The caller returns to these options if the none of the destinations choose to take
the call.)
4.
Dial 4 for other options.
(Normally, this routes to the extension’s Next Call Routing Mailbox.)
VM8000 InMail Park and Page is available at Personal and Group Subscriber
Mailboxes, and can be enabled through system programming or via the subscriber’s
Mailbox Options Menu. VM8000 InMail Park and Page is not applicable to Intercom
calls.
InMail System Guide
2 - 283
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail (DVM)
When an extension has Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail (DVM) enabled, all
calls from the Automated Attendant go directly to the subscriber’s mailbox. The
extension does not ring for Automated Attendant calls. The caller hears the mailbox
greeting and can leave a message, but unlike Park and Page is not normally offered
any other routing options. A subscriber typically turns on DVM when they need to
work at their desk undisturbed by outside calls from the Automated Attendant.
DVM can be enabled by the installer from system programming or by the extension
user from their Mailbox Options Menu.
Keep in mind that DVM does not block Intercom calls from co-workers or any other
outside call not routed through the Automated Attendant. For example, with DVM
enabled, Direct Inward Lines and transferred outside calls to an extension work
normally.
Conditions

This feature requires Version 1100 or higher.

The Park and Page feature uses the extensions personal park location
only.

Enabling Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail (DVM) for a mailbox
bypasses the Park and Page feature.

The Park and Page feature uses the All Zone paging only; this cannot be
changed or configured.
Default Setting
Park and Page and Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail are disabled.
For transferred outside calls, direct inward lines and direct inward dialing refer
to Table 2-6 Park and Page Call Handling.
Table 2-6 Park and Page Call Handling
Park and Page (Call Handling)
For Transferred Outside Calls, Direct Inward Line and Direct Inward Dialing
47-02-14: Next Call
Routing Mailbox
47-02-13: Dialing
Option
47-02-17: Enable
Park and Page
Undefined
0 (No)
0 (No)
If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can leave a
message.
Undefined
0 (No)
1 (Yes)
If unanswered, caller can dial 1 to leave a message
or 2 to Park and Page.
2 - 284
Result
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Table 2-6 Park and Page Call Handling (Continued)
Park and Page (Call Handling)
For Transferred Outside Calls, Direct Inward Line and Direct Inward Dialing
47-02-14: Next Call
Routing Mailbox
47-02-13: Dialing
Option
47-02-17: Enable
Park and Page
Undefined
1 (Yes)
0 (No)
If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can leave a
message.
Undefined
1 (Yes)
1 (Yes)
If unanswered, caller can dial 1 to leave a message
or 2 to Park and Page.
Defined
0 (No)
0 (No)
If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can leave a
message.
Defined
0 (No)
1 (Yes)
If unanswered, caller can dial 1 to leave a message,
2 to Park and Page, and 3 for other options (from
the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Defined
1 (Yes)
0 (No)
If unanswered, caller hears greeting, can leave a
message, and dial options (from the Next Call Routing
Mailbox).
Defined
1 (Yes)
1 (Yes)
If unanswered, caller can dial 1 to leave a message,
2 to Park and Page, and 3 for other options (from
the Next Call Routing Mailbox.
Result
For automated attendant unscreened (UTRF) and screened (STRF) transfers
refer to Table 2-7 Park and Page Call Handling.
Table 2-7 Park and Page Call Handling
Park and Page (Call Handling)
For Automated Attendant Unscreened (UTRF) and Screened (STRF) Transfers
47-02-17: Enable
Park and Page
47-02-18: Paging
Option
47-02-09: Auto
Att Direct to VM
0 (No)
0 (RNA)
0 (No)
If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can leave a
message. 1
0 (No)
0 (RNA)
1 (Yes)
Caller immediately hears greeting and can leave a
message.
0 (No)
1 (IMM)
0 (No)
If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can leave a
message. 1
0 (No)
1 (IMM)
1 (Yes)
Caller immediately hears greeting and can leave a
message.
1 (Yes)
0 (RNA)
0 (No)
STRF: If unanswered, caller hears greeting and can
leave a message. 1
Result
UTRF: If unanswered, caller can dial 1 to leave a
message or 2 to Park and Page.2
InMail System Guide
2 - 285
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Table 2-7 Park and Page Call Handling (Continued)
Park and Page (Call Handling)
For Automated Attendant Unscreened (UTRF) and Screened (STRF) Transfers
47-02-17: Enable
Park and Page
47-02-18: Paging
Option
47-02-09: Auto
Att Direct to VM
1 (Yes)
0 (RNA)
1 (Yes)
Caller immediately hears greeting and can leave a
message.
1 (Yes)
1 (IMM)
0 (No)
Park and Page occurs immediately.
1 (Yes)
1 (IMM)
1 (Yes)
Caller immediately hears greeting and can leave a
message.
Result
1For
a Screened Transfer (STRF) with a Next Call Routing Mailbox assigned, caller can dial 1 to leave a message or 2 for
other options.
2
For an Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) with a Next Call Routing Mailbox assigned, caller can dial 1 to leave a message, 2 to
Park and Page, and 3 for other options.
System Availability
Terminals
All Terminals
Required Component(s)
CD-CP00-US with PZ-VM21 Daughter Board, VM8000 InMail CompactFlash
and CPU License for VRS
Related Features
Park
Paging, Internal
2 - 286
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Guide to Feature Programming
The Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 columns indicate the programs that are assigned
when programming this feature in the order they are most commonly used. These
levels are used with PCPro and WebPro wizards for feature programming.

Level 1 – these are the most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 2 – these are the next most commonly assigned programs for this feature.

Level 3 – these programs are not often assigned and require an expert level
working knowledge of the system to be properly assigned.
Setting Up Park and Page for Extension:
Program
Number
24-02-04
47-02-09
47-02-14
47-02-17
47-02-18
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Transfer Recall Time
An unanswered, transferred call
recalls to the extension that
initially transferred it after this time.
0 ~64800 (sec)
Enable/Disable Auto Attendant
Direct to Voice Mail. When a
subscriber enables this option, an
Automated Attendant caller routes
directly to the mailbox. For
Subscriber Mailboxes you should
enable this option. For Guest
Mailboxes you should disable this
option.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
Assign a Next Call Routing
Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox.
This provides callers with
additional dialing options while
listening to a subscriber Mailbox
recording or default greeting. The
digits the caller can dial depend on
the setting of the Next Call Routing
Mailbox and Alternate Next Call
Routing Mailbox options.
1 ~ 32
(default = 1)
By default Call Routing
Mailboxes numbers are
01~08.
VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox
Options – Enable Paging
Enable the paging option for the
appropriate mailbox. This call can
also be changed via telephone in
the extension's mailbox options.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
(default = 0)

VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox
Options – Paging Option
Determine if calls from auto
attendant ring the phone first or go
directly to the Park and Page
feature options. This setting can
be overridden by Program
47-02-09.
0 = RNA (Ring No
Answer)
1 = Immediately
(default = 0)

VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox
Options – Auto Attendant Direct
to Voice Mail
VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox
Options – Next Call Routing
Mailbox
InMail System Guide
2
3

Default = 30


2 - 287
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Setting Up Park and Page for a Group Mailbox:
Program
Number
47-06-07
47-06-12
47-06-15
47-06-16
2 - 288
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
Group Mailbox Subscriber
Options – Auto Attendant Direct
to Voice Mail
Enable/Disable Auto Attendant
Direct to VM. When enabled, an
Auto Attendant caller routes
directly to the mailbox, hears the
greeting, and is asked to leave a
message. A subscriber can enable
this option while recording their
mailbox greeting.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
(default = 0)
Assign a Next Call Routing
Mailbox to the Subscriber Mailbox.
This provides additional dialing
option while listening to a
Subscribe Mailbox recording or
default greeting. The digits the
caller can dial depends on the
setting of the Next Call Routing
Mailbox or alternate Next Call
Routing Mailbox options.
1 ~ 32
(default = 1)
By default, Call
Routing Mailbox
numbers ar 01~16.
Group Mailbox Subscriber
Options – Enable Paging
Enable the paging option for the
appropriate Group Mailbox. This
call can be changed via telephone
in the extension mailbox options.
0 = Disable (No)
1 = Enable (Yes)
(default = 0)

Group Mailbox Subscriber
Options – Paging Option
Determine if calls from auto
attendant ring the Group first or go
directly to the Park and Page
feature options. This setting can
be overridden by Program
47-06-07.
0 = RNA (Ring No
Answer)
1 = Immediate
(default = 0)

Group Mailbox Subscriber
Options – Next Call Routing
Mailbox
2
3


Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Operation
To record your paging message refer to Table 2-8 Recording Your Paging
Message.
Table 2-8 Recording Your Paging Message
Recording Your Paging Message
In these Instructions:
[Telephone Softkey]
To record your Paging Message:
1.
Log onto your Subscriber Mailbox.
2.
[More> + More> + Page]
Select Paging Message.

3.
Alternately dial PG (74).
Do one of the following:
a.
[Lstn]
Select to listen to the current Paging Message (if any).

Alternately dial L (5).
#
b.
[Rec]
Exit the listen mode.
Select to record the Paging Message.

Alternately dial R (7).
[Pause]
Select to pause recording.

[Resume]
Select to resume recording (if paused).

[Cncl]
[Del]
[Back]
Alternately dial E (3).
Select to go back to the Mailbox Main Menu.

InMail System Guide
Alternately dial #.
Select to delete the Paging Message.

d.
Alternately dial E (3).
Select to confirm the recording and exit the recording mode.

c.
Alternately dial .
Select to delete the recording.

[Done]
Alternately dial .
Alternately dial #.
2 - 289
Issue 8.0
VM8000
To set your call handling options refer to Table 2-9 Setting the Call Handling
Options.
Table 2-9 Setting the Call Handling Options
Setting the Call Handling Options
In these Instructions:
[Telephone Softkey]
To set your Call Handling options:
 This includes Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail as well as Park and Page.
1.
Log onto your Subscriber Mailbox.
2.
[More> + Setup]
Select Mailbox Options. (You are at the Mailbox Options Menu).

Select Call Options. (You are at the Call Handling Options Menu).
[CallH]

3.
Alternately dial OP (67).
Alternately dial CO (26).
Do one of the following:
a.
[DVM]
Select to turn Automated Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on or off.

[Paging]
Alternately dial O (6).
Select to turn Park and Page on or off.
Alternately dial E (3).
[Back]
Select to go back to the Mailbox Options Menu.
To retrieve a call parked in a personal parked orbit refer to Table 2-10 Picking
Up a Parked Call.
Table 2-10 Picking Up a Parked Call
Picking Up a Parked Call
In these Instructions:
[Telephone Softkey]
To retrieve a call parked in a Personal Orbit:
1.
Dial .
2.
Dial the number of the extension at which the call is parked.
2 - 290
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Programming Voice Mail
Description
You can program (customize) VM8000 InMail using the PCPro and WebPro
programming applications. You can also do limited programming from the System
Administrator’s mailbox. Check with NTAC for availability of updated versions of
these programs for SV8100.
Figure 2-9 PCPro and WebPro Login Screens
InMail System Guide
2 - 291
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Related Features
System Administrator
The System Administrator can do limited VM8000 InMail programming, such as recording
Automated Attendant announcements, recording mailbox names, and deleting messages
from mailboxes.
Programming
See Description on page 2-291 at the beginning of this feature.
Operation
See Description on page 2-291 at the beginning of this feature.
2 - 292
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Quick Message
Description
Quick Message is a Dial Action Table action that allows Automated Attendant callers
to dial a digit (normally ) followed by a mailbox number to leave a message in a
Subscriber Mailbox. Since Quick Message is enabled by default, it is an efficient way
for experienced Automated Attendant callers to leave messages. There is no need to
dial an extension first. To make this option more readily available to all Automated
Attendant callers, consider having the active Instruction Menu describe how to use
the Quick Message option.
There are two Quick Message Dial Action Table actions:

Quick Message with Greeting (REC1)
The caller hears the mailbox greeting followed by a beep and can leave
message. If the greeting is not recorded, the caller hears, “At the tone, you can
leave your message for extension xxx (or name if recorded). Start recording at
the tone. When you are done, press the # key or hang up.”

Quick Message without Greeting (REC2)
The caller bypasses the mailbox greeting (hearing “Recording” and a beep
instead) and can leave a message. This is typically used with a Next Call
Routing Mailbox when the caller is asked to dial a digit (e.g., 1) to leave a
message. Otherwise, the mailbox greeting (if recorded) is heard again.
Related Features
Dial Action Table
After the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table provides the dialing options
to callers. Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action (function) in the Dial
Action Table. The dial action used depends on the setting in the active Call Routing
Mailbox, which in turn depends on the Answer Table setup.
Next Call Routing Mailbox
The Quick Message without Greeting option (REC2) is typically used when the Next Call
Routing Mailbox option allows the caller to dial a digit to leave a message. Otherwise, the
caller hears the mailbox greeting twice (once when initially accessing the mailbox and
again when routed by the Next Call Routing Mailbox).
InMail System Guide
2 - 293
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming
1.
Optionally set up a Quick Message with Greeting (REC1) Action.

47-13-01
Dial Action Tables: REC1 Action – Quick Message With Greeting (3)
(REC1)
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a specific extension, the
corresponding Number option should be the extension number.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension,
the corresponding Number option should be IXXX.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a
specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX.

For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions
101~199, for key 3 enter REC1 for the Action and XXX for the
corresponding Number.

By default, key 3 Action is REC1 and Number is IXXX.
2.
Optionally set up a Quick Message without Greeting (REC2) Action.

47-13-01
Dial Action Tables: REC2 Action – Quick Message Without Greeting
(4) (REC2)
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a specific extension, the
corresponding Number option should be the extension number.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension,
the corresponding Number option should be IXXX.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a
specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX.

For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions
101~199, for key 3 enter REC2 for the Action and XXX for the
corresponding Number.

By default, key 3 Action is REC1 and Number is IXXX.
3.
Set the maximum message length for callers leaving a Quick Message in a
mailbox.

47-01-04
Non-Subscriber Message Length (Mbox Msg Length)
Set the maximum length (1~4095 seconds) of recorded messages for:

Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in a
Subscriber Mailbox.

Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber Mailbox.

2 - 294
By default, this option is 120 seconds.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Operation
Leaving a Quick Message
To leave a Quick Message after the Automated Attendant answers:
1. Dial *.
2. Dial the Subscriber Mailbox number.
3. Leave message and hang up.
- OR Leave message and dial #.
o Dialing # may provide you with additional dialing options. This depends on how the
called mailbox Next Call Routing Mailbox is set up.
InMail System Guide
2 - 295
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 296
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Record and Send a Message
Description
A Subscriber Mailbox user can record and send a message to any other Subscriber
Mailbox. Record and Send a Message is the heart of the VM8000 InMail voice
messaging system. It allows coworkers to efficiently stay in touch and exchange
essential information without relying on message slips, memos, or email.
Recording Options
While recording a message, a Subscriber Mailbox user has many recording options from
which to choose. The following table shows these options.
Message Recording Options
Option
Description
Options available while recording:
*
D (3)
#
Pause/resume recording.
Delete the recording.
End recording.
Dial 0 while recording to hear the list of options.
Related Features
Listening to Messages
While or after listening to a message, an extension user has many message handling
options from which to choose.
Programming
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 297
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Record and Send a Message
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
RS
(77)
Record and send a message.
[Rec]
Enter the number of the mailbox to receive the message.
Start recording.
[Contd]
#
Options available while recording.
*
[Exit]
#
2 - 298
*
Pause or restart recording.
[Resume]
[Pause]
D (3)
Delete recording.
[Cncl]
#
End the recording.
[Done]
Back up and re-enter the mailbox number.
[MBOX]
Exit without recording and go back to the Mailbox Main Menu.
Exit without recording and go back to the Mailbox Main Menu.
[Exit]
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Remote Programming
Description
You can remotely program (customize) VM8000 InMail using the PCPro and WebPro
programming applications. You can also do limited remote programming from the
System Administrator’s mailbox. Check with NTAC for availability of updated versions
of these programs for SV8100. Refer to VM8000 system documentation for more
information.
Related Features
None
Programming
None
Operation
None
InMail System Guide
2 - 299
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 300
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Routing Mailbox
Description
The Call Routing Mailbox, associated with an Answer Table, specifies which dialing
options (Dial Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant
callers. By default, VM8000 InMail provides 32 Call Routing Mailboxes (1~32).
However, you can assign any Routing Mailboxes as a Call Routing Mailbox. The Call
Routing Mailbox is an integral part of the Automated Attendant. The Automated
Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system incoming calls, play an
Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers. There are three
major Automated Attendant components:

Answer Table
The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside
calls on each trunk, according to the time of the day and day of the week that
the call is ringing. The Answer Table divides the time of day and day of the week
into individual schedules, which in turn assign a Call Routing Mailbox to each
call. When a specific schedule is not in effect, the Answer Table uses its Default
Mailbox to determine routing.


By default, all trunks use Answer Table 1. Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs
Monday through Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
Routing Mailbox
A Call Routing Mailbox is a mailbox associated with an individual Answer Table
schedule or the Default Mailbox. It specifies which dialing options (Dial Action
Table) are available to callers. It also provides the Instruction Menu to callers
which typically greets the callers and describes the dialing options.


By default, Answer Table 1 has a single schedule that runs Monday through Friday from
8:30AM to 5:00PM. This schedule and the Default Mailbox both use Call Routing
Mailbox 531.
Dial Action Table
After the Automated Attendant answers, the Dial Action Table provides the
dialing options to callers. Each digit a caller can dial is assigned a specific action
(function) in the Dial Action Table. The dial action used depends on the setting
in the active Call Routing Mailbox, which in turn depends on the Answer Table
setup.

InMail System Guide
By default, Call Routing Mailbox 1 uses Dial Action Table 1.
2 - 301
Issue 8.0
VM8000
The block diagram below shows the default VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant
configuration.
DIL to Voice Mail Master (200)
22-01-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup
22-07-01 DIL Setup
InMail
Default
Automated Attendant Answering
Trunks Route to Answer Table 1
47-10-01 Answer Table Assignment
Answer Table 1
47-11 Answer Table Options
Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox
47-12 Answer Schedules
47-11-03 Default Mailbox
Call Routing Mailbox 1
47-08 Call Routing Mailbox Options
Dial Action Table 1
47-13 Dial Action Tables
2 - 302
All calls route to Call Routing Mailbox 1
Schedule 1 active M-F 8:30AM-5:00PM
Default Mailbox active all other times
From a System Administrator mailbox,
record an Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options:
Dial an extension number, or
O for the operator.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Related Features
Answer Table
The Call Routing Mailbox associates specific dialing options (Dial Action Table) with an
Answer Table.
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant can automatically answer the telephone system’s incoming
calls, play an Instruction Menu message, and provide dialing options to callers.
Routing Mailbox
The Call Routing Mailbox provides the dialing instructions (Dial Action Table) and
announcements to Automated Attendant Callers.
Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer
Table.
System Administrator
The System Administrator can record the Instruction Menu for a Call Routing Mailbox. See
Operation on page 2-305.
Programming
1.
Set up the Call Routing Mailbox.

47-07-02
Routing Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type)
Enter 1 to assign the mailbox as a Call Routing Mailbox.

2.
By default, Routing Mailboxes 1-8 are Call Routing Mailboxes and 9-32 are
Announcement Mailboxes.
Record an Instruction Menu for the Call Routing Mailbox:
See Operation on page 2-305.

The default Instruction Menu is: “If you are calling from a touch tone phone...”
3.
Assign Dial Action Table to provide dialing options for this Call routing Mailbox:

47-08-01
Dial Action Table
Enter the Dial Action Table (e.g., 1) that provides the dialing options.

4.
Change the amount of time Automated Attendant callers have to dial options:

InMail System Guide
By default, all Call Routing Mailboxes use Dial Action Table 1.
See Automated Attendant on page 2-47 for more.
2 - 303
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-08-03
Time Limit for Dialing Commands (Dialing Timeout)
Enter the new timeout duration (0-99 seconds).

By default, Automated Attendant callers have 5 seconds to dial commands.
When the timeout duration is exceeded or is not programmed, the following
actions occur:

When a Timeout action is programmed, the call routes to that destination.

When a Timeout action is not programmed, the Instruction Menu repeats 3
times and then VM8000 InMail hangs up.
5.
Set the Maximum Length of Instruction Menus:

47-01-03
Subscriber Message Length (Subs Msg Length)
This sets the maximum message length (1-4095 seconds) for Instruction
Menus.

2 - 304
The default setting is 120 seconds.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Operation
Recording an Instruction Menu for a Call Routing Mailbox
Log On to System Administrator’s mailbox.
SA (72)
Access System Administrator options.
[Not applicable.]
I (4)
Select Instruction Menus.
[Instr]
Enter the Call Routing Mailbox number (001~008).
L (5)
Listen to the current Instruction Menu (if any).
[Lstn]
#
R (7)
Exit listen mode.
Record a new Instruction Menu.
[Rec]
Record message.
#
0
InMail System Guide
*
Pause or restart recording.
[Resume]
[Pause]
D (3)
Delete recording.
[Cncl]
#
Exit recording mode.
[Done]
D (3)
Delete the Instruction Menu.
[Del]
#
Go back to the System Administrator options.
[Exit]
Go back to the System Administrator options.
[Exit]
Plays Help message.
2 - 305
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 306
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Screened Transfer
Description
Screened Transfer is an Automated Attendant option that allows callers to directly dial
system extensions. Screened Transfer (and its related feature Unscreened Transfer)
allows the VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant to transfer outside calls to system
extensions without the need for a live receptionist or operator. It is similar to telephone
system screened transfers in which the transferring party controls the transfer. After
an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000 InMail calls (screens) the
destination extension to see if the transfer can go through.

If the destination is busy or in DND, the Automated Attendant doesn’t extend the
call and immediately provides the caller with additional options.

If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination
answers, the call goes through. If the destination doesn’t answer within a preset
interval, the Automated Attendant does not extend the call and provides the
caller with additional options.
Screened vs. Unscreened Transfer
Both Screened and Unscreened Transfer allow Automated Attendant callers to
directly dial system extensions. The following summarizes the differences between
these two types of Automated Attendant transfer.

When set for Unscreened Transfer, calls from the InMail ring at the extension
like other transferred calls and display the incoming Caller ID data (if provided
by Telco and enabled in programming) while the phone is ringing.

When set for Screened Transfers, calls from the InMail ring like Intercom calls but do not
display incoming Caller ID data (if provided by Telco and enabled in programming) until
after the call is answered.

Both Screened and Unscreened Transfers route unanswered calls to the
subscriber’s greeting (recorded or default) so the caller can leave a message.
However, only Screened Transfer allows the caller to dial 2 to reach the Next
Call Routing Mailbox options (if programmed).
Screened Transfer and Inactive Mailboxes
Screened Transfer to an extension can occur only if the destination extension has an
active mailbox. If the extension’s mailbox is inactive, the Automated Attendant caller
hears: “That is an invalid entry,” and returns to the Automated Attendant.
InMail System Guide
2 - 307
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Screened Transfer (TRF) Operation
Call = Call answered by the Automated Attendant.
Extension = Extension dialed by Automated Attendant caller.
If Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail is off, see Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on page 2-41 for more
information.
Extension Idle
With Active
Greeting
Recorded
1. Places a screened
(Intercom) call to extension.
o If answered, transfers call.
1
2. If unanswered :
o With no Next Call Routing
Mailbox, caller hears
greeting and can leave a
message.
o With a Next Call Routing
Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to
leave a message or 22 for
other options.
With Active
Greeting Not
Recorded
1. Places a screened
(Intercom) call to extension.
o If answered, transfers call.
2. If unanswered1:
o With no Next Call Routing
Mailbox, VM8000 InMail
prompts caller to leave a
message.
o With a Next Call Routing
Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to
leave a message or 22 for
other options.
Extension Busy
Extension in DND
When busy:
When in DND:
o With no Next Call Routing
o With no Next Call Routing
Mailbox, caller hears
greeting and can leave a
message.
o With a Next Call Routing
Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to
leave a message or 22 for
other options.
Mailbox, caller hears
greeting and can leave a
message.
o With a Next Call Routing
Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to
leave a message or 22 for
other options.
When busy:
When in DND:
o With no Next Call Routing
o With no Next Call Routing
Mailbox, VM8000 InMail
prompts caller to leave a
message.
o With a Next Call Routing
Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to
leave a message or 22 for
other options.
Mailbox, caller hears
greeting and can leave a
message.
o With a Next Call Routing
Mailbox, caller can dial 1 to
leave a message or 22 for
other options.
If Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail is on, see Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on page 2-41 for more
information.
Extension Idle
With Active
Greeting
Recorded or not
recorded
Extension Busy
Extension in DND
1. Sends call immediately to mailbox:
o Plays greeting.
o Prompts caller to start recording.
1
After 47-08-02 Screened Transfer Timeout interval.
Dialing 2 routes the call to the Next Call Routing Mailbox for additional dialing options. See Next Call Routing
Mailbox on page 2-275.
2
2 - 308
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Related Features
Answer Table
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each trunk.
Automated Attendant
The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Routing Mailbox
The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial
Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
You cannot program a Call Routing Mailbox as a Screened Transfer (TRF) Dial Action
Table destination.
Caller ID
VM8000 InMail provides Caller ID data for a Screened Transfer call after it is answered.
Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer
Table.
Forced Unscreened Transfer
The Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers
to Unscreened Transfers.
Unscreened Transfer
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000 InMail immediately
transfers the call to the destination and hangs up.
Programming
1.
Assign the TRF action to a key on the active Dial Action Table.

47-13-01
Dial Action Tables: TRF Action – Screened Transfer (1) (TRF)
Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note the key
you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension.

InMail System Guide
For example, to allow callers to place Screened Transfers to extensions
101~199, for key 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the
corresponding Number.
2 - 309
Issue 8.0
VM8000
To have Screened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding
Number option should be that extension number. The caller then dials that
single digit to reach the extension.

For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8 enter
TRF for the Action and 303 for the corresponding Number.

By default, key 1 Action is UTRF and Number is XXX. This means that Automated
Attendant callers can place Unscreened Transfers to extensions 101~199.
2.
Set how long a Screened Transfer rings an unanswered extension before
recalling to the Automated Attendant.

47-08-02
Screened Transfer Timeout (Scrn Trf Timeout)
Set how long a Screened Transfer (TRF) from the Automated Attendant
rings (0~255 seconds) an unanswered extension before recalling.
Be sure that the 24-02-04 Transfer Recall Time is longer than the setting of
this option. If the Transfer Recall is shorter, Screened Transfers recalls the
same as Unscreened Transfers.

By default, this option is 15 seconds.
Operation
Not applicable
2 - 310
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Security Code
Description
A mailbox can have a security code to protect it from unauthorized access. A Security
Code must have 4 digits, using 0~9. If a subscriber wants to keep their mailbox
private, they can enter a Security Code. No one else can use the subscriber's
mailbox, unless they know the code.
Starting with v4.00 software, after a subscriber sets their Security Code, they can
choose to make it required for all logons or just remote logons. When enabled for all
logons the subscriber must always enter their Security Code to access voice mail,
even from their own extension. If enabled just for remote logons, the subscriber can
go right into voice mail from their own telephone. However, the Security Code is still
required from another extension or from outside the system.
The Security Code logon option is a convenience for those who normally leave their
office locked or otherwise secure. Those who work in open areas should normally set
their mailbox to always require a Security Code.
Service Conditions:

Main Software is version 4.00 or greater is required to support the new Security
Code settings.

The new Security Code setting require the SV8100 R4 Enhancement license
(0033).

The InMail language prompts installed on the CF must be version 2.10 or
greater. The VM8000 InMail Utility is used to update the installed language
prompts.

Security Code settings can be changed using the Telephone Mailbox Option
Interface or via End User Web Pro.
Related Features
System Administrator
The System Administrator can delete a mailbox security code.
InMail System Guide
2 - 311
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming
Not applicable
Program
Number
47-02-25
Level
Program Name
Description/Comments
Assigned Data
1
InMail Station Mailbox Options Security Code Option
0 = Always
1 = Remote Logon only
2
3

Default = 0
47-06-23
InMail Group Mailbox Options Security Code Option
0 = Always
1 = Remote Logon only

Default = 0
2 - 312
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Operation
Changing or Deleting a Security Code (From your Subscriber Mailbox)
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
OP
(67)
Access the Mailbox Options Menu.
[Not applicable]
S (7)
Access the Security Code options.
[Sec]
Enter new Security Code (4 digits).
C (2)
Accept Security Code entry and go back to the
Mailbox Options Menu.
[OK]
I (4)
Do not accept Security Code entry and go back to the
Security Code options Menu.
[Clear]
N (6)
Accept security code and require security code entry
for remote log only.
R (7)
Accept security code and require security code entry
for both internal and remote log on.
[Exit]
0
Exit to the Mailbox Options menu without
changing your Security Code.
*
Optionally delete your Security Code and go back to the
Mailbox Options Menu.
[Del]
#
Exit to the Mailbox Options Menu without making any changes
to your Security Code.
[Exit]
Plays Help message
Deleting a Security Code (From your System Administrator’s Mailbox)
Log On to System Administrator’s mailbox.
SA
(72)
Access System Administrator options.
[Not applicable]
S (7)
Select Subscriber Mailbox Maintenance options.
[Subs]
Enter the number of the Subscriber Mailbox you want to maintain.
0
InMail System Guide
*
Delete mailbox Security Code.
[Del]
#
Go back to System Administrator options.
[Exit]
Plays Help message.
2 - 313
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 314
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Single Digit Dialing
Description
An Automated Attendant caller can press a single key to route to an extension, route
to another destination, or use an VM8000 InMail feature. Single Digit Dialing
simplifies the Automated Attendant since the caller dials a single digit to reach an
extension or use an option. If you set up Single Digit Dialing, be sure to customize the
active Instruction Menu so it describes which digits the caller should dial to use the
available options.
All of the features in the following Dial Action Table Key Action Summary table are
accessible from a single Dial Action Table digit.
Dial Action Table Key Action Summary
Feature
Reference
Action
Description
Screened Transfer
on page 2-307
TRF
Screened Transfer (1)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place a
Screened Transfer to an extension. VM8000 InMail calls
(screens) the destination to see if the call can go
through.
UTRF
Unscreened Transfer (2)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to place an
Unscreened Transfer to an extension.VM8000 InMail
transfers the call the destination and then hangs up.
Unscreened
Transfer on page
2-337
REC1
Quick Message with Greeting (3)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick
Message at an extension. The caller hears the extension
personal greeting.
Quick Message on
page 2-293
REC2
Quick Message without Greeting (4)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick
Message at an extension. The caller does not hear the
extension personal greeting.
Quick Message on
page 2-293
LOGON
Log On to Voice Mail (5)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to log on to a
mailbox, either directly or one of their choosing.
Log On to Voice
Mail on page
2-221
Hang Up
Hang Up (6)
VM8000 InMail says “Goodbye” and hangs up.
Hang Up on page
2-181
Go to a Mailbox, (7)
Allows an Automated Attendant caller to route to another
mailbox.
Go To A Mailbox
on page 2-161
Undefined Routing (0)
This action provides no routing.
Not applicable
GOTO
UND
InMail System Guide
2 - 315
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Related Features
Instruction Menu
The active Instruction Menu should describe the Single Digit Dialing options.
Also refer to Dial Action Table Key Action Summary on page 2-315.
Programming
Refer to Dial Action Table Key Action Summary on page 2-315.
Operation
Refer to Dial Action Table Key Action Summary.
2 - 316
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Station Mailbox
Description
Station Mailbox is one of three mailbox categories: Personal, Group and Undefined.
Personal Mailbox is the category of mailboxes assigned to stations (extensions). All
Personal Mailboxes are Subscriber Mailboxes.
For more on the options available to Station Mailboxes, see Subscriber Mailbox on
page 2-319.
Related Features
Group (Shared) Mailbox
Group Mailbox is a category of mailboxes normally used for Department Group overflow.
Programming
See Subscriber Mailbox on page 2-319.
Operation
See Subscriber Mailbox on page 2-319.
InMail System Guide
2 - 317
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 318
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Subscriber Mailbox
Description
A Subscriber Mailbox is the mailbox assigned to a telephone system extension. The
telephone assigned to the Subscriber Mailbox is called the subscriber’s extension.
When an extension user accesses their voice mail, they are using their Subscriber
Mailbox. It provides the VM8000 InMail voice messaging services. For a brief
overview of the features available at a Subscriber Mailbox, review the Related
Features below. Then, go to the individual feature to find out how it operates and what
programming is required to make it work.
At system startup, VM8000 InMail automatically assigns a Subscriber Mailbox to
extensions 101~108. All other extensions do not have Subscriber Mailboxes
automatically assigned. Refer to Programming on page 2-321.
Related Features
Automated Attendant
The Automated Attendant can route callers to a Subscriber Mailbox.
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail sends Automated Attendant calls directly to a
subscriber’s mailbox. Their phone does not ring for calls from the Automated Attendant.
Auto Erase or Save
After a subscriber listens to a message in their Subscriber Mailbox, VM8000 InMail can
automatically delete or archive the message.
Live Record
Enable or disable the Live Record beep for the Subscriber Mailbox.
Greeting
A Subscriber Mailbox user can record a personalized greeting for their mailbox. Callers to
the user’s mailbox hear the prerecorded personalized greeting.
Listening to Messages
Review this feature to learn which features are available to a subscriber while listening to
messages.
InMail System Guide
2 - 319
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Make Call
To simplify returning outside calls, VM8000 InMail can ask the caller leaving a message to
enter their phone number prior to leaving the message. The subscriber can then dial MC
to call the person back.
Main Menu
The Main Menu provides access to the features available to a Subscriber Mailbox.
Message Listen Mode
Set the type of messages a subscriber will listen to when they dial L (5) after logging on to
their Subscriber Mailbox.
Message Notification
After activation, Message Notification dials up to 3 telephone numbers to let the user know
they have new Mailbox messages.
Message Playback Direction
Set the subscriber Mailbox message playback order.
Message Record
Review this feature to learn which features are available to a subscriber while recording
and sending a message.
Message Storage Limit
Set the maximum number of messages that can be left in the mailbox.
Next Call Routing Mailbox
The Next Call Routing Mailbox provides additional dialing options after a caller leaves a
message in a Subscriber Mailbox.
Security Code
If enabled, a subscriber must enter a security code before logging on to their Subscriber
Mailbox.
System Administrator
A Subscriber Mailbox designated as a System Administrator provides the subscriber with
unique system administration abilities through the SA menu.
Unscreened Transfer
The Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers
to Unscreened Transfers.
2 - 320
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Programming
1.
Set up a Subscriber Mailbox.

47-02-01
Mailbox Type
Activate (1) the Personal Mailbox.


47-02-02
By default, Personal Mailboxes 1~8 are active (1). All other Station Mailboxes are
inactive (0).
Mailbox Number
Assign the mailbox number to each active Subscriber mailbox. Normally,
the mailbox number is the same as the extension number.

By default, mailboxes 1~64 correspond to mailbox numbers 101~164. Mailboxes
65~512 = No entry.
2.
Check to be sure message waiting lamp is enabled for the Subscriber Mailbox.

47-02-08
Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp)
Enter 1 (Yes) to enable Message Waiting lamp for each Subscriber
Mailbox.

By default, this option is 1 (Yes).
3.
Set the maximum length of recorded messages left in the Subscriber Mailbox.

47-01-03
Subscriber Message Length (Subs Msg Length)
Set the maximum length (1~4095 seconds) of recorded messages for:

Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.

Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox.

Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a GOTO
command and then dialing RS to record and send a message.

Subscriber Mailbox Greetings.

Announcement Messages.

Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus.

By default, these messages are a maximum of 120 seconds.
4.
Set the maximum length of recorded Quick Messages left in the Subscriber
Mailbox.

47-01-04
Non-Subscriber Message Length (Mbox Msg Length)
Set the maximum length (1~4095 seconds) of recorded messages for:
InMail System Guide

Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in a
Subscriber Mailbox.

Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber Mailbox.

By default, these messages are a maximum of 120 seconds.
2 - 321
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Not applicable
2 - 322
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
System Administrator
Description
The System Administrator is a Subscriber Mailbox that has unique system
administration features such as recording Menus and deleting messages in a
coworker’s mailbox. The System Administrator features are an essential part of
VM8000 InMail setup since they allow the recording of the system-wide messages
and provide Subscriber Mailbox maintenance. After logging on to their Subscriber
Mailbox, the System Administrator can use all of the features in the SA menu. The
System Administrator Options table below shows these options.
System Administrator Options
Menu
Option
1st Sub
Menu
2nd Sub
Menu
SA (72)
For more, see:
Access the System
Administration Options.
[N/A]
I (4)
[Instr]
Record, listen to or
delete an Instruction
Menu.
Instruction Menu on page
2-203.
A (2)
[Annc]
Record, listen to or
delete an
Announcement Menu.
Announcement Message
on page 2-21.
S (7)
[Subs]
Access the Subscriber
Maintenance Menu.
V (8)
[Info]
O (6)
[Sched]
InMail System Guide
Description
DA (32)
[Msgs]
Delete all messages in a
mailbox.
Erasing All Messages on
page 2-133.
DG (34)
[Greet]
Delete the Greeting.
Greeting on page 2-163.
DN (36)
[Name]
Delete the Mailbox
name.
Mailbox Name on page
2-229.
S (7)
[Sec]
Delete the Mailbox
security code.
Mailbox Security Code
Delete on page 2-235.
N (6)
[RcNam]
Record, listen to or
delete the mailbox
name.
Mailbox Name on page
2-229.
Hear InMail prompt
version number.
To change the
Answering Schedule
Override for a table.
Answer Schedule
Override on page 2-23.
2 - 323
Issue 8.0
VM8000
System Administrator Options (Continued)
L (5)
[Dlist]
3
[MboxAn]
Create, delete and edit
Message Distribution
Lists.
Distribution List on page
2-109.
Record, listen to or
delete a Mailbox
Announcement
message.
Mailbox Announcement
Message on page 2-225.
Related Features
Subscriber Mailbox
Only a Subscriber Mailbox can be a System Administrator.
Programming
1.
Designate a Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator.

47-02-12
System Administrator
Enter 1 (Yes) to designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System
Administrator.

By default, this option is 1 (Yes) at extension 101 and 0 (No) at all other extensions.
Operation
Refer to the individual features referenced in the System Administrator Options on
page 2-323.
Accessing the System Administrator Options
Log On to System Administrator’s Mailbox.
SA
(72)
Access the System Administrator Menu.
[Not applicable]
o Turn to System Administrator Options on page 2-323 for more.
0
2 - 324
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
System Administrator Mailbox
Description
A System Administrator Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox in which you have enabled
the System Administrator option. This provides the subscriber with system
administration abilities. VM8000 InMail can have multiple System Administrator
Mailboxes. Turn to System Administrator on page 2-323 for more.
Related Features
Subscriber Mailbox
Only a Subscriber Mailbox can be a System Administrator.
System Administrator
The System Administrator has unique system administration functions, such as recording
Welcome Messages and Instruction Menus, and deleting messages in a coworker’s
mailbox.
Programming
1.
Designate a Subscriber Mailbox as a System Administrator.

47-02-12
System Administrator
Enter 1 (Yes) to designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System
Administrator.

2.
By default, this option is 1 (Yes) at extension 101 and 0 (No) at all other extensions.
Refer to System Administrator on page 2-323 for more programming details.
Operation
See Accessing the System Administrator Options on page 2-324.
InMail System Guide
2 - 325
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 326
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
System Re-initialization
Description
Initializing the telephone system automatically initializes all VM8000 InMail
programming. You may want to do this if the site requirements significantly change
and it is easier to start over from default than remove all your custom programming.
Re-initializing VM8000 InMail returns all programmed options to their default values.
Re-initializing the telephone system returns all programmed options to their factory
set (default) values. Any site specific programming you have done is erased
following re-initialization.
To initialize (erase) Subscriber Mailbox Security Codes and all recordings, use a
System Administrator Mailbox.
Related Features
System Administrator
The System Administrator can delete Subscriber Mailbox security codes as well as
VM8000 InMail recorded messages.
Programming
To initialize (Cold Start) the telephone system:
1.
Make sure the system (not VM8000 InMail) CompactFlash card is not installed.

The system does not boot correctly if the system CompactFlash card is installed.
2.
Push the power button to Off.
3.
Wait 10 seconds before going to the next step.

This gives the system time to complete the shutdown process.
4.
Press and hold the Load button, then turn the power switch to On.
5.
Continue to hold down the Load button for at least 3 seconds.
6.
Release the Load button.
InMail System Guide

The system restarts in about 2 minutes.

When the system restarts, the Live LED flashes red.
2 - 327
Issue 8.0
VM8000

To delete recorded messages and Subscriber Mailbox Security Code refer to System
Administrator on page 2-323.
The recorded messages include:

Instruction Menus

Announcement Mailbox messages

Messages left in a Subscriber Mailbox

Subscriber Mailbox greetings

Subscriber Mailbox names
Operation
Not applicable
2 - 328
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Time and Date
Description
Since VM8000 InMail is completely integrated with the telephone system software,
the VM8000 InMail time and date is the same as the phone system time and date.
Since time and date is used on telephone displays and with the Auto Time Stamp and
Time and Date Stamp features, be sure to set it accurately. To change the time and
date, use the system programmable options. See Programming on page 2-329. The
Time and Date is retained if the telephone system power should fail or the system
resets.
In addition, a Subscriber Mailbox user can hear the time and date when they call their
mailbox.
Related Features
Auto Time Stamp
After a user listens to a message, VM8000 InMail can optionally announce the time and
date the message was left.
Time and Date Stamp
An extension can listen to a message and dial TI to hear the time the message was sent.
Programming
1.
To set the system time and date from system programming:

10-01-01
Time and Date
Set the system Time and Date.
2.
InMail System Guide
To set the system time from a system telephone:

Press Speaker.

Dial 728.

Dial two digits for the hour (24 hour clock, 13 = 1:00 PM).

Dial two digits for the minutes (00-60).

Press Speaker to hang up.
2 - 329
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Hearing the Current Time and Date
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
TI (84)
Access the Time and Date option.
o VM8000 InMail plays the time and date, and then returns you to the mailbox Main Menu.
0
2 - 330
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Time and Date Stamp
Description
While listening to a message, a Subscriber Mailbox user can dial TI to hear the Time
and Date the message was left. This is a handy option while reviewing messages.
The subscriber can just dial a code to find out when the message arrived.
Time and Date Stamp with Caller ID
With Caller ID installed, a mailbox user can dial TI while listening to a message to hear the
time the message was sent, as well as the caller’s number.
Related Features
Auto Time Stamp
After a user listens to a message, VM8000 InMail can optionally announce the time and
date the message was left.
Caller ID
With Caller ID installed and programmed, the Time and Date Stamp also includes the
caller’s number.
Listening to Messages
Turn to this feature for additional listening options.
Time and Date
You can set the system time from system programming or from a system extension. You
can set the date only from system programming.
Programming
To get Time and Date Stamp with Caller ID, be sure Caller ID is properly installed and
programmed in the connected telephone system.
InMail System Guide
2 - 331
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Hearing the Time and Date a Message was Left
Log On to Subscriber Mailbox.
L (5)
0
2 - 332
Access the Message Listen mode.
[Lstn]
TI
Hear the time and date the message was sent.
(84)
o Turn to Listening to Messages on page 2-213 for more on your listening
options.
Plays Help message.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Transfer to a Mailbox
Description
An extension user can transfer their active call to a coworker’s mailbox. This lets the
caller leave a personal message for the coworker. Transfer to a Mailbox is one of the
big conveniences of VM8000 InMail since the caller can state their business and not
have to call back later. It saves the caller time and cuts down on unnecessary
telephone system call processing. Transfer to a Mailbox is frequently used by
attendants and receptionists as well as other coworkers.
Related Features
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
When enabled, Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail automatically sends all calls from the
Automated Attendant to the subscriber’s mailbox.
Screened Transfer
Automated Attendant Screened Transfers can automatically transfer an outside caller to
an extension.
Unscreened Transfer
Automated Attendant Unscreened Transfers can automatically transfer an outside caller
to an extension.
Programming
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 333
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Operation
Transferring your call to a Coworker’s Mailbox
To transfer your active call to a coworker’s mailbox:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press Transfer.
Press Message.
Dial your coworker’s mailbox number (e.g., 101 for extension 101).
Press Speaker to hang up.
o To optionally transfer a call to coworker mailbox without first ringing their phone, press
Message before dialing their mailbox number. (This is the only procedure you can use
to transfer to a Guest Mailbox.)
o To transfer a call to a coworker mailbox from a single line telephone, use the following
procedure:
Hookflash + Dial *8 + Dial the coworker’s mailbox + Hang up.
To transfer your active call and leave a message:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press Transfer.
Dial your coworker’s mailbox number (e.g., 101 for extension 101).
Dial 8.
Leave a message and hang up.
 This procedure can be used for any telephone.
2 - 334
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Undefined Routing
Description
An Automated Attendant Undefined Routing is a Dial Action Table key assignment for
which there is no routing defined. When an Automated Attendant caller dials a digit
and no routing is assigned, VM8000 InMail plays: “That is an invalid entry.” VM8000
InMail then repeats the dialing options (Instruction Menu) to the caller. If a Dial Action
Table key assignment has no function, you should normally leave it undefined. By
default, keys 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 have Undefined Routing.
Related Features
Dial Action Table
Undefined Routing is a Dial Action Table Action.
Instruction Menu
The active Call Routing Mailbox’s Instruction Menu repeats after a caller dials a digit with
an Undefined Routing.
Programming
1.
To set up an Undefined Routing for a Dial Action Table:

47-13-01
Dial Action Tables: UND Action – Undefined Routing (0) (UND)
For a key that should have an Undefined Routing, the Action entry should
be UND. There is no corresponding Number option entry.

By default, keys 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 have Undefined Routing.
Operation
Not applicable
InMail System Guide
2 - 335
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 336
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Unscreened Transfer
Description
Unscreened Transfer is an Automated Attendant option that allows callers to directly
dial system extensions. Unscreened Transfer (and its related feature Screened
Transfer) allows the VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant to transfer outside calls to
system extensions without a live receptionist or operator. It is similar to telephone
system unscreened transfers in which the transferring party immediately extends the
call. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000 InMail transfers
the call to the destination and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are handled
by the telephone system – just as with any other unscreened transfer.
Screened vs. Unscreened Transfer
Both Screened and Unscreened Transfer allow Automated Attendant callers to
directly dial system extensions. The following summarizes the differences between
these two types of Automated Attendant transfer.

When set for Unscreened Transfer, calls from the InMail ring at the extension
like other transferred calls and display the incoming Caller ID data (if provided
by Telco and enabled in programming) while the phone is ringing.

When set for Screened Transfers, calls from the InMail ring like Intercom calls
but do not display incoming Caller ID data (if provided by Telco and enabled in
programming) until after the call is answered.

Both Screened and Unscreened Transfers route unanswered calls to the
subscriber’s greeting (recorded or default) so the caller can leave a message.
However, only Screened Transfer allows the caller to dial 2 to reach the Next
Call Routing Mailbox options (if programmed).
Unscreened Transfer and Inactive Mailboxes
An Unscreened Transfer goes through to the destination extension even if the
destination doesn’t have an active mailbox. If the Unscreened Transfer is unanswered
at the destination, the call returns to the Automated Attendant.
InMail System Guide
2 - 337
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) Operation
o Call = Call answered by the Automated Attendant.
o Extension = Extension dialed by Automated Attendant caller.
If Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail is off, see Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on page 2-41.
Extension Idle
With Active
Greeting Recorded
With Active
Greeting Not
Recorded
Extension Busy
Extension in DND
Transfers call to extension.
1. Transfers call to exten-
1. Transfers call to exten-
o If answered, connects call
sion.
2. Retrieves call.
sion.
2. Retrieves call.
3. If unanswered1 in a
3. If unanswered1 in a
(just like a phone system
transfer).
o If unanswered1 in a default
phone system, plays
greeting (so caller can start
recording).2
default phone system,
plays greeting (so caller
can start recording).2
default phone system,
plays greeting (so caller
can start recording).2
Transfers call to extension.
Transfers call to extension.
Transfers call to extension.
o If answered, connects call
o If answered, connects call
o If answered, connects call
(just like a phone system
transfer).
o If unanswered1 in a default
phone system, plays name
(if recorded) or extension
number. VM8000 InMail
then prompts caller to leave
a message.2
(just like a phone system
transfer).
o If unanswered1 in a default
phone system, plays name
(if recorded) or extension
number. VM8000 InMail
then prompts caller to leave
a message.2
(just like a phone system
transfer).
o If unanswered1 in a default
phone system, plays name
(if recorded) or extension
number. VM8000 InMail
then prompts caller to
leave a message.2
If Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail is on, see Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on page 2-41.
Extension Idle
With Active
Greeting Recorded
With Active
Greeting Not
Recorded
Extension Busy
Extension in DND
Sends call immediately to mailbox:
o Plays greeting.
o Prompts caller to start recording.
1
After 24-02-04 Transfer Recall Time.
Custom phone system programming may redirect the unanswered call (for example, to a hunt group or
another extension).
2
2 - 338
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Related Features
Answer Table
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each trunk.
Automated Attendant
The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Routing Mailbox
The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial
Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Caller ID
VM8000 InMail provides Caller ID data for an Unscreened Transfer as the call is ringing.
Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer
Table.
You cannot program a Call Routing Mailbox as an Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) Dial
Action Table destination.
Forced Unscreened Transfer
The Subscriber Mailbox can optionally convert Automated Attendant Screened Transfers
to Unscreened Transfers.
Next Call Routing Mailbox
The Next Call Routing settings for a Subscriber Mailbox may provide additional options
after the caller leaves a message.
Screened Transfer
After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000 InMail calls (screens) the
destination extension to see if the transfer can go through.
InMail System Guide
2 - 339
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming
1.
Assign the UTRF action to a key on the active Dial Action Table.

47-13-01
Dial Action Tables: UTRF Action – Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF)
Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note that the
key you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension
number.

For example, to allow callers to place Unscreened Transfers to
extensions 101~199, for key 3 enter UTRF for the Action and XXX for
the corresponding Number.
To have Unscreened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding
Number option should be that extension’s number. The caller then dials that
single digit to reach the extension.

For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8
enter UTRF for the Action and 303 for the corresponding Number.

By default, key 0 and TIMEOUT are both UTRF actions to 101. In addition, key 3
is an UTRF action to XXX.
2.
Optionally set the telephone system Transfer Recall interval.

24-02-04
Transfer Recall Time
Unanswered Unscreened Transfers route to the extension mailbox after this
interval (0~64800 seconds).

By default, this interval is 30 seconds.
Operation
Not applicable
2 - 340
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Voice Mail Overflow
Description
The telephone system can automatically reroute unanswered outside calls to the
InMail Automated Attendant. Voice Mail Overflow ensures that VM8000 InMail picks
up calls that do not go through. This allows callers to leave a message rather than
having to call back later. Voice Mail can be the overflow destination for the following
types of calls:

Direct Inward Line (DIL) Overflow
A trunk that directly rings an extension can overflow to that extension’s mailbox
if not answered.

Incoming Ring Groups
A trunk ringing an extension’s line keys can overflow to the VM8000 InMail
Automated Attendant.

Department Calling Groups
A call to a Department Group master (pilot) number can overflow to VM8000
InMail if unanswered. The overflow destination is the Group Mailbox assigned to
the Department Group. The Group Mailbox can be a:

Call Routing Mailbox
This gives the Department Group caller additional dialing options if their call is
unanswered.

Announcement Mailbox
This plays a prerecorded announcement to the Department Group caller if their call
is unanswered. The Announcement Mailbox can then hang up or provide additional
dialing options.

Subscriber Mailbox
The Department Group caller can leave a message in the groups master mailbox. A
Member of the group can then retrieve the message later on.
The call into the Department Group can be one of the following:
InMail System Guide

A Direct Inward Line to the Department Group master (pilot) number.

A Screened Transfer from the VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant to the
Department Group master (pilot) number.

An Unscreened Transfer from the VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant to the
Department Group master (pilot) number.
2 - 341
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Related Features
Answer Table
Determines how the Automated Attendant answers outside calls on each trunk.
Automated Attendant
The Answer Table determines how the Automated Attendant answers calls.
Routing Mailbox
The mailbox associated with an Answer Table that specifies which dialing options (Dial
Action Table) and announcements are available to Automated Attendant callers.
Dial Action Table
Defines the dialing options for the Call Routing Mailbox chosen by the active Answer
Table.
Group (Shared) Mailbox
Use Group Mailboxes for:
Department Calling Group Overflow.
Screened Transfer
A Screened Transfer from the VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant to a Department
Group master number can overflow to the group Mailbox.
Unscreened Transfer
An Unscreened Transfer from the VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant to a Department
Group can overflow to the group Mailbox.
Programming
Programming DIL Overflow
1.
Set up Direct Inward Lines.

22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to be a DIL. Make a separate
entry for each Night Service mode.


22-07-01
By default, trunks are Service Type 0 (Normal).
DIL Assignment
For each trunk designated as a DIL above, enter the extension number of
the DIL destination (e.g., 306). Make a separate entry for each Night
Service mode.

2 - 342
By default, no DIL destinations are programmed.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
2.
Assign VM8000 InMail as the overflow (no answer) destination.

22-08-01
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
For each trunk assigned as a DIL above, enter the VM8000 InMail
Department Group pilot number to make VM8000 InMail the overflow (no
answer) destination.

By default, the overflow (no answer) destination is Incoming Ring Group 1.
3.
Set the interval after which unanswered calls should route to the overflow
destination.

22-01-04
DIL No Answer Recall Time
Enter the interval (0~64800 seconds) after which unanswered calls should
overflow to the programmed overflow (no answer) destination.

By default, this interval is 0 (no overflow).
Programming Incoming Ring Group Overflow
1.
Set up the Incoming Ring Group trunks.

22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign Service Type 0 (Normal) to each Incoming Ring Group trunk. Make
a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

By default, trunks are Service Type 0 (Normal).
2.
Assign VM8000 InMail as the overflow (no answer) destination.

22-08-01
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
For each trunk assigned as an Incoming Ring Group trunk above, enter the
VM8000 InMail Department Group pilot number to make VM8000 InMail the
overflow (no answer) destination.

By default, the overflow (no answer) destination is Incoming Ring Group 1.
3.
Set the interval after which unanswered calls should route to the overflow
destination.

22-01-04
DIL No Answer Recall Time
Enter the interval after which unanswered calls should overflow to the
programmed overflow (no answer) destination.

InMail System Guide
By default, this interval is 0 (no overflow).
2 - 343
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Programming Department Calling Group Overflow for Screened Transfers
(TRFs)
1.
Set up the Department Group.

16-02-01
Department Group Assignment for Extensions.
Assign telephone extensions to a Department Group.

By default, telephone extensions are assigned to Department Group 1.
Assign the VM8000 InMail extensions to a unique Department Group (e.g.,
2).
No other extensions should be in this group.
These extensions are the extensions the system assigns to the VM8000
InMail.
Do not use Department Group 1.
Be sure to set up the Department Group in order. (For example, the first
extension should be order 1, the second order 2, etc.)

11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers
Assign master (pilot) numbers to Department Groups.
2.
In the active Dial Action Table, assign a Screened Transfer (TRF) Action to the
Department Group master number.

47-13-01
Dial Action Tables: TRF Action – Screened Transfer (1) (TRF)
The corresponding Number option should be the Department Group master
number.
For example, to allow callers to place Screened Transfers to Department
Group 1 (600), enter TRF for the Action and 600 for the corresponding
Number.

By default, two TRF actions are assigned to Department Groups.
3.
Set how long the call will ring in the Department Group before overflow occurs.

47-08-02
Screened Transfer Timeout (Scrn Trf Timeout)
For the active Call Routing Mailbox, set how long (0~255 seconds) the
Screened Transfer from the VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant rings in
the Department Group before overflow occurs.

By default, this interval is 15 seconds.
4.
Set up the Department Group Mailbox.

47-03-02
Mailbox Number
The Group Mailbox number must be the same as the Department Group
master number.

2 - 344
By default, no Group Mailbox numbers are assigned.
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-03-03
Mailbox Type
Assign the Group Mailbox category (2 = Routing, 1 = Subscriber, 0 =
Undefined).

5.
By default, the Group Mailbox type is 1 (Subscriber).
Set up the options for the Group Mailbox used for Department Group overflow.
If you entered 2 (Call Routing) for 47-03-03 Group Mailbox Type:
47-07 VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 3-45.
47-08 Routing Mailbox Call Routing Options on page 3-48.
47-09 Announcement Mailbox Options on page 3-51.
If you entered 1 (Subscriber) for 47-03-03 Group Mailbox Type:
47-06-01 Number of Messages on page 3-37.
47-06-02 Message Playback on page 3-37.
47-06-03 Auto Erase/Save of Messages on page 3-38.
47-06-05 Recording Conversation Beep (Rec Conv Beep) on page 3-38.
47-06-06 Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp) on page 3-39.
47-06-07 Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on page 3-39.
47-06-08 Forced Unscreened Transfer (Forced UTRF) on page 3-40.
47-06-09 Auto Time Stamp on page 3-40.
47-06-10 System Administrator (System Admin) on page 3-40.
47-06-11 Dialing Option on page 3-41.
47-06-12 Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox) on page 3-41.
15-07-01 Programming Function Keys on page 3-3.
For each Department Group member, assign a Voice Mail key (code 77) for
the group master number. This allows group members to easily retrieve the
overflow messages.
Programming Department Calling Group Overflow for Unscreened Transfers
(UTRFs)
1.
Set up the Department Group.

16-02-01
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Assign telephone extensions to a Department Group.
Assign the VM8000 InMail extensions to a unique Department Group
(e.g., 2).
No other extensions should be in this group.
These extensions are the extensions the system assigns to the VM8000
InMail.
Do not use Department Group 1.
Be sure to set up the Department Group in order. (For example, the first
extension should be order 1, the second order 2, etc.)

11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers
Assign master (pilot) numbers to Department Groups.
InMail System Guide
2 - 345
Issue 8.0
VM8000
2.
In the active Dial Action Table, assign an Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) Action
to the Department Group master number.

47-13-01
Dial Action Tables: UTRF Action – Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF)
The corresponding Number option should be the Department Group master
number.

For example, to allow callers to place Screened Transfers to Department
Group 1 (600), enter UTRF for the Action and 600 for the corresponding
Number.

By default, two UTRF actions are assigned to Department Groups.
3.
Set how long the call will ring in the Department Group before overflow occurs.

24-02-04
Transfer Recall Time
Set how long (0~64800 seconds) the Unscreened Transfer from the
VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant rings in the Department Group before
overflow occurs.

By default, this interval is 30 seconds.
4.
Set up the Department Group Mailbox.

47-03-02
Mailbox Number
The Group Mailbox number must be the same as the Department Group
master number.


47-03-03
By default, no Group Mailbox numbers are assigned.
Mailbox Type
Assign the Group Mailbox category (2 = Routing, 1 = Subscriber, 0 = None).

5.
By default, the Group Mailbox type is 1 (Subscriber).
Set up the options for the Group Mailbox used for Department Group overflow.
If you entered 2 (Call Routing) for 47-03-03 Group Mailbox Type:
47-07 VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 3-45.
47-08 Routing Mailbox Call Routing Options on page 3-48.
47-09 Announcement Mailbox Options on page 3-51.
If you entered 1 (Subscriber) for 47-03-03 Group Mailbox Type:
47-06-01 Number of Messages on page 3-37.
47-06-02 Message Playback on page 3-37.
47-06-03 Auto Erase/Save of Messages on page 3-38.
47-06-05 Recording Conversation Beep (Rec Conv Beep) on page 3-38.
47-06-06 Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp) on page 3-39.
47-06-07 Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on page 3-39.
47-06-08 Forced Unscreened Transfer (Forced UTRF) on page 3-40.
47-06-09 Auto Time Stamp on page 3-40.
47-06-10 System Administrator (System Admin) on page 3-40.
47-06-11 Dialing Option on page 3-41.
47-06-12 Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox) on page 3-41.
2 - 346
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Programming Department Calling Group Overflow for a DIL to the Master
Number
1.
Set up the Department Group.

16-02-01
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Assign telephone extensions to a Department Group.
Assign the VM8000 InMail extensions to a unique Department Group (e.g.,
2).
No other extensions should be in this group.
These extensions are the extensions the system assigns to the VM8000
InMail.
Do not use Department Group 1.
Be sure to set up the Department Group in order. (For example, the first
extension should be order 1, the second order 2, etc.)

11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers
Assign master (pilot) numbers to Department Groups.
2.
Set up a DIL for the Department Group.

22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to be a DIL. Make a separate
entry for each Night Service mode.


22-07-01
By default, trunks are Service Type 0 (Normal).
DIL Assignment
For each DIL you want to ring the Department Group directly, enter the
Department Group master number.


22-08-01
By default, no DIL destinations are programmed.
DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
For each DIL to the Department Group master number, enter 102 to make
VM8000 InMail the overflow (no answer) destination.

By default, the overflow (no answer) destination is Incoming Ring Group 1.
3.
Set how long a DIL rings in the Department Group before overflow occurs.

22-01-04
DIL No Answer Recall Time
Set how long (0~64800 seconds) the DIL rings in the Department Group
before overflow occurs.

InMail System Guide
By default, this interval is 0 (no overflow).
2 - 347
Issue 8.0
VM8000
4.
Set up the Department Group Mailbox.

47-03-02
Group Mailbox Number (Mailbox Number)
The Group Mailbox number must be the same as the Department Group
master number.


47-03-03
By default, no Group Mailbox numbers are assigned.
Group Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type)
Assign the Group Mailbox category (2 = Routing, 1 = Subscriber, 0 = None).

5.
By default, the Group Mailbox type is 1 (Subscriber).
Set up the options for the Group Mailbox used for Department Group overflow.
If you entered 2 (Call Routing) for 47-03-03 Group Mailbox Type:
47-07 VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 3-45.
47-08 Routing Mailbox Call Routing Options on page 3-48.
47-09 Announcement Mailbox Options on page 3-51.
If you entered 1 (Subscriber) for 47-03-03 Group Mailbox Type:
47-06-01 Number of Messages on page 3-37.
47-06-02 Message Playback on page 3-37.
47-06-03 Auto Erase/Save of Messages on page 3-38.
47-06-05 Recording Conversation Beep (Rec Conv Beep) on page 3-38.
47-06-06 Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp) on page 3-39.
47-06-07 Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on page 3-39.
47-06-08 Forced Unscreened Transfer (Forced UTRF) on page 3-40.
47-06-09 Auto Time Stamp on page 3-40.
47-06-10 System Administrator (System Admin) on page 3-40.
47-06-11 Dialing Option on page 3-41.
47-06-12 Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox) on page 3-41.
Operation
Not applicable
2 - 348
Features
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Volume Control
Description
Since VM8000 InMail is completely integrated with the telephone system software,
Volume Control is available at a subscriber’s keyset any time while listening to a
message, greeting, or prerecorded voice prompt. Volume Controls let the user
interactively adjust the loudness of the VM8000 InMail messages and prompts to a
comfortable level.
Related Features
Not applicable
Programming
No additional programming required.
Operation
Volume Control
To adjust the volume while using any mailbox feature:
1. Press VOL Up or VOL Down.
InMail System Guide
2 - 349
Issue 8.0
VM8000
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
2 - 350
Features
Programming
SECTION 1
BEFORE YOU START PROGRAMMING
How to use this chapter
The VM8000 InMail programmable options allow you to customize the way
the features associated with an option work. This Programming chapter
provides detailed information to enable you to accomplish the following:

Find out about each option.

Review the list of features that an option affects.

Learn how to enter the option data into system memory.
Chapter
3
When you want to customize a feature, refer to information in the Chapter
2 Features, Section 3 Feature Descriptions on page 2-10. The Feature
Descriptions tells you what options you have to change to get the feature
operation you want. Then, look up the options in this section and
customize them as required.
Start-Up Programming
Default Programming
SECTION 2
START-UP PROGRAMMING (DEFAULT)
When you install the VM8000 InMail blade and turn on the system,
VM8000 InMail does not automatically start working, but the following
areas are programmed.

Subscriber Mailboxes are enabled for extensions 101~108. The
mailbox numbers are the same as the extension numbers.

The Automated Attendant does not answer outside calls.
InMail System Guide
3-1
Issue 8.0
VM8000
2.1
VM8000 INMAIL CONFIGURATION
The following programs must be configured in a default system to get VM8000
InMail functions.
1.
The VM8000 InMail blade is enabled.
 47-01-17
InMail Port
Set the first port of VM8000 InMail. This value can be any valid station
port not already in use. By default this option is not assigned.
Changing this option requires the CD-CP00-US be reset for changes
to take effect.
2.
Assign VM8000 InMail extensions to Department Group.
 16-02-01
Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Assign the VM8000 InMail extensions to a unique Department Group
(e.g., 2).
No other extensions should be in this group.
These extensions are the extensions the system assigns to the
InMail.
Do not use Department Group 1.
3.
Be sure to set up the Department Group in order. (For example, the first
extension should be order 1, the second order 2, etc.) Assign master
number to VM8000 InMail Department Group.
 11-07-01
4.
Define the Voice Mail Department Group.
 45-01-01
5.
Department Group Pilot Numbers
Voice Mail Integration Options – Voice Mail Department Group
Number
Mailboxes for extensions 101~164 are activated.
 47-02-01
VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options – Mailbox Type
This option is 1 (Personal) for extensions 101~164.
When activating additional mailboxes, Subscriber Mailboxes 1~26
normally correspond to extensions 101~126.
6.
3-2
For extensions 101~164, the Subscriber Mailbox numbers are the same
as the extension numbers.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
 47-02-02
VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options – Mailbox Number
Normally, Subscriber Mailbox numbers correspond to the respective
extension number. (For example, extensions 101~164 should use
Subscriber Mailbox numbers 1~64).
Options
1~512
Default
Mailboxes 1~64 = extensions 101~164, mailboxes 65~512 = No entry
7.
Also, the following programs must be configured in a default system.
 15-03-01
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup — Signaling Type
Set to 0 (DP) for VM8000 InMail extensions.
 15-03-03
Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup – Terminal Type
Set to 1 (Special) for VM8000 InMail extensions.
2.2
Optional VM8000 InMail Start-Up Programming
Program Voice Mail keys on system extensions.
 15-07-01
Programming Function Keys
Voice Mail keys are code 77.
Normally, the additional data is the number of the extension you are
programming.
You can optionally set up an extension Message key for Voice Mail
access in the next step.
Keysets can also have Voice Mail keys for Virtual Extensions, a
co-worker, or an uninstalled extension (for Message Center
operation).
Extension users can use Service Code 751 to set up their own Voice
Mail keys.

2.3
By default, no Voice Mail keys are assigned.
Set up Automated Attendant to Answer Outside Calls
To have Automated Attendant answer outside calls, perform the following:
InMail System Guide

Set up Direct Inward Lines (DILs)

Terminate DILs to VM8000 InMail

After the DILs to VM8000 InMail are set up, all calls are answered by Call
Routing Mailbox 1 and Dial Action Table 1.

Answer Table 1 Runs Monday-Friday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM, and uses
Call Routing Mailbox 1.
3-3
Issue 8.0
VM8000

At all other times, the Default Mailbox answers – also using Call Routing
Mailbox 1.

Dial Action Table 1 enables the following usage:

Dial system extensions (if installed) 101~199, 3101~3257 and 3301~3457.

Dial 0 for an operator (extension 101).

Dial * + Extension to leave a Quick Message in a mailbox.

Dial # + Extension to remotely log on to their mailbox.

Wait on the line to be automatically routed to the operator.
Programming
1.
Set up trunks as DILs.

22-02-01
Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to be a DIL. Make a separate
entry for each Night Service mode.

By default, trunks are Service Type 0 (Normal).
2.
Have the DILs terminate to VM8000 InMail extension.

22-07-01
DIL Assignment
For each trunk you designate as a DIL, enter the VM8000 InMail group pilot
number. Make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

3-4
By default, no DIL destinations are programmed.
Programming
VM8000
SECTION 3
Issue 8.0
PROGRAM 15 EXTENSION, BASIC SETUP
Program 15-01 Basic Extension Data Set Up
Description
Program 15-01 Basic Extension Data Setup defines the basic settings for each
extension.
Use 15-01-01 Extension Name to enter an extension name for Directory Dialing. You
can also enter an extension name from the telephone.

For information on the other 15-01 Basic Extension Data Setup options, refer to the SV8100
Programming Manual.
Options

15-01-01
Extension Name
Enter the name for each extension, using up to 12 characters, A~Z, upper
and lower case letters. Do not use non-alpha characters. To separate a first
name from a last name, enter a space or comma as a delimiter. You can
enter names in any of the following formats:

First

Last

First (space) Last

Last (space) First
You can also use Name Programming from the telephone to enter
extension names (Speaker + 700 or PRG 15-07/SC 751 + 55).
InMail System Guide

For help with programming names, see Keys for Entering Names on page 3-6.

See Directory Dialing on page 2-95.
3-5
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Keys for Entering Names
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be up to
12 digits long.
Use this keypad
digit . . .
When you want to. . .
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
1
2
Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0
!
“
#
$
%
&
’

(
Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
) ô Õ ú ä ö ü 
Enter characters:

+
¢ £

,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
? B E  S
•
#
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key
are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system
programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept
and/or add a space.)
Hold
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.
Options
Characters (12 maximum, using upper and lower case letters).
Use a space or comma as the delimiter between the first and last name.
Default
No extension names entered.
3-6
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
15-01 Program Entry
15-01 Basic Extension Data Setup Program Entry
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 1501 + Option.
01
Extension Name (12 characters max., A-Z using upper and lower case letters) [No entry]
Use a space or comma as the delimiter between the first and last name.
02
Outgoing Trunk Line Preference (0=Off, 1=On) [0]
03
SMDR Printout (0=Do not print on SMDR report, 1=Include on SMDR report) [1]
04
ISDN Caller ID (0=Disable, 1=Enable) [1]
05
Restriction for Outgoing Disable on Incoming Line (0=Disable, 1=Enable) [0]
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Answer

Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
InMail System Guide
3-7
Issue 8.0
SECTION 4
VM8000
PROGRAM 41 ACD SETUP
41-19 Voice Mail Delay Announcement
Description
Use Program 41-19 : Voice Mail Delay Announcement to assign InMail Call
Routing Mailboxes (PRG 47-09) as ACD Delay “Announcement” Mailboxes. Refer to
Figure 3-1 ACD Delay Announcement Flowchart on page 3-11 for programming
example. Also, refer to the SV8100 ACD Manual for more information.
Conditions

The KSU must be licensed for ACD and InMail in order for this feature to work.

Call Routing Mailboxes used for Delay Announcements cannot be used for
other features.

Call Routing boxes used for dial options cannot be used for other features.

When Voice Mail Delay Announcements are being played, VM8000 InMail talk
paths (ports) are used.

VM8000 InMail cannot be used for ACD Night Announcement.

If a caller chooses to dial out of a queue during the delay announcement the
caller is immediately removed from the queue.
Options

41-19-01
Delay Message Start Timer
Determine the time the system waits before playing the first Delay
Message.
Options
0~64800 seconds
Default
0
3-8
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

41-19-02
Mailbox Number for 1st Announcement Message
Assign Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailbox as the message source for
the 1st Announcement Message.
Options
Dial (Up to eight digits)
Default
No Setting

41-19-03
1st Delay Message Sending Count
Determine the 1st Delay Message Sending Count. This entry must be set to
1 or higher in order for the message to play.
Options
0 = No Message Played, 1~255
Default
0

41-19-04
Mailbox Number for 2nd Announcement Message
Assign Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes as the message source
for the 2nd Announcement Message.
Options
Dial (Up to eight digits)
Default
No Setting

41-19-05
2nd Delay Message Sending Count
Determine the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count. This entry must be set
to 1 or higher in order for the message to play.
Options
0 = No Message Played, 1~255
Default
0

41-19-06
Wait Tone Type at Message Interval
Determine what the caller will hear between the messages.
Options
0 = Ring Back Tone
1 = Music On Hold Tone
2 = Background Music Source
Default
0
InMail System Guide
3-9
Issue 8.0
VM8000

41-19-07
ACD Forced Disconnect Time After 2nd Announcement
Assign the time the system should wait after the end of the ACD delay
message before disconnecting.
Options
0~64800 seconds
Default
0

41-19-08
Delayed Message Interval Time
Set the timer for the interval between the Delayed Messages
Options
0~64800 seconds
Default
20
3 - 10
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Figure 3-1 ACD Delay Announcement Flowchart
InMail System Guide
3 - 11
Issue 8.0
SECTION 5
VM8000
PROGRAM 45 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION
45-01 Voice Mail Integration Options
Description
Use Program 45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice mail
integration options.
Input Data
Item
No.
01
Item
Voice Mail Department Group Number
Assign which Extension (Department) Group
number is to be assigned as the voice mail
group (non-networked system).
02
Voice Mail Master Name
Input Data
Default
0~64
0 = No Voice Mail
0
Up to 12 Characters
VOICE
MAIL
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0 = Off
1 = On
1
0~64800 (sec)
30
Dial (up to 8 digits)
No Setting
Enter the Voice Mail master name
04
Park and Page
Enable/Disable the system ability to process
the Voice Mail Park and Page () commands.
You should normally enable this option.
05
Message Wait
Enable/Disable the system ability to process
the Voice Mail Message Wait (#) commands.
You should normally enable this option. If
enabled, be sure that the programmed
Message Notification strings don’t contain the
code for trunk access.
06
Record Alert Tone Interval Time
Set the time between voice Mail Conversation
Record alerts
14
CCIS Centralized Voice Mail Number
Assign the pilot number to Centralized Voice
Mail over CCIS Link. This is assigned only in
the remote switches.
15
Analog Voice Mail Protocol Selection
Assign whether fixed codes are used or the
codes used in PRG 45-04 are used for analog
voice mail protocol.
16
Voice Mail Fax Digit Add Assignment
0: Fixed
1: Program
Up to four digits
0
None
Assign up to four digits in front of the station
number sent to the SLT port when a call is
forwarded.
3 - 12
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Input Data (Continued)
Item
No.
17
Item
Reply Mailbox Number
Whether or not to include the mailbox number
in the analog voice mail protocol.
18
Trunk Number Mapping
Input Data
Default
0: No
1: Yes
1
2~3
2
Assign the digits of trunk number mapping.
Conditions
None
Feature Cross Reference

InMail System Guide
Voice Mail Integration (Analog)
3 - 13
Issue 8.0
SECTION 6
VM8000
PROGRAM 47 VM8000 INMAIL
47-01 VM8000 InMail System Options
Description
Use Program 47-01 VM8000 InMail System Options to set up the VM8000 InMail
system-wide options.
Options

47-01-02
VM8000 InMail Master Name
Use this option to modify the name for all VM8000 InMail ports. The system
briefly displays this name when a display multiline terminal user calls a
Voice Mail port, either by pressing Message, the voice mail key, or by
dialing the master number. You should always end the name with the ##
characters. The system substitutes the port number for the last #. Using the
default name VM8000 InMail ## for example, the keyset display shows
VM8000 InMail #1 when calling port 1. The CD-CPOO-US be reset for a
change to this program to take effect.
See Keys for Entering Names on page 3-15.
Options

Consider leaving the option at its default setting.
Default
VM8000 InMail ## (The system substitutes the port number for the last #
when calling the port).
3 - 14
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Keys for Entering Names
Key for Entering Names
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can be
up to 12 digits long.
Use this keypad
digit . . .
1
Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ` { | }
2
Enter characters: A-C, a-c, 2.
3
Enter characters: D-F, d-f, 3.
4
Enter characters: G-I, g-i, 4.
5
Enter characters: J-L, j-l, 5.
6
Enter characters: M-O, m-o, 6.
7
Enter characters: P-S, p-s, 7.
8
Enter characters: T-V, t-v, 8.
9
Enter characters: W-Z, w-z, 9.
0
Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $
Enter characters:
 + , - . /


When you want to. . .
%
&
:
;
’
<

(
Á À Â Ã Ç É Ê ì ó
) ô Õ ú ä ö ü
=
>
? B E

 S •
¢ £
#
# = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key
are needed - ex: TOM). Pressing # again = Space. (In system
programming mode, use the right arrow soft key instead to accept
and/or add a space.)
Hold
Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the
right.
47-01-03
Subscriber Message Length (Subs Msg Length)
Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded messages for:
InMail System Guide

Subscriber Mailbox users dialing RS to record and send a message.

Extension users leaving a message in a Subscriber Mailbox.

Outside Automated Attendant callers accessing a mailbox via a GOTO
command and then dialing RS to record and send a message. Subscriber
Mailbox Greetings.
3 - 15
Issue 8.0
VM8000

Announcement Messages.

Call Routing Mailbox Instruction Menus.


The length of a Conversation Record is 10 times the Subscriber Message
Length. Since the Conversation Record time cannot exceed 4095 seconds, any
settings in Subscriber Message Length larger than 409 has no effect on the
length of recorded conversations.
See the following for more:

Announcement Message on page 2-21

Automated Attendant on page 2-47

Routing Mailbox on page 2-301

Live Record on page 2-219

Greeting on page 2-163

Subscriber Mailbox on page 2-319
Options
1~4095 seconds
Default
120 seconds

47-01-04
Non-Subscriber Message Length (Mbox Msg Length)
Use this option to set the maximum length of recorded messages for:

Automated Attendant callers leaving a message or Quick Message in a
Subscriber Mailbox.

Outside callers transferred by an extension user to a Subscriber Mailbox.

See the following for more:

Automated Attendant on page 2-47

Message Length on page 2-249

Quick Message on page 2-293

Subscriber Mailbox on page 2-319
Options
1~4095 seconds.
Default
120 seconds.
3 - 16
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-01-05
Message Backup/Go Ahead Time (Msg Bkup/Adv Time)
Use this option to set the backup/go ahead interval. This interval sets how
far VM8000 InMail backs up when a user dials B while listening to a
message. This interval also sets how far VM8000 InMail jumps ahead when
a user dials G while listening to a message.

See the following for more:

Listening to Messages on page 2-213

Message Length on page 2-249
Options
1~60 Seconds.
Default
5

47-01-07
Digital Pager Callback Number (Pager CBack)
Use this option to set the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the
Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. This is the portion of
the callout number that is appended to the pager service telephone number.
Normally, this option is XM#, where:

X is the number of the extension that generated the notification.

 is a visual delimiter (to make the pager display easier to read).

M is the number of new messages in the extension mailbox.

# is the digit normally used by the pager service for positive disconnect.

See Message Notification on page 2-253 for more.
Options
Digits (12 maximum, using 0~9, # and )
M (Number of messages - entered by pressing LK1)
X (Extension number - entered by pressing LK2)
VM8000 InMail automatically replaces the X command with the number of
the extension that initially received the message.
Default
XM#
InMail System Guide
3 - 17
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-01-08
Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback Number (Pager Dial Delay)
Use this option to set the delay (0~99 seconds) that occurs just before
VM8000 InMail dials the Digital Pager Callback Number portion of the
Message Notification callout number for a digital pager. Set this delay so the
pager service has enough time to connect to the digital pager before
sending the callback number. Your pager service may be able to help you
determine the best value for this option (0~99 seconds). By default, this
option is 9 seconds. When placing a digital pager notification, the system:
1.
Seizes the trunk specified.
2.
Dials user-entered notification number (in Message + OP + N).
3.
Waits the 47-01-08 Delay in Dialing Digital Pager Callback
Number interval.
4.
Dials number entered in 47-01-07 Digital Pager Callback
Number.
The system assumes that the notification number completes dialing
approximately 4 seconds after trunk seizure. This means that, by default,
the Digital Pager Callback Number is dialed to the pager service about 13
seconds after trunk seizure.
See Message Notification on page 2-253 for more.
Options

0~99 seconds
Default
9

47-01-09
Wait Between Digital Pager Callout Attempts (Notify Pager Intvl)
Use this option to set the minimum time (1~255 minutes) between
unacknowledged or unanswered digital pager Message Notification
callouts. (A subscriber acknowledges a digital pager notification by logging
onto their mailbox.) After this interval expires, VM8000 InMail tries the
callout again (for up to the number of times set in 47-01-14 Number of
Cascading Attempts).
If the system dials the callout number and the pager service is busy, it
retries the number in one minute.

See Message Notification on page 2-253 for more.
Options
1~255 minutes
Default
15
3 - 18
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-01-10
Wait Between Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify N-Pgr Intvl)
Use this option to set the minimum time (1~255 minutes) between
non-pager Message Notification callouts in which the destination answers,
says “Hello,” dials 1 to acknowledge and then enters the wrong security
code.

See Message Notification on page 2-253 for more.
Options
1~255 minutes
Default
20

47-01-11
Wait Between Busy Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify Busy Intvl)
Use this option to set how long VM8000 InMail waits (1~255 minutes), after
it dials a busy non-pager callout destination, before retrying the callout
number.
See Message Notification on page 2-253 for more.
Options

1~255 minutes
Default
15 minutes

47-01-12
Wait Between RNA Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify RNA Intvl)
Use this option to set how long VM8000 InMail waits (1~255 minutes), after
it dials an unanswered non-pager callout destination, before retrying the
callout number.
There are three types of unanswered non-pager callouts:

If the callout rings the destination longer than the 47-01-13 Wait for Answer
Non-Pager Callout Attempts option.

If the destination answers, says Hello (or the system detects answer
supervision) and then hangs up without dialing 1 to log on to their mailbox.
This typically happens if someone unfamiliar with notification answers the
callout, or if the callout is picked up by an answering machine.

If the destination answers and then hangs up without saying Hello. This
typically happens if someone unfamiliar with the notification answers the
callout (like the above example), or if the call is picked up by an answering
machine with insufficient outgoing message volume.

See Message Notification on page 2-253 for more.
Options
1~255 minutes
Default
30
InMail System Guide
3 - 19
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-01-13
Wait for Answer Non-Pager Callout Attempts (Notify RNA Rings)
If a non-pager callout rings the destination longer than this interval (1~99
rings), VM8000 InMail marks the call as unanswered (Ring No Answer) and
hangs up.

See Message Notification on page 2-253 for more.
Options
1~99 rings
Default
5

47-01-14
Number of Cascading Attempts (Notify Call Attmpt)
Use this option to set how many times (1~99 attempts) VM8000 InMail
retries an incomplete Message Notification callout. This total includes
unacknowledged callouts, callouts to a busy destination, and callouts to an
unanswered destination. This option applies to pager and non-pager
callouts.
See Message Notification on page 2-253 for more.
Options

1~99 attempts
Default
5 attempts

47-01-15
Send Pager Callout Until Acknowledged (Retry Until Ack)
When this option is enabled (1), VM8000 InMail continues to retry a digital
pager Message Notification callout until the notification is acknowledged. If
this option is disabled (0), VM8000 InMail retries a digital pager Message
Notification the number of times specified in 47-01-14 Number of Cascading
Attempts. This option does not apply to Message Notification callouts to
telephone numbers.
A digital pager notification is considered acknowledged when the recipient
logs on to the mailbox.

See Message Notification on page 2-253 for more.
Options
1Yes (Enabled)
0 No (Disabled)
Default
0

47-01-16
Name Format
Use this option to determine how extension names should be entered in
15-01-01 Basic Extension Data Setup – Extension Name or via the
telephone. The options are 0 (1st last) and 1 (last 1st).
3 - 20
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
If you enter 0 (first-last), the system assumes that all names are entered in
the following format:
M
A
R
Y
J
O
First
N
E
S
Last
Delimiter
(space or comma)
If you enter 1 (last-first), the system assumes that all names are entered in
the following format:
J
O
N
E
S
M
A
Last
R
Y
First
Delimiter
(space or comma)

See Directory Dialing on page 2-95 for more.
Options
0 (1st Last)
1 (Last 1st)
Default
0

47-01-17
InMail Port
Specify the port number of the first InMail port.
With software version v1.11 or higher the following rules apply when
programming VM8000 InMail ports in program 47-01-17 on a system that
has the basic 64-port license.
When a PZ-ME50 is NOT mounted to CD-CP00-US:
• The first port of VM800 InMail must be assigned to port 57 or lower.
• The number of licensed VM8000 InMail ports do not take away from the
64 port license.
• There can still be a combination of 64 trunks, TDM phones and IP
phones.
When a PZ-ME50 is mounted to CD-CP00-US:
• The
InMail System Guide
first port of VM800 InMail can be assigned above port 64.
3 - 21
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Options
0~497
The first port of InMail must start with one of the following ports: 1, 5, 9, 12,
16,...237, 241, 245, 249, and uses the first port assigned + next three
consecutive ports.
Default
0

47-01-18
Play PAD Control
Options
1~63 (-15dBM~+15dBm)
Default
32

47-01-19
Record PAD Control (for Networking)
Options
1~63 (-15dBM~+15dBm)
Default
32
3 - 22
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-01 Program Entry
47-01 VM8000 InMail System Options Program Entry
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4701 + Option.
01
DSPDB VM Type (0=VM8000 InMail, 1=VRS) [0]
LK1=VM8000 InMail, LK2=VRS
02
VM8000 InMail Master Name (See Keys for Entering Names on page 3-15) [VM8000
InMail ##]
03
Subs Msg Length (1~4095) [120]
04
Mbox Msg Length (1~4095) [120]
05
Msg Bkup/Adv Time (1~60) [5]
06
Fax Extension (Extension number or no entry, entered by pressing Hold) [No entry]
07
Pager CBack (Digits, M=Number of messages, X=Extension number) [X*M#]
LK1=M, LK2=X
08
Pager Dial Delay (0~99) [9]
09
Notify Pager Intvl (1~255) [15]
10
Notify N-Pgr intvl (1~255) [20]
11
Notify Busy Intvl (1~255) [15]
12
Notify RNA Intvl (1~255) [30]
13
Notify RNA Rings (1~99) [5]
14
Notify Call Attmpt (1~99) [5]
15
Retry Until Ack (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
16
Name Format (0=1st Last, 1=Last 1st) [0]
17
Specify first InMail port 0~497 [0]
18
Set Play PAD Control 1~63 [32]
19
Set Record PAD Control 1~63 [32]
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Answer

Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
InMail System Guide
3 - 23
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-02 VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options
Description
Use 47-02 VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options to set up a station/extension
mailbox. Station mailboxes are automatically assigned as Subscriber Mailboxes. You
can also set up Group Mailboxes as Subscriber Mailboxes.
Normally, VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox numbers 1~26 correspond to extensions
101~126.
There are three Station Mailbox categories:

Station

Routing

Master

Refer to Group (Shared) Mailbox on page 2-169 and Station Mailbox on page 2-317.
Options

47-02-01
Mailbox Type
Use this option to enable or disable the mailbox. An extension mailbox is
not accessible when it is disabled (even though stored messages and
configuration are retained in memory.) If disabled, a user pressing Message
initiates a remote logon and be asked to enter their mailbox number. A
voice prompt then announces: “That mailbox does not exist.”

To make programming easier, consider associating a mailbox number with
a station port.

For example, mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in turn
corresponds to extension 101.


See Section 2 Start-Up Programming (Default) for more.
See Subscriber Mailbox on page 2-319 for more.
Options
0 (None)
1 (Personal)
2 (Group)
Default
Mailboxes 1~64 = 1
3 - 24
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-02-02
Mailbox Number
Use this option to select the extension number associated with the mailbox
you are programming. Normally, mailbox 1 should use Mailbox Number
101, mailbox 2 should use Mailbox Number 102, etc.

To make programming easier, consider associating a mailbox number with
a station port. For example, mailbox 1 could correspond to port 1, which in
turn corresponds to extension 101.
 See Subscriber Mailbox on page 2-319 for more.
Options
Digits (8 maximum, using 0~9).
Default
Mailboxes 1~64 = 101~164, mailboxes 65~512 = No Entry.

47-02-03
Number of Messages
Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in
the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message once this limit is
reached, they hear, “That mailbox is full.” VM8000 InMail then hangs up.

See Message Storage Limit on page 2-267 for more.
Options
0~99 messages
To conserve storage space, enter 0 for all unused mailboxes.
Default
99 messages for mailbox 1.
20 messages for all other mailboxes.

47-02-04
Message Playback Order
Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order.
When a subscriber listens to their messages, VM8000 InMail can play the
oldest messages first (first-in-first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages
first (last-in-first-out, or LIFO).

See Message Playback Direction on page 2-261 for more.
Options
0 (FIFO - first-in/first-out, or oldest messages first).
1 (LIFO - last-in/first-out, or newest messages first).
Default
0

47-02-05
Auto Erase/Save of Messages
Use this option to determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user
completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox without
either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the setting of
this option, VM8000 InMail either automatically archives or deletes the
message. If the mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire new
message, InMail retains the message as a new message.
 See Auto Erase or Save on page 2-43.
InMail System Guide
3 - 25
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Options
0 (Erase)
After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, InMail
deletes the message.
1 (Save)
After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, InMail
archives the message.
Default
1

47-02-06
Message Retention
Use this option to determine how long a subscriber mailbox retains held and
archived messages. If a message is left in a subscriber mailbox longer than
this interval, VM8000 InMail deletes it.
Options
1-99 days, 0(Indefinite)
Default
0

47-02-07
Recording Conversation Beep (Rec Conv Beep)
Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep. If
enabled, all parties on a call will hear the voice prompt Recording followed
by a single beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If
disabled, the voice prompt and beep will not occur. When you disable the
Conversation Record beep, the following voice prompts do not occur while
VM8000 InMail records the conversation:

Recording (followed by a beep)

That mailbox is full (if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached)

You have reached the recording limit (if the recorded message is too long)
The SV8100 telephone system software provides an additional
Conversation Record beep. This beep repeats according to the setting of
Program 45-01-06 Voice Mail Integration Options: Record Alert Tone
Interval Time (0~64800 seconds). To disable the SV8100 telephone system
Conversation Record beep, enter 0 for this option.

See Live Record on page 2-219 for more.
Options
1 Yes (Enabled)
0 No (Disabled)
Default
1

47-02-08
Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp)
Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting lamp at the extension
associated with the Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, leave
this option enabled. For Guest Mailboxes, leave this option disabled.

3 - 26
See Guest Mailbox on page 2-177 for more.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

Disabling this option also disables Message Notification. See Message
Notification on page 2-253 for more.

See Message Waiting Lamp on page 2-269 for more.

See Subscriber Mailbox on page 2-319 for more.
Options
1 Yes (Enabled)
0 No (Disabled)
Default
1

47-02-09
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail (Auto-ATT DND)
Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb. When a
subscriber enables Auto Attendant Do Not Disturb, an Automated Attendant
caller routes directly to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is asked to
leave a message. A subscriber can also enable Auto Attendant Do Not
Disturb while recording their mailbox greeting.

See Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on page 2-41 for more.
Options
1 Yes (Enabled)
0 No (Disabled)
Default
0

47-02-10
Forced Unscreened Transfer (Forced UTRF)
Use this option to enable or disable Automated Attendant Forced
Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened
Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer
(UTRF). If disabled, Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant
occur normally.
See Forced Unscreened Transfer on page 2-157 for more.
Options

1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
0

47-02-11
Auto Time Stamp
Use this option to enable or disable Auto Time Stamp for the Subscriber
Mailbox. If enabled, after the subscriber listens to a message VM8000
InMail will announce the time and date the message was left. Auto Time
Stamp will also announce the message sender (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp from their mailbox.

InMail System Guide
See Auto Time Stamp on page 2-45 for more.
3 - 27
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Options
1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
0

47-02-12
System Administrator
Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System
Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use the SA options after logging
on to their mailbox.

See System Administrator on page 2-323 for more.
Options
1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
Mailbox 1 (101) = 1
All other mailboxes = 0

47-02-13
Dialing Option
Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for Next Call Routing
Mailbox calls (see 47-02-14 Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox)
below). If enabled, a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a
message can dial any option in the Next Call Routing Mailbox’s Dial Action
Table. If disabled, the caller can dial only 0 (to use the Next Call Routing
Mailbox 0 action).

See Next Call Routing Mailbox on page 2-275.
Options
1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
0

47-02-14
Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox)
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber
Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening
to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller
can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and
Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options.
3 - 28

For a detailed explanation of the interaction of these two programs, turn to Dialing
Options while Listening to a Subscriber Mailbox Greeting on page 2-276.

For an explanation of the options a caller can dial while recording, see Record
and Send a Message on page 2-297.

See the following features for more:

Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on page 2-41.

Call Forward to a Mailbox on page 2-55.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

Exiting a Mailbox on page 2-135.

Leaving a Message on page 2-209.

Next Call Routing Mailbox on page 2-275
Options
Call Routing Mailbox Number (up to three digits)
No entry - 0 (Entered by pressing Hold)
Default
1 (Call Routing Mailbox 1)
By default, Call Routing Mailbox numbers are 1-8.

47-02-15
Directory List Number
Use this option to specify the Directory List to which the Subscriber Mailbox
belongs. When setting up Directory Dialing Mailboxes, you must specify
which Directory List you want the Directory Dialing Mailbox to use. The
Directory Dialing Mailbox can only call Subscriber Mailboxes that belong to
the list it is programmed to use. The entries for this option are 1~8 (lists
1~8), 0 (belongs to no lists), or * (belongs to all lists).
See Directory Dialing on page 2-95.
Options

1~8 (Directory List 1~8)
 = All
0 = None
Default
0

47-02-16
Voice Prompt Language
Use this option to specify the language used for each Subscriber Mailbox.
The VM8000 InMail comes with three language prompts: US English,
Mexican Spanish and Canadian French. Each mailbox can use any one of
these languages. Additional languages can be licensed on the CCPU and
the prompt sets downloaded from the support web page.
Options
01 - US English
02 - UK English
03 - Australian English
04 - French Canadian
05 - Dutch
06 - Mexican Spanish
07 - Latin America Spanish
08 - Italian
09 - German
10 - Madrid Spanish
11 - Norwegian
12 - Parisian French
InMail System Guide
3 - 29
Issue 8.0
VM8000
13 - Brazilian Portuguese
14 - Japanese
15 - Mandarin Chinese
16 - Korean
17 - Iberian Portuguese
18 - Greek
19 - Danish
20 - Swedish
21 - Thai
22 - Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 - Flemish
24 - Turkish
Default
01 (US English)

47-02-17
Enable Paging
Options
1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
0

47-02-18
Paging Option
1 (Immediately)
0 (RNA)
Default
0

47-02-19
Telephone User Interface Type
Use this option to set if caller hear options in Numeric (press 1 for
yes) or Mnemonic (press L to listen to messages).
Options
0 - Numeric
1 - Mnemonic
Default
0

47-02-20
Enable E-mail Notification
Options
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default
0
3 - 30
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-02-21
E-mail Address
Options
Up to 48 characters
Default
No setting

47-02-22
Include Message as Attachment
Options
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default
1
InMail System Guide
3 - 31
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-02 Program Entry
47-02 VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options Program Entry
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4702 + Option.
This selects the option chosen for Station Mailbox 1.
There are 128 available mailboxes (1~128).
3 - 32
01
Mailbox Active (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [1 for 101~108, 0 for all others]
LK1-No, LK2=Yes
02
Mailbox Number (Digits, 7 max using 0~9) [1~8 = 101~108, No entry for all others]
03
Number of Messages (0~99) [99 for mailbox 1, 20 for all others]
04
Message Playback (0=FIFO, 1=LIFO) [0]
LK1=FIFO, LK2=FIF0
05
Auto Erase/Save (0=Erase, 1=Save) [1]
LK1=Erase, LK2=Save
07
Rec Conv Beep (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [1]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
08
Update MW Lamp (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [1]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
09
Auto-ATT DND (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
10
Forced UTRF (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
11
Auto Time Stamp (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
12
System Admin (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [1 (Enabled) for Mailbox 1 (101), 0
(Disabled) for all others]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
13
Dialing Option (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
14
Next CR Mbox (1~32, Hold=No entry) [1]
15
Directory List (1~8=Lists 1~8, 0=No list, *=All lists) [0]
16
Select Language [01 = Us English]
17
Enable Paging [Disabled]
18
Set Paging Option 0 = RNA, 1 = Immediately [0]
19
Set Telephone User Interface 0 = Numeric, 1 = Mnemonic {[0]
20
Enable E-mail Notification 0 = No, 1 = Yes [0]
21
Set E-mail Address Up to 48 Characters [No Setting]
22
Include Message as Attachment 0 = No, 1 = Yes [1]
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-02 VM8000 InMail Station Mailbox Options Program Entry (Continued)
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Mic
Mic + Mailbox number + Mic selects a new mailbox number
Answer

Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
InMail System Guide
3 - 33
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-03 Group Mailbox Options
Description
Use 47-03 Group Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Group Mailboxes (1~32). A Group
Mailbox is used for Department Group overflow and can be a Subscriber, Call
Routing, Announcement, or Directory Dialing Mailbox.

See Routing Mailbox on page 2-301.
Options

47-03-02
Mailbox Number
The Group Mailbox Number is the same as the Department Group Master
(pilot) number. Use this option to select the Department Group Master
(pilot) number associated with the Group Mailbox you are programming.
When using a Group Mailbox as an additional resource (for example, as an
extra Directory Dialing Mailbox), you can do the following:

Assign a pilot number to an unused Department Group in 11-07-01
Department Group Pilot Numbers.

Set up the Group Mailbox in 47-03, using this pilot number in 47-03-02
Group Mailbox Number.

When 47-03 programming is complete, remove the pilot number
assignment in 11-07-01 Department Group Pilot Numbers.

Refer to the following:

See Directory Dialing on page 2-95.

See Routing Mailbox on page 2-301.

See Voice Mail Overflow on page 2-341.
Options
Digits (eight maximum, using 0~9).
No Setting (Entered by pressing Hold)
Default
No Setting.
3 - 34
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-03-03
Mailbox Type
Use this option to set the Group Mailbox type. There are three types of
InMail mailboxes: None (0), Subscriber (1), Routing (2).

If the Group Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox (1), go to 47-03 Program Entry
on page 3-36 to set up the Group Mailbox options.

If the Group Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox (1), go to 47-03 Group Mailbox
Options on page 3-34 to set up the Group Mailbox options.

If the Group Mailbox is a Routing Mailbox (2), go to 47-15 Routing Mailbox
Directory Options on page 3-82 to set up the Group Mailbox options.


See Routing Mailbox on page 2-301.
See Voice Mail Overflow on page 2-341.
Options
0 (None)
1 (Subscriber)
2 (Routing)
Default
1 (Subscriber)
InMail System Guide
3 - 35
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-03 Program Entry
47-03 VM8000 InMail Group Mailbox Options
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4703 + Option.
This selects the option chosen for Group Mailbox 1.
There are 32 available Group Mailboxes (1~32).
02
Mailbox Number (Digits, 8 max using 0~9) [No Setting]
03
Mailbox Type (0 = None, 1=Subscriber, 2 = Routing) [1]
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Mic
Mic + Mailbox number + Mic selects a new mailbox number.
Answer

3 - 36
Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-06 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options
Description
Use 47-06 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options to set up a Group Mailbox assigned as a
Subscriber Mailbox in 47-03-03 Group Mailbox Type.

See the following for more:

Voice Mail Overflow on page 2-341
Options

47-06-01
Number of Messages
Use this option to set the maximum number of messages that can be left in
the Subscriber Mailbox. If a caller tries to leave a message after this limit is
reached, they hear, “That mailbox is full.” VM8000 InMail then hangs up.

See Routing Mailbox on page 2-301 for more.

See Message Storage Limit on page 2-267 for more.

See Voice Mail Overflow on page 2-341 for more.
Options
0~99 messages
To conserve storage space, enter 0 for all unused mailboxes.
Default
20

47-06-02
Message Playback
Use this option to set the Subscriber Mailbox message playback order.
When a subscriber listens to their messages, VM8000 InMail can play the
oldest messages first (first-in/first-out, or FIFO), or the newest messages
first (last-in/first-out, or LIFO).

See Routing Mailbox on page 2-301 for more.

See Message Playback Direction on page 2-261 for more.

See Voice Mail Overflow on page 2-341 for more.
Options
0 (FIFO - first-in/first-out, or oldest messages first).
1 (LIFO - last-in/first-out, or newest messages first).
Default
0
InMail System Guide
3 - 37
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-06-03
Auto Erase/Save of Messages
Use this option to determine what happens when a Subscriber Mailbox user
completely listens to a new message and then exits their mailbox without
either saving (SA) or erasing (E) the message. Depending on the setting of
this option, VM8000 InMail will either automatically archive or delete the
message. If the mailbox user hangs up before listening to the entire new
message, InMail retains the message as a new message.

See Auto Erase or Save on page 2-43 for more.

See Routing Mailbox on page 2-301 for more.
See Voice Mail Overflow on page 2-341 for more.
Options

0 (Erase)
After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, InMail
deletes the message.
1 (Save)
After the subscriber listens to the entire new message and hangs up, InMail
archives the message.
Default
1

47-06-04
Message Retention
Use this option to determine how long a Subscriber mailbox retains held
and archived messages. If a message is left in a Subscriber mailbox longer
than the interval, VM8000 InMail deletes it.
Options
0 (Indefinite)
1~90 days
Default
0

47-06-05
Recording Conversation Beep (Rec Conv Beep)
Use this option to enable or disable the Conversation Record beep. If
enabled, all parties on a call hear the voice prompt Recording followed by a
single beep when the extension user initiates Conversation Record. If
disabled, the voice prompt and beep do not occur. When you disable the
Conversation Record beep, the following voice prompts do not occur while
VM8000 InMail records the conversation:

Recording (followed by a beep)

That mailbox is full (if the mailbox message storage capacity is reached)

You have reached the recording limit (if the recorded message is too long)
The SV8100 telephone system software provides an additional
Conversation Record beep. This beep repeats according to the setting of
Program 45-01-06 Voice Mail Integration Options: Record Alert Tone
Interval Time (0~64800 seconds). To disable the SV8100 telephone system
Conversation Record beep, enter 0 for this option.
3 - 38
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

See Live Record on page 2-219 for more.

See Routing Mailbox on page 2-301 for more.

See Voice Mail Overflow on page 2-341 for more.
Options
1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
1

47-06-06
Message Waiting Lamp (Update MW Lamp)
Use this option to enable or disable Message Waiting lamp at the extension
associated with the Subscriber mailbox. For Subscriber Mailboxes, you
should leave this option enabled. For Guest Mailboxes, leave this option
disabled.

See Guest Mailbox for more.

See Routing Mailbox for more.

See Message Waiting Lamp for more.

See Subscriber Mailbox for more.

See Voice Mail Overflow for more.
Options
1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
1

47-06-07
Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail
Use this option to enable or disable Auto Attendant Do Direct to Voice Mail.
When a subscriber enables this PRG, an Automated Attendant caller routes
directly to the mailbox, hears the greeting, and is asked to leave a
message. A subscriber can also enable this PRG while recording their
mailbox greeting.

See Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail for more.

See Routing Mailbox for more.

See Voice Mail Overflow for more.
Options
1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
0
InMail System Guide
3 - 39
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-06-08
Forced Unscreened Transfer (Forced UTRF)
Use this option to enable or disable Automated Attendant Forced
Unscreened Transfer for the Subscriber Mailbox. If enabled, each Screened
Transfer (TRF) to the extension is converted to an Unscreened Transfer
(UTRF). If disabled, Screened Transfers from the Automated Attendant
occur normally.

See Forced Unscreened Transfer for more.

See Routing Mailbox for more.
See Voice Mail Overflow for more.
Options

1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
0

47-06-09
Auto Time Stamp
Use this option to enable or disable Auto Time Stamp for the Subscriber
Mailbox. If enabled, after the subscriber listens to a message VM8000
InMail announces the time and date the message was left. Auto Time
Stamp also announces the message sender (if known).
A subscriber can also enable Auto Time Stamp from their mailbox.

See Auto Time Stamp for more.

See Routing Mailbox for more.
See Voice Mail Overflow for more.
Options

1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
0

47-06-10
System Administrator (System Admin)
Use this option to designate the Subscriber Mailbox as a System
Administrator. This allows the subscriber to use the SA options after logging
onto their mailbox.

See Routing Mailbox for more.

See System Administrator for more.

See Voice Mail Overflow for more.
Options
1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
0
3 - 40
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-06-11
Dialing Option
Dialing Option provides additional dialing options for Next Call Routing
Mailbox calls (see 47-06-12 Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox). If
enabled, a caller who accesses the Subscriber Mailbox to leave a message
can dial any of the options in the Next Call Routing Mailbox’s Dial Action
Table. If disabled, the caller can only dial 0 (to use the Next Call Routing
Mailbox’s 0 action).

See Routing Mailbox for more.

See Next Call Routing Mailbox.
See Voice Mail Overflow for more.
Options

1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
0

47-06-12
Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox)
Use this option to assign a Next Call Routing Mailbox to the Subscriber
Mailbox. This provides callers with additional dialing options while listening
to a Subscriber Mailbox recorded or default greeting. The digits the caller
can dial depends on the setting of the Next Call Routing Mailbox and
Alternate Next Call Routing Mailbox options.

Refer to Dialing Options while Listening to a Subscriber Mailbox Greeting on page
2-276.

For options to dial while recording, see Record and Send a Message on page
2-297.

See the following features:

Auto Attendant Direct to Voice Mail on page 2-41

Call Forward to a Mailbox on page 2-55

Exiting a Mailbox on page 2-135

Leaving a Message on page 2-209

47-07 VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options on page 3-45

Next Call Routing Mailbox on page 2-275

Voice Mail Overflow on page 2-341
Options
Call Routing Mailbox Number (0~32)
No entry (entered by pressing CLEAR)
Default
1 (Call Routing Mailbox 1)
By default, Call Routing Mailbox numbers are 1~16.
InMail System Guide
3 - 41
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-06-13
Directory List Number
Specify the Directory List number to which the Group Mailbox belongs.
Options
0 = None
1~8 = List Number
 = All
Default
0

47-06-14
Voice Prompt Language
Use this option to specify the language used for each Subscriber Mailbox.
The VM8000 InMail comes with three language prompts: US English,
Mexican Spanish and Canadian French. Each mailbox can use any one of
these languages. Additional languages can be licensed on the CCPU and
the prompt sets downloaded from the support web page.
Options
01 - US English
02 - UK English
03 - Australian English
04 - French Canadian
05 - Dutch
06 - Mexican Spanish
07 - Latin America Spanish
08 - Italian
09 - German
10 - Madrid Spanish
11 - Norwegian
12 - Parisian French
13 - Brazilian Portuguese
14 - Japanese
15 - Mandarin Chinese
16 - Korean
17 - Iberian Portuguese
18 - Greek
19 - Danish
20 - Swedish
21 - Thai
22 - Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 - Flemish
24 - Turkish
Default
01
3 - 42
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-06-17
Telephone User Interface Type
Use this option to set if caller hear options in Numeric (press 1 for
yes) or Mnemonic (press L to listen to messages).
Options
0 = Numeric
1 = Mnemonic
Default
0

47-06-18
Enable E-mail Notification
Options
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default
0

47-06-19
E-mail Address
Options
Up to 48 characters
Default
No setting

47-06-20
Include Message as Attachment
Options
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default
1
InMail System Guide
3 - 43
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-06 Program Entry
47-06 Group Mailbox Subscriber Options Program Entry
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4706 + Option.
This selects the option chosen for Group Subscriber Mailbox 1.
There are 32 available Group Mailboxes (1~32).
01
Number of Messages (0~99) [20]
02
Message Playback (0=FIFO, 1=LIFO) [0]
LK1=FIFO, LK2=FIF0
03
Auto Erase/Save (0=Erase, 1=Save) [1]
LK1=Erase, LK2=Save
05
Rec Conv Beep (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [1]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
06
Update MW Lamp (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [1]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
07
Auto-ATT DND (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
08
Forced UTRF (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
09
Auto Time Stamp (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
10
System Admin (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
11
Dialing Option (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
LK1=No, LK2=Yes
12
Next CR Mbox (1~32, Hold = No entry) [1]
13
Directory List (1~8 = Lists 1~8, 0=None,  = All) [0]
Set Telephone User Interface (0 = Numeric, 1 = Mnemonic) [0]
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Mic
Mic + Mailbox number + Mic selects a new mailbox number
Answer

3 - 44
Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-07 VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options
Description
Use 47-07 VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options to set up the 32 Routing
Mailboxes. Routing Mailboxes can be either Announcement or Call Routing
Mailboxes.
Refer to the following:

Announcement Mailbox

Routing Mailbox
Options

47-07-02
Routing Mailbox Type (Mailbox Type)
Use this option to set the Routing Mailbox type: Call Routing (1) or
Announcement (2).
Options
0 (None)
1 (Call Routing)
2 (Announcement)
3 (Directory)
4 (Distribution)
Default
Mailboxes 1~8 = 1
Mailboxes 9~32 = 2
InMail System Guide
3 - 45
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-07-03
Voice Prompt Language
Use this option to specify the language used for each Subscriber Mailbox.
The VM8000 InMail comes with three language prompts: US English,
Mexican Spanish and Canadian French. Each mailbox can use any one of
these languages. Additional languages can be licensed on the CCPU and
the prompt sets downloaded from the support web page.
Options
01 - US English
02 - UK English
03 - Australian English
04 - French Canadian
05 - Dutch
06 - Mexican Spanish
07 - Latin America Spanish
08 - Italian
09 - German
10 - Madrid Spanish
11 - Norwegian
12 - Parisian French
13 - Brazilian Portuguese
14 - Japanese
15 - Mandarin Chinese
16 - Korean
17 - Iberian Portuguese
18 - Greek
19 - Danish
20 - Swedish
21 - Thai
22 - Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 - Flemish
24 - Turkish
Default
01

47-07-04
Telephone User Interface
Use this option to set if caller hear options in Numeric (press 1 for yes) or
Mnemonic (press L to listen to messages).
Options
0 = Numeric
1 = Mnemonic
Default
0
3 - 46
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-07 Program Entry
47-07 VM8000 InMail Routing Mailbox Options
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4707 + Option.
This selects the option chosen for Routing mailbox 1.
There are 32 available Routing Mailboxes (1~32).
02
Mailbox Type (1 = Call Routing, 2 = Announcement) [1~8 = 1, 9~32 = 2]
03
Set Prompt Language [01]
04
Set Telephone User Interface (0 = Numeric, 1 = Mnemonic) [0]
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Mic
Mic + Mailbox number + Mic selects a new mailbox number
Answer

Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

InMail System Guide
Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
3 - 47
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-08 Routing Mailbox Call Routing Options
Description
Use 47-08 Routing Mailbox Call Routing Options to set the options for mailboxes
assigned as Call Routing Mailboxes in 47-07-02 Routing Mailbox Type.

See Routing Mailbox for more.
Description

47-08-01
Dial Action Table
Use this option to assign the Dial Action Table to the Call Routing Mailbox.
The Dial Action Table defines the dialing options for the call Routing
Mailbox.

See Routing Mailbox and Dial Action Table for more.
Options
1~16 (Dial Action Table 1~16)
Default
1 (Dial Action Table 1)

47-08-02
Screened Transfer Timeout (Scrn Trf Timeout)
Use this option to set how long a Screened Transfer (TRF) from the
Automated Attendant rings an unanswered extension before recalling.

This option has a similar function as Customize: Mailbox Options: Call Routing:
[Call Handling] Options: Delay Rings Before Redirect Transfer in VM8000
InMail.
Options
0~255 seconds
Entering 0 causes immediate recall.
Default
15

47-08-03
Time Limit for Dialing Commands (Dialing Timeout)
This option determines how long VM8000 InMail waits for an Automated
Attendant caller to dial before routing the call to the Timeout destination.

Be sure your Dial Action Tables have a Timeout action programmed.

See Routing Mailbox on page 2-301 and Dial Action Table on page 2-89 for more.
If the caller waits too long to dial:

3 - 48
When the associated Dial Action Table has a Timeout action programmed,
the caller routes to that destination.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

When the associated Dial Action Table does not have a Timeout action
programmed, the Instruction Menu repeats 3 times and then VM8000
InMail hangs up.
Options
0~99 seconds
Entering 0 causes the Automated Attendant to immediately route callers to
the Timeout destination programmed in the active Dial Action Table.
Default
5

47-08-04
Fax Detection
Use this option to enable or disable Fax Detection for the Call Routing
Mailbox. In enabled, the VM8000 InMail Automated Attendant (when using
this Call Routing Mailbox) detects incoming fax CNG tone. The fax call then
routes to the company fax machine according to the setting of 47-15-09 Fax
Extension. If disabled, the Automated Attendant does not detect incoming
fax calls.

See Fax Detection on page 2-139 for more.
Options
1 (Yes - Enabled)
0 (No - Disabled)
Default
0

47-08-05
Fax Extension
Use this option to set the destination fax extension with the Fax Detection
setting for the Call Routing Mailbox is enabled.
See Fax Detection on page 2-139 for more.
Options

0~9, *, #
Default
Blank
InMail System Guide
3 - 49
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-08 Program Entry
47-08 Call Routing Mailbox Options
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4708 + Option.
This selects the option chosen for Call Routing Mailbox 1.
There are 32 available Routing Mailboxes (1~32).
01
Dial Action Table (1~16) [1]
02
Scrn Trf Timeout (0~255) [15]
03
Dialing Timeout (0~99) [5]
04
Fax Detection (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
LK1-No, LK2=Yes
05
Set Fax Extension (up to eight digits) [No Entry]
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Mic
Mic + Mailbox number + Mic selects a new mailbox number
Answer

3 - 50
Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-09 Announcement Mailbox Options
Description
Use 47-09 Routing Mailbox Announcement Options to set the options for mailboxes
assigned as Announcement Mailboxes in 47-07-02 Routing Mailbox Type.

See Announcement Mailbox on page 2-15 for more.
Options

47-09-01
Next Call Routing Mailbox (Next CR Mbox)
If you set up an Announcement Mailbox to answer Automated Attendant
calls, use this option to provide additional routing options to the Automated
Attendant callers. This option interacts with Repeat Count and Hang Up
After below.

For a detailed explanation of the interaction of these options, turn to the following
charts:

Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing on page 2-278

Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing on page 2-17

Announcement Mailbox on page 2-15 and Next Call Routing
Mailbox on page 2-275
Options
Call Routing Mailbox Number (1~32)
0 = Undefined
Default
0

47-09-02
Repeat Count
Enter the number of times you want the Announcement Mailbox message
to repeat to callers. After an Announcement Mailbox caller initially listens to
the message, it repeats the number of times specified in this option. This
option interacts with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Hang Up After when
providing routing options.

InMail System Guide
For a detailed explanation of the interaction of these options, turn to the following
charts:

Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing on page 2-278.

Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing on page 2-17.

Announcement Mailbox on page 2-15 and Next Call Routing
Mailbox on page 2-275.
3 - 51
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Options
0 (No repeats)
1~10 (Announcement repeats 1~10 times)
Default
0

47-09-03
Hang Up After (HangUp)
Use this option along with Next Call Routing Mailbox and Repeat Count
above to provide additional routing options to Automated Attendant callers.
PRG 47-07-02 must be set to 1 (Announce) for this setting to be used.

For a detailed explanation of the interaction of these options, turn to the following
charts:

Direct Announcement Mailbox Routing on page 2-278.

Routed Announcement Mailbox Routing on page 2-17.

Announcement Mailbox on page 2-15 and Next Call Routing
Mailbox on page 2-275.
Options
0 = None
This setting enables the option of sending the caller to another Call Routing
or Announcement box. The destination Call Routing box is set in 47-05-01.
If no destination Call Routing box is set, the system plays Goodbye to the
caller after playing the Call Routing Announcement Box greeting then
hangs up.
1 = Goodbye
When this setting is enabled the system plays “Goodbye” to the caller after
playing the Call Routing Announcement Box greeting, then hangs up.
Callers cannot be routed to another Call Routing box with this setting
enabled.
2 = Silent
When this setting is enabled the system will hang up the caller after playing
the Call Routing Announcement Box greeting. Callers cannot be routed to
another Call Routing box with this setting enabled.
Default
0
3 - 52
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-09 Program Entry
47-09 Announcement Mailbox Options
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4709 + Option.
There are 32 available Routing Mailboxes (1~32).
01
Next CR Mbox (1~32, 0=Undefined) [0]
02
Repeat Count (1~10, 0=No repeat) [0]
03
0 = None, 1 = Goodbye, 2 = Silent
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Mic
Mic + Mailbox number + Mic selects a new mailbox number
Answer

Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
InMail System Guide
3 - 53
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-10 VM8000 InMail Trunk Options
Description
Use 47-10 VM8000 InMail Trunk Options to assign VM8000 InMail options for each
trunk. Currently, only 47-10-01 Answer Table Assignment is available.

See Automated Attendant on page 2-47.
Options

47-10-01
Answer Table Assignment (Answer Table)
Use this Use 47-10 VM8000 InMail Trunk Options option to assign an
VM8000 InMail Answer Table to each Direct Inward Line (DIL) the
Automated Attendant should answer. The Automated Attendant follows the
routing specified by the selected Answer Table.

For more on setting up DILs to VM8000 InMail, see Section 7 Set Up Automated
Attendant to Answer Outside Calls.
Options
Answer Use 47-10 VM8000 InMail Trunk Options Table (1~8)
Default
1

47-10-02
Record Pad Control
Use this option to pad or attenuate the volume for messages recorded on or
greetings played to outside callers on a specific trunk.
Options
01~63 (-15.5dBm to +15.5dBm)
Default
32 (0.0 dBm)

47-10-03
Voice Prompt Language
This program is used to assign a language to calls that did not originally go
through the voice mail auto attendant. For example, a call rings directly to
extension 101 which is forwarded to voice mail. Extension 101 is set to use
English but the customer wants calls on trunk 10 to hear French. You
would assign trunk 10 as French in 47-10-03 and calls on that trunk that go
to voice mail will hear French but calls on other trunks will hear English.
Additional languages can be licensed on the CCPU and the prompt sets
downloaded from the support web page.
Options
01 - US English
02 - UK English
3 - 54
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
03 - Australian English
04 - French Canadian
05 - Dutch
06 - Mexican Spanish
07 - Latin America Spanish
08 - Italian
09 - German
10 - Madrid Spanish
11 - Norwegian
12 - Parisian French
13 - Brazilian Portuguese
14 - Japanese
15 - Mandarin Chinese
16 - Korean
17 - Iberian Portuguese
18 - Greek
19 - Danish
20 - Swedish
21 - Thai
22 - Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 - Flemish
24 - Turkish
25 - Arabic
26 - Russian
Default
01

47-10-04
Telephone User Interface
Use this option to set if caller hear options in Numeric (press 1 for yes) or
Mnemonic (press L to listen to messages).
Options
0 = Numeric
1 = Mnemonic
Default
0
InMail System Guide
3 - 55
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-10 Program Entry
47-10 VM8000 InMail Trunk Options
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4710 + Option.
There are 8 available trunks (1~8).
01
Answer Table (1~8) [1]
02
Record PAD Control (1~63) [32]
03
Set Language (01~20) [01}
04
Select Telephone User Notifies (0 =Numeric, 1 = Mnemonic) [0]
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Mic
Mic + Trunk number + Mic selects a new trunk.
Answer

3 - 56
Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-11 VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options
Description
Use 47-11 VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options to set options for the Answer
Tables. VM8000 InMail provides 8 Answer Tables (1~8). To set up the schedules for
each Answer Table, go to 47-12 VM8000 InMail Answer Table Schedule.

See Answer Table on page 2-27 for more information.
Options

47-11-01
Answer Schedule Override (Schedule Override)
Use this option to enable or disable Answer Schedule Override for the
selected Answer Table. If enabled and you make an entry for Override
Mailbox below, the active Answer Table routes calls to the Override
Mailbox.
 See Answer Schedule Override on page 2-23 for more.
Options
0 = No (Disabled)
1 = Yes (Enabled)
Default
0

47-11-02
Override Mailbox Category (Override MB Ctg)
Use this option to specify the category of the mailbox to which Automated
Attendant calls should route when you enable Answer Schedule Override.
VM8000 InMail mailbox categories are Subscriber Mailbox, Group Mailbox,
and Routing Mailbox.
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to the type of mailbox
(Subscriber, Call Routing, or Announcement) within the specified category:
InMail System Guide

If the Override Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the
mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message.

If the Override Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, the outside caller
hears the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement
Mailbox is programmed, VM8000 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or
provides additional dialing options.

If the Override Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox, the outside caller hears
the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial
Action Table.
 See Answer Schedule Override on page 2-23 for more.
3 - 57
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Options
0 (Undefined)
1 (Subscriber Mailbox – STA)
2 (Group Mailbox)
3 (Routing Mailbox)
Default
0

If any Input Data value is entered, the terminal displays the Override Mailbox Number
selection (below).
Override Mailbox Number (Override MB Num)
Use this option to specify the mailbox to which Automated Attendant calls
should route when you when you enable Answer Schedule Override. The
mailbox number you select in this option should match the mailbox category
specified in 47-11-02 Override Mailbox Category above.
Options
Digits (3 maximum, using 0-9).
Default
No entry

47-11-03
Default Mailbox Category (Default MB Ctg)
Use this option to specify the category of mailbox used as the Default
Mailbox. VM8000 InMail mailbox categories are Subscriber Mailbox, Group
Mailbox, and Routing Mailbox. VM8000 InMail uses the Default Mailbox
whenever an Answer Schedule is not in effect.
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to the type of mailbox
(Subscriber, Call Routing, or Announcement) within the specified category:

If the Default Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears the
mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message.

If the Default Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, the outside caller hears
the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement
Mailbox is programmed, VM8000 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or
provides additional dialing options.

If the Default Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox, the outside caller hears the
instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial
Action Table.
 See Answer Table on page 2-27.
Options
0 (Undefined)
1 (Subscriber Mailbox – STA)
2 (Group Mailbox)
3 (Routing Mailbox)
3 - 58
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Default
Answer Table 1 = 3
Answer Table 2~8 = 0

If any Input Data value is entered, the terminal displays the Default Mailbox Number
selection (below).
Default Mailbox Number (Default MB Num)
Use this option to set the Answer Table’s Default Mailbox number. VM8000
InMail uses the Default Mailbox when an Answer Schedule is not in effect.
By default, this occurs at all times other than Monday through Friday from
8:30 AM to 5:00 PM. The mailbox number you select in this option should
match the mailbox category specified in 47-11-03 Default Mailbox Category
above.

See Answer Table on page 2-27.
Options
Digits (3 maximum, using 0~9).
Do not enter leading zeros. (For example, for Routing Mailbox 1 enter 1, not
01 or 001).
Default
Answer Table 1 = 1
Answer Table 2~8 = No entry

47-11-04
Next Answer Table
When 10 Answer Schedules within an Answer Table are not sufficient, use
this option to link two Answer Tables together. VM8000 InMail treats the two
linked tables as a single 20-entry Answer Table.

See Answer Table on page 2-27 for more.
Options
Answer Table (1~8)
0 (Undefined)
Default
0
InMail System Guide
3 - 59
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-11 Program Entry
47-11 VM8000 InMail Answer Table Options
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4711 + Option.
There are 8 available Answer Tables (1~8).
01
Schedule Override (1=Yes - enabled, 0=No - disabled) [0]
LK1-No, LK2=Yes
02
Override MB Ctg (1=Station Mailbox, 2=Group Mailbox, 3=Routing Mailbox, 0=Undefined)
[0]
Override MB Num (Digits, 3 max., using 0~9) [No entry]
03
Default MB Ctg (1=Subscriber Mailbox – STA, 2=Group Mailbox, 3=Routing Mailbox,
0=Undefined) [0]
Default MB Num (Digits, 3 max., using 0~9) [Answer Table 1 = 1, Answer Tables 2~8 = No
entry]
04
Press this:
Next Answer Table (1~8, 0=Undefined) [0]
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Mic
Mic + Table number + Mic selects a new table.
Answer

3 - 60
Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-12 VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules
Description
Use 47-12 VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules to set up the VM8000 InMail Automated
Attendant Answer Schedules. There are eight Answer Tables, with up to 10 Answer
Schedules in each Answer Table.

See Answer Table on page 2-27 for more information.
Options

47-12-01
Schedule Type (Entryxx Schedule Type)
Use this option to assign a Schedule Type to the selected Answer
Schedule. The Schedule Type determines how the Answer Schedule
answers calls.

See Answer Table on page 2-27 for more.
The schedule can be one of the following types:
1.
2.
InMail System Guide
Day of the Week
A Type 1 Answer Schedule runs on a specific day of the week.
For this type of schedule, select:

The day of the week the schedule should run:

The schedule start time.

The schedule end time.

The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer
calls.
Range of Days
A Type 2 Answer Schedule runs for a range of days. For this
type of schedule, select:

The day of the week the schedule should start.

The day of the week the schedule should stop.

The time on the start day the schedule should start.

The time on the stop day the schedule should stop.

The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer the
calls.
3 - 61
Issue 8.0
VM8000
3.
Date
A type 3 Answer Schedule runs only on a specific day of the
year. For this type of schedule, select:




The specific date the schedule should run.
On the selected date, the time the schedule should start.
On the selected date, the time the schedule should stop.
The Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox used to answer the
calls.
Options
1 = Day of the Week
2 = Range of Days
3 = Date
0 = Undefined
Default
Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 2
All other schedules = 0

47-12-02
Answering Mailbox Category (Entryxx MB Ctg)
Use this option to specify the category of mailbox to which Automated
Attendant calls should route when the schedule is in effect. VM8000 InMail
mailbox categories are Subscriber Mailbox, Group Mailbox, or Routing
Mailbox.
VM8000 InMail handles the routing according to the exact type of
Subscriber, Group, or Routing Mailbox specified.

If the Answering Mailbox is a Subscriber Mailbox, the outside caller hears
the mailbox greeting (if recorded) and can leave a message.

If the Answering Mailbox is an Announcement Mailbox, the outside caller
hears the recorded announcement. Depending on how the Announcement
Mailbox is programmed, VM8000 InMail then hangs up, reroutes the call, or
provides additional dialing options.

If the Answering Mailbox is a Call Routing Mailbox, the outside caller hears
the instruction menu and can dial any option allowed by the associated Dial
Action Table.

See Answer Table on page 2-27.
Options
1 = Subscriber Mailbox – STA
2 = Group Mailbox
3 = Routing Mailbox
0 = Undefined
Default
3

3 - 62
When data is entered in 47-12-02, the terminal displays the Answering Mailbox
Number entry (next).
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Answering Mailbox Number (Entryxx MB Num)
Use this option to set the number of the Answering Mailbox the Automated
Attendant uses when the selected schedule is in effect. This mailbox is
defined in 47-12-02 Answering Mailbox Category.

This item number is different when using PCPro/WebPro due to the window layout
of the applications. Refer to the PCPro/WebPro applications for more information.

See Answer Table on page 2-27.
Options
Digits (3 maximum, using 0~9).
Default
Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 1
All other Answer Schedules = No entry

47-12-03
Day of the Week (Entryxx Day)
For Day of the Week (Type 1) Answer Schedules, use this option to select
the day of the week the Answer Schedule should be active.

See Type 1 (Day of Week) Example on page 3-67.

See Answer Table on page 2-27.
Options
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
Default
1

47-12-04
Start Day (Entryxx Start Day)
For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, use this option to select the
day of the week the Answer Schedule should start.

Refer to Type 2 (Range of Days) Example on page 3-69.

See Answer Table on page 2-27.
Options
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
InMail System Guide
3 - 63
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Default
1
Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 2
All other schedules = 1

47-12-05
End Day (Entryxx End Day)
For Range of Days (Type 2) Answer Schedules, use this option to select the
day of the week the Answer Schedule should end.

Refer to Type 2 (Range of Days) Example on page 3-69.

See Answer Table on page 2-27.
Options
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
Default
Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 6
All other Answer Schedules = 1

47-12-06
Date (Entryxx Date)
For Date (Type 3) Answer Schedules, use this option to select the date the
Answer Schedule should be active.

Refer to Type 3 (Date) Example on page 3-70.

See Answer Table on page 2-27.
Options
MMDD
For example:
0101 = January 1
1231 = December 31
0000 = No date set
Default
0000
3 - 64
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-12-07
Schedule Start Time (Entryxx Start Time)
Use this option to specify the time the Answer Schedule should start. It
applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and Date
(Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule run continuously, make the same
entry for 47-12-08 Schedule Start Time and 47-12-09 Schedule End Time.)

See Answer Table on page 2-27.
Options
HHMM (24-hour clock)
For example:
0130 = 1:30AM
1700 = 5:00PM
Default
Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 0830 (8:30AM)
All other schedules are undefined.

47-12-08
Schedule End Time (Entryxx End Time)
Use this option to specify the time the Answer Schedule should end. It
applies to Day of the Week (Type 1), Range of Days (Type 2), and Date
(Type 3) schedules. (To make a schedule run continuously, make the same
entry for 47-12-08 Schedule Start Time and 47-12-09 Schedule End Time.)

See Answer Table on page 2-27.
Options
HHMM (24-hour clock)
For example:
0130 = 1:30AM
1700 = 5:00PM
Default
Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 1700 (5:00PM).
All other schedules = 0000 (Undefined).
InMail System Guide
3 - 65
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-12 Program Entry
47-12 VM8000 InMail Answer Schedules
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4712 + Option.
There are 10 Answer Schedules (1~10) within each of the 8 available Answer Tables (1~8).
01
Entryxx Schedule Type (1 = Day of the Week, 2 = Range of Days, 3 = Date, 0 = Undefined)
[Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 2, All other schedules = 0]
02
Entry MB (1 = Station, 2 = Group, 3 = Routing, 0 = Undefined)
[Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 3, All other schedules = 0]
Entryxx MB Num (3 digits, using 0~9) [Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 1, All other schedules =
No entry]
03
Entryxx Day (1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, 3 = Tuesday, 4 = Wednesday, 5 = Thursday, 6 =
Friday, 7 = Saturday) [1]
LK1 = Sunday, LK2 = Monday, LK3 = Tuesday, LK4 = Wednesday, LK5 = Thursday, LK6 =
Friday, LK7 = Saturday
04
Entryxx Start Day (1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, 3 = Tuesday, 4 = Wednesday, 5 = Thursday, 6 =
Friday, 7 = Saturday) [Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 2, All other schedules = 1]
LK1 = Sunday, LK2 = Monday, LK3 = Tuesday, LK4 = Wednesday, LK5 = Thursday, LK6 =
Friday, LK7 = Saturday
05
Entryxx End Day (1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, 3 = Tuesday, 4 = Wednesday, 5 = Thursday, 6 =
Friday, 7 = Saturday)
[Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 6, All other schedules = 1]
LK1=Sunday, LK2=Monday, LK3=Tuesday, LK4=Wednesday, LK5=Thursday, LK6=Friday,
LK7=Saturday
06
Entryxx Date(MM/DD) (MMDD) [0000]
07
Entryxx Start Time (HHMM) [[Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 0830, All other schedules =
0000]
08
Entryxx End Time (HHMM) [Answer Table 1/Schedule 1 = 1700, All other schedules = 0000]
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Mic
Mic + Table number + Mic selects an Answer Table.
Mic + Mic + Entry number + Mic selects an Answer Schedule.
Answer

3 - 66
Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Type 1 (Day of Week) Example
In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:

Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Sunday from 8:30AM to
5:00PM.

Schedule 2 uses Subscriber Mailbox 3 and runs Wednesday from 10:30AM
to 5:00PM.

Schedule 3 uses Routing Mailbox 4 and runs Tuesday from 9:00AM to
10:00AM.

At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in
47-11-03 Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-03 Default Mailbox Number.
When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer
Schedules in the following order:
InMail System Guide
3 - 67
Issue 8.0
VM8000

Range of Days

Day of Week

Date
Type 1 (Day of Week) Example
Answer Table 1
Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Sunday from 8:30AM to
5:00PM.
47-12-01 Entry01 Schedule Type = 1
47-12-02 Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-03 Entry01 MB Num = 2
47-12-04 Entry01 Day = 1
47-12-05 Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-06 Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-07 Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-08 Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)
47-12-09 Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)
Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Wednesday
from10:30AM to 5:00PM.
47-12-01 Entry01 Schedule Type = 1
47-12-02 Entry01 MB Ctg = 1
47-12-03 Entry01 MB Num = 3
47-12-04 Entry01 Day = 4
47-12-05 Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-06 Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-07 Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-08 Entry01 Start Time = 1030 (10:30AM)
47-12-09 Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)
Answer Schedule 3
Answer Schedule 3 is a Day of Week schedule that runs Tuesday from9:00AM to
10:00AM.
47-12-01 Entry01 Schedule Type = 1
47-12-02 Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-03 Entry01 MB num = 4
47-12-04 Entry01 Day = 3
47-12-05 Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-06 Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-07 Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-08 Entry01 Start Time = 0900 (9:00AM)
47-12-09 Entry01 End Time = 1000 (10:00PM)
3 - 68
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Type 2 (Range of Days) Example
In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:

Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs Sunday through Wednesday
from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.

Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 2 and runs Thursday and Friday from
11:00AM to 1:00PM.

At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in
47-11-04 Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-05 Default Mailbox Number.
When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer
Schedules in the following order:

Range of Days

Day of Week

Date
Type 2 (Range of Days) Example
Answer Table 1
Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Range of Days schedule that starts schedule that runs
Sunday through Wednesday from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
47-12-01 Entry01 Schedule Type = 2
47-12-02 Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-03 Entry01 MB Num = 1
47-12-04 Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-05 Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Sunday)
47-12-06 Entry01 End Day = 4 (Wednesday)
47-12-07 Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-08 Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)
47-12-09 Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)
Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Range of Days schedule that runs Thursday and Friday
from 11:00AM to 1:00PM.
47-12-01 Entry01 Schedule Type = 2
47-12-02 Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-03 Entry01 MB Num = 2
47-12-04 Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-05 Entry01 Start Day = 4 (Wednesday)
47-12-06 Entry01 End Day = 5 (Thursday)
47-12-07 Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-08 Entry01 Start Time = 1100 (11:00AM)
47-12-09 Entry01 End Time = 1300 (1:00PM)
InMail System Guide
3 - 69
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Type 3 (Date) Example
In this example, Answer Table 1 routes calls as follows:

Schedule 1 uses Routing Mailbox 1 and runs every day from 8:30AM to
5:00PM.

Schedule 2 uses Routing Mailbox 9 and runs only on Christmas Day from
8:30AM to 5:00PM.

At all other times, routing is handled by the Default Mailbox specified in
47-11-04 Default Mailbox Category and 47-11-05 Default Mailbox Number.
When setting up Answer Tables with multiple types, build the Answer
Schedules in the following order:

Range of Days

Day of Week

Date
Type 3 (Date) Example
Answer Table 1
Answer Schedule 1
Answer Schedule 1 is a Range of Days schedule that starts schedule that runs
every day from 8:30AM to 5:00PM.
47-12-01 Entry01 Schedule Type = 2
47-12-02 Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-03 Entry01 MB Num = 1
47-12-04 Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-05 Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Sunday)
47-12-06 Entry01 End Day = 1 (Sunday)
47-12-07 Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 0000 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-08 Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)
47-12-09 Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)
Answer Schedule 2
Answer Schedule 2 is a Date schedule that runs only on Christmas Day from
8:30AM to 5:00PM.
47-12-01 Entry01 Schedule Type = 3
47-12-02 Entry01 MB Ctg = 3
47-12-03 Entry01 MB Num = 9
47-12-04 Entry01 Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-05 Entry01 Start Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-06 Entry01 End Day = 1 (Entry does not matter)
47-12-07 Entry01 Date (MMDD) = 1225 (December 25, Christmas
Day)
47-12-08 Entry01 Start Time = 0830 (8:30AM)
47-12-09 Entry01 End Time = 1700 (5:00PM)
3 - 70
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-13 VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables
Description
Use 47-13 VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables to set up the VM8000 InMail Dial Action
Tables. The Dial Action Table defines the options than an Automated Attendant caller
can dial. A Dial Action Table is associated with a Call Routing Mailbox, which is in turn
associated with an Answer Table. When an Answer Table is active, its associated
Call Routing Mailbox selects the Dial Action Table which provides dialing options to
callers. The illustration below shows how this works in a default VM8000 InMail
system. There are 16 Dial Action Tables:
InMail System Guide
3 - 71
Issue 8.0
VM8000
.
DIL to Voice Mail Master (200)
22-01-01 Incoming Call Trunk Setup
22-07-01 DIL Setup
InMail
Default
Automated Attendant Answering
Trunks Route to Answer Table 1
47-10-01 Answer Table Assignment
Answer Table 1
47-11 Answer Table Options
Schedule 1 or Default Mailbox
47-12 Answer Schedules
47-11-03 Default Mailbox
Call Routing Mailbox 1
47-08 Call Routing Mailbox Options
Dial Action Table 1
47-13 Dial Action Tables
3 - 72
All calls route to Call Routing Mailbox 1
Schedule 1 active M-F 8:30AM-5:00PM
Default Mailbox active all other times.
From a System Administrator mailbox,
record an Instruction Menu (SA + I) for
the active Call Routing Mailbox.
Dial Action Table 1 Dialing Options:
Dial an extension number, or
O for the operator.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Dial Action Table Default Settings
Key

InMail System Guide
Dial Action Table 1
Dial Action Tables 2-16
1
UTRF to XXX
(Unscreened Transfer to userdialed extension)
UND
(Undefined)
2
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
3
UTRF to XXXX
(Unscreened Transfer to userdialed extension)
UND
(Undefined)
4
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
5
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
6
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
7
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
8
UND
(Undefined)
UND
(Undefined)
9
HNGUP
(Hangup)
UND
(Undefined)
0
UTRF to 101
(Unscreened Transfer to 101)
UND
(Undefined)
*
REC1 to IXXX
(Quick Message with greeting to
user-dialed extension)
UND
(Undefined)
#
LOGON to IXXX
(Logon to user-dialed mailbox)
UND
(Undefined)
TIMEOUT
UTRF to 101
(Unscreened Transfer to 101)
UND
(Undefined)
TIMEOUT provides the routing for rotary dial callers. See Automatic Routing for Rotary Dial
Callers on page 2-53 for more.
3 - 73
Issue 8.0
VM8000
TRF Action - Screened Transfer (1) (TRF)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place a Screened Transfer
to an extension. After an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000
InMail calls (screens) the destination to see if the transfer can go through.

If the destination is available, the Automated Attendant rings it. If the destination
answers, the call goes through.

If the destination doesn’t answer within a preset interval, is busy, or is in Do Not
Disturb, the Automated Attendant doesn’t extend the call. It then provides the
caller with additional options.
Number Option
Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note that the
key you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension
number.

For example, to allow callers to place Screened Transfers to extensions 101~108,
for key 3 enter TRF for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
To have Screened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding
Number option should be that extension number. The caller then dials that
single digit to reach the extension.

For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8 enter TRF for
the Action and 303 for the corresponding Number.
Additional Information
3 - 74

See the call routing chart detailed in Screened Transfer (TRF) Operation on page
2-308.

Also see Screened Transfer on page 2-307 and Unscreened Transfer on page 2-337.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
UTRF Action - Unscreened Transfer (2) (UTRF)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to place an Unscreened
Transfer to an extension. This is similar to telephone system unscreened transfers in
which the transferring party immediately extends the call. After an Automated
Attendant caller dials an extension, VM8000 InMail transfers the call to the destination
and hangs up. Any recalls or additional routing are handled by the telephone system
– just as with any other unscreened transfer.
Number Option
Normally, the corresponding Number option should be XXX. Note that the
key you choose for this action is the first digit of the called extension
number.

For example, to allow callers to place Unscreened Transfers to extensions
101~199, for key 3 enter UTRF for the Action and XXX for the corresponding
Number.
To have Unscreened Transfer call a specific extension, the corresponding
Number option should be that extension’s number. The caller then dials that
single digit to reach the extension.

For example, to have callers dial 8 to reach extension 303, for key 8 enter UTRF
for the Action and 303 for the corresponding Number.
Additional Information

Refer to the Unscreened Transfer (UTRF) Operation on page 2-338 to see the call
routing chart.

Also see Screened Transfer on page 2-307 and Unscreened Transfer on page 2-337.
REC1 Action - Quick Message With Greeting (3) (REC1)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick Message at
an extension. With this action, the caller hears the extension greeting prior to leaving
the message.
Number Options
To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the
corresponding Number option should be the extension number.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension,
the corresponding Number option should be IXXX.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a
specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX.

For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions 101~108, for
key 3 enter REC1 for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
Additional Information

InMail System Guide
See Quick Message on page 2-293 for more.
3 - 75
Issue 8.0
VM8000
REC2 Action - Quick Message Without Greeting (4) (REC2)
Use this action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to leave a Quick
Message at an extension. With this action, the caller does not hear the
extension’s greeting prior to leaving the message. Instead, the caller hears
the voice prompt “Recording” followed by a beep.
Number Option
To have the caller leave a quick Message at a specific extension, the
corresponding Number option should be the extension number.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at any caller-dialed extension,
the corresponding Number option should be IXXX.
To have the caller leave a Quick Message at a caller-dialed extension in a
specific range, the corresponding Number option should be XXX.

For example, to allow callers to leave a Quick Message extensions 101~108, for
key 3 enter REC2 for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
Additional Information

See Quick Message on page 2-293 for more.
LOGON Action - Log On to Voice Mail (5) (LOGON)
Use this key action to allow an Automated Attendant caller to log on to Voice Mail.
Depending on programming (see Number Option on page 3-76 below), the caller is
logged directly on to a Subscriber Mailbox or is prompted to enter a Subscriber
Mailbox of their own choosing. You cannot use the LOGON option with Call Routing
and Announcement Mailboxes.
Number Option
To log directly into a specific Subscriber Mailbox, enter the mailbox number
in the corresponding Number option.

For example, to have key 4 log directly into Subscriber Mailbox 305, for key 4 enter
LOGON for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Number.
To have VM8000 InMail request Automated Attendant callers to select a
Subscriber Mailbox to log into, enter N in the corresponding Number option.
The key you choose must represent the first digit in the Subscriber Mailbox
numbers.

For example, to have the Automated Attendant request callers to enter the number
of the Subscriber Mailbox into which they wish to log, for key 3 enter LOGON for
the Action and N for the corresponding Number. When callers dial 3, they hear,
“Please enter your mailbox number.”
To have VM8000 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a
Subscriber Mailbox to log on to (without playing an announcement), enter
XXX in the corresponding Number option. The key you choose must
represent the first digit in the Subscriber Mailbox numbers.

3 - 76
For example, to allow callers to log onto mailboxes 101~108, for key 3 enter
LOGON for the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
To log on to any valid Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the corresponding
Number option.

For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Subscriber Mailbox number to log
on, for key 1 enter LOGON for the Action and IXXX for the corresponding Number.
Additional Information

See Log On to Voice Mail on page 2-221 for more information.
Hang Up Action (6) (HNGUP)
When an Automated Attendant caller presses a key assigned to this action, VM8000
InMail says “Goodbye” and immediately hangs up.
Number Option
No entry is required in the corresponding Number option.
Additional Information

See Hang Up on page 2-181 for more.
GOTO Action - Go to Mailbox (7) (GOTO)
Use this option to provide Automated Attendant callers with the ability to route to Call
Routing and Announcement Mailboxes. For example, a caller can dial a digit for
Sales, and then go to the Call Routing or Announcement Mailbox that provides the
dialing options and instructions for sales.
Number Option
To have Automated Attendant callers dial a single digit to go to a Call
Routing or Announcement Mailbox, enter the mailbox number in the
corresponding Number option.

For example, to have key 1 go to Call Routing Mailbox 1, for key 1 enter GOTO for
the Action and 1 for the corresponding Number.
To have VM8000 InMail require Automated Attendant callers to enter a Call
Routing or Announcement Mailbox to go to, enter XXX in the corresponding
Number option. The key you choose must represent the first digit in the
mailbox numbers.

For example, to allow callers to go to mailboxes 1~16, for key 0 enter GOTO for
the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.
To log into any valid Call Routing or Subscriber Mailbox, enter IXXX in the
corresponding Number option.

For example, to allow callers to dial 1 plus any Call Routing or Announcement
Mailbox number to go to, for key 1 enter GOTO for the Action and IXXX for the
corresponding Number.
Additional Information

InMail System Guide
See Go To A Mailbox on page 2-161 for more information.
3 - 77
Issue 8.0
VM8000
UND Action - Undefined Routing (0) (UND)
Use this key action if you want a key to have no routing (no operation). When an
Automated Attendant caller presses an undefined key, they hear, “That is an invalid
entry.” The caller can then dial another option.
Number Option
Not applicable
Additional Information

See Undefined Routing on page 2-335 for more information.
Digits (0~9, #, and *)
Use Dial Action Table digits to route an Automated Attendant call to a specific location
(such as an extension). For example, to set up a TRF Action to route to extension
305, for digit 3 enter TRF for the Action and 305 for the corresponding Number.

See Dial Action Table on page 2-89 for more information.
Options
0~9, #, and * (8 digits max.)
Default

See Dial Action Table Default Settings on page 3-73.
Caller Dialed Digits (X) [Entered by pressing LK2]
Use the X option to route an Automated Attendant call based on digits the caller dials.
Each X entry represents one caller-dialed digit. For example, to set up a TRF Action
to route to any caller dialed extension in the 101~399 range, for digit 3 enter TRF for
the Action and XXX for the corresponding Number.

See Dial Action Table on page 2-89 for more information.
Options
X (Entered by pressing LK2)
Default

3 - 78
See Dial Action Table Default Settings on page 3-73.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Ignore Digits (I) [Entered by pressing LK3]
Use the I option to represent any digit dialed by the Automated Attendant caller that
VM8000 InMail ignores for routing. An example of this is REC action assigned to the *
key in Dial Action Table 1 by default. The Action is REC2 and the Number is IXXX.
This means that a caller can dial * + any mailbox number to leave a Quick Message in
that mailbox. VM8000 InMail ignores the first digit dialed by the caller (*), and routes
according to the next 3 digits dialed.

See Dial Action Table on page 2-89 for more.
Options
I (Entered by pressing LK3)
Default

See Dial Action Table Default Settings on page 3-73.
No Routing (N) [Entered by pressing LK1]
Use the N option when you want no Automated Attendant routing to automatically
occur. This can be used with the LOGON action when you want to prompt the caller to
enter a mailbox number. To do this for the # key (for example), for the # key enter
LOGON for the Action and N for the corresponding Number. When the caller dials #,
they hear: “Please enter the mailbox number. Or, to exit, press the pound key.”
Options
N (Entered by pressing LK1)
Default

See Dial Action Table Default Settings on page 3-73.
Pause (P) [Entered by pressing LK4]
Use the P option when you want the Automated Attendant to pause while dialing.
Options
P (Entered by pressing LK4)
Default

InMail System Guide
See Dial Action Table Default Settings on page 3-73.
3 - 79
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-13 Program Entry
47-13 VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
When entering Keyxx Action data:
0=Undefined, 1=TRF, 2=UTRF, 3=REC1, 4=REC2, 5=LOGON, 6=Hangup, 7=GOTO
LK1=Undefined, LK2=TRF, LK3=UTRF, LK4=REC1, LK5=REC2, LK6=LOGON, LK7=Hangup
When entering Keyxx Data data:
8 digits max, using 0~9, #, *, X, I, N, P
LK1=N (No routing), LK2=X (Caller-dialed digits), LK3=I (Ignore Digits), LK4=P (Pause)
Default Settings below are for Dial Action Table 1. All actions for Dial Action Tables 2~16 are undefined.
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4713 + Option.
There are 16 Dial Action Tables (1~16).
01
Key 01 Action [0-Undefined]
Key 01 Data [0]
02
Key 02 Action [0-Undefined]
Key 02 Data [0]
03
Key 03 Action [2 - UTRF]
Key 03 Data [XXXX]
04
Key 04 Action [0 -Undefined]
Key 04 Data [0]
05
Key 05 Action [0-Undefined]
Key 05 Data [0]
06
Key 06 Action [0-Undefined]
Key 06 Data [0]
07
Key 07 Action [0-Undefined]
Key 07 Data [0]
08
Key 08 Action [0-Undefined]
Key 08 Data [0]
09
Key 09 Action [6-Hangup]
Key 09 Data [0]
3 - 80
10
(0 key)
Key 10 Action [2 - UTRF]
11
(* key)
Key 11 Action [3-REC1]
12
(# key)
Key 12 Action [5-LOGON]
13
(Timeout)
Key 13 Action [2 - UTRF]
Key 10 Data [101]
Key 11 Data [IXXX]
Key 12 Data [IXXX]
Key 13 Data [101]
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-13 VM8000 InMail Dial Action Tables (Continued)
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Transfer
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or advance to the next
prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the selected option.
Navigation
Mic
Mic + Table number + Mic selects an Answer Table.
Mic + Mic + Entry number + Mic selects an Answer Schedule.
Answer

Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from Series to Program).

InMail System Guide
Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or Series.
3 - 81
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-15 Routing Mailbox Directory Options
Description
Use 47-15 Routing Mailbox Directory Options to set up the Routing Mailbox assigned
as a Directory Dialing Mailbox in 47-07-02 Routing Mailbox Type.

See the following for more:

Routing Mailbox on page 2-301.

Directory Dialing on page 2-95.
Options

47-15-01
Minimum Number of Letters Required
Use this option to specify the minimum number of letters the caller should
dial to be routed by the Directory Dialing Mailbox. Callers must dial this
minimum number of letters, followed by #. The entries for this option are
1-3.

Refer to Directory Dialing on page 2-95.
Options
1~3 (Minimum number of letters)
Default
1

47-15-02
Directory List Number to Use
Use this option to specify which Directory List the Directory Dialing Mailbox
should use. The Directory Dialing Mailbox can call only Subscriber
Mailboxes that are in the list specified by this option. The entries for this
option are 1~8.

Refer to Directory Dialing on page 2-95.
Options
1~8 (Directory List 1~8)
Default
1
3 - 82
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-15-03
Name Match
Use this option to determine which portion of the extension’s programmed
name Directory Dialing uses to route the call. The options are 0 (first) or 1
(last). The setting you choose in this option depends on how you set up
47-01-16 Name Format.

Refer to Directory Dialing on page 2-95.
See the following example:
47-01-16 Name
Format Setting
47-15-03 Extension
Name Match
Entered Name
1 (first-last)
0 (first)
Mary Jones
2 (last-first)
Directory Dialing
Routes by:
Mary
1 (last)
Jones
0 (first)
Jones
1 (last)
Mary
Options
0 (First name)
1 (Second name)
Default
0

47-15-04
Transfer Option
Use this option to define the action Directory Dialing uses when routing a
call. The entries for this option are 0 (Screened Transfer) or 1 (Unscreened
Transfer).

Refer to Directory Dialing on page 2-95.
Options
0 = TRF
1 = UTRF
Default
0

47-15-05
Screened Transfer Timeout
Use this option to set how long a Screened Transfer (STRF) from the
Directory Dialing Mailbox rings an unanswered extension before recalling.
The entry range for this option is 0~255 seconds. A setting of 0 = no recall.

The 24-02-04 Transfer Recall Time interval has no interaction with this timer.

Refer to Directory Dialing on page 2-95.
Options
0~255 seconds
0 (No recall)
Default
15
InMail System Guide
3 - 83
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-15-06
Time Limit for Dialing Commands
This option determines how long VM8000 InMail waits for the caller
connected to the Directory Dialing Mailbox to dial before repeating the
Directory Dialing Message. If the caller doesn’t dial within three repeats of
the message, InMail routes the call to the Next Call Routing Mailbox for the
Directory Dialing Mailbox (if any) or hangs up. The entry range for this
option is 0~99 seconds. A setting of 0 = no timeout.

Refer to Directory Dialing on page 2-95.
Options
1~99 seconds
0 (No timeout)
Default
5

47-15-07
Fax Detection
Use this option to enable or disable Fax Detection for the Directory Dialing
Mailbox. If enabled (1), the Directory Dialing Mailbox detects incoming fax
CNG tone. The fax then routes to the company fax machine according to
the settings of 47-01-06 Fax Extension. If disabled (0), the Directory Dialing
Mailbox does not detect incoming fax calls.

Refer to Directory Dialing on page 2-95.
Options
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Default
0

47-15-08
Next Call Routing Mailbox
Use this option to specify the Next Call Routing Mailbox (1~32) for the
Directory Dialing Mailbox. If a Next Call Routing Mailbox is specified, the
following occurs:

If the caller dials 0 while listening to the Directory Dialing Message, the call
routes to the 0 action programmed into the Dial Action Table associated
with the Next Call Routing Mailbox.

If the caller dials # while listening to the Directory Dialing Message, the call
routes immediately to the Next Call Routing Mailbox and the recorded
Instruction Menu Message for that mailbox is played.
 Refer to Directory Dialing on page 2-95.
Options
Call Routing Mailbox Number (0~32)
0 = No entry
Default
0
By default, Call Routing Mailbox numbers are 1~8.
3 - 84
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-15-09
Fax Extension
Options
Up to eight digits
Default
No Entry
InMail System Guide
3 - 85
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-15 Program Entry
47-15 Routing Directory Dialing Mailbox Options
(Entry Range) [Default Setting]
Speaker + #*#* + Password (12345678) + Transfer + 4714 + Option.
This selects the option chosen for Call Routing Mailbox 1.
There are 32 available Call Routing Mailboxes (1~32).
01
Min Num Letters (1~3) [1]
02
Directory List (1~8) [1]
03
Name Match (0=First portion of programmed name, 1=Second portion of
programmed name) [0]
04
Transfer Option (0=Screened Transfer, 1=Unscreened Transfer) [0]
05
Scrn Trf Timeout (1~255 seconds, 0=No recall) [15]
06
Dialing Timeout (1~99 seconds, 0=No timeout) [5]
07
Fax Detection (0=Disabled, 1=Enabled) [0]
08
Next CR Mbox (1~32, 0 = Undefined) [0]
09
Enter Fax Extension (Up to eight digits) [No Entry]
Press this:
To do this:
Editing
Hold
Enter (accept) data you entered and advance to the next prompt, or
advance to the next prompt without changing your entry.
-1
+1
Scroll backwards (-1) or forwards (+1) through the list of available
entries.


When editing an entry, moves the cursor left or right.
Hold
When editing an entry, Hold erases the entire entry from the display.
Line Keys (LK)
Where indicated, press a line key to enter a specific value for the
selected option.
Navigation
Mic
Mic + Mailbox number + Mic selects a new mailbox number
Answer

3 - 86
Backs up to the previous level (e.g., from Option to Series, or from
Series to Program).

Scroll consecutively backwards or forwards through selected Option or
Series.
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-16 InMail Language License
Description
This command defines the language order that the InMail can use. Depending on the
language license number, the InMail can use these languages defined in this
program, starting from Language 1. For example, if the system has 4 languages
license, the InMail can use the languages defined in the Language 1, 2, 3 and 4 in this
program.
Options

47-16-01
Language License
This command defines the language order that the InMail can use.
Depending on the language license number, the InMail can use
these languages defined in this program, starting from Language 1.
For example, if the system has 4 languages license, the InMail can
use the languages defined in the Language 1, 2, 3 and 4 in this
program.
Options
01 - US English
02 - UK English
03 - Australian English
04 - French Canadian
05 - Dutch
06 - Mexican Spanish
07 - Latin America Spanish
08 - Italian
09 - German
10 - Madrid Spanish
11 - Norwegian
12 - Parisian French
13 - Brazilian Portuguese
14 - Japanese
15 - Mandarin Chinese
16 - Korean
17 - Iberian Portuguese
18 - Greek
19 - Danish
20 - Swedish
InMail System Guide
3 - 87
Issue 8.0
VM8000
21 - Thai
22 - Mandarin Chinese (Taiwan)
23 - Flemish
24 - Turkish
Default
01 - US English
04 - French Canadian
06 – Mexican Spanish
3 - 88
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-17 Routing Mailbox Distribution Options –
Mailbox Type
Description
Use 47-17 : Routing Distribution Mailbox Options to assign data when Program
47-07-02 is set to 4 (Distribution).
Options

47-17-01
Routing Distribution Mailbox Options – Distribution Mailbox Category
This command defines the type of mailbox of a Distribution List member.
These settings are used if PRG 47-07-02 Routing Mailbox Type is set to
Distribution. You can have Station Mailboxes and/or Group Mailboxes as
members of a Distribution List.
Options
0 = Undefined
1 = Station Mailbox
2 = Group Mailbox
Default
0

47-17-01
Routing Mailbox Distribution Options – Mailbox Number
This command defines the mailbox number of a Distribution List member.
Options
Valid Station or Group mailbox number up to three digits.
Default
Undefined
InMail System Guide
3 - 89
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-18 VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup
Description
Use 47-18 VM8000 InMail SMTP Setup to set the SMTP relay parameters for e-mail
notification.

47-18-01
SMTP Enabled
Options
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default
0

47-18-02
Server Name.
Options
Up to 48 Characters.
Default
No Setting

47-18-03
SMTP Port
Options
0~65535 seconds
Default
25

47-18-04
Encryption
Options
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default
0

47-18-05
Authentication
Options
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default
0
3 - 90
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-18-06
User Name
Options
Up to 48 Characters.
Default
No Setting

47-18-07
Password
Options
Up to 48 Characters.
Default
No Setting

47-18-08
E-mail Address
Options
Up to 48 Characters.
Default
No Setting

47-18-09
Reply to Address
Options
Up to 48 Characters.
Default
No Setting
InMail System Guide
3 - 91
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-19 VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup
Description
Use 47-19 : VM8000 InMail POP3 Setup to set POP3 login parameters for e-mail
notification.

47-19-01
Server Name
Options
Up to 48 Characters.
Default
No Setting

47-19-02
POP3 Port
Options
0~65535 seconds
Default
110

47-19-03
Encryption
Options
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default
0

47-19-04
User Name
Options
Up to 48 Characters.
Default
No Setting

47-19-05
Password
Options
Up to 48 Characters.
Default
No Setting
3 - 92
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-20 Station Mailbox Message Notification
Description
Use 47-20 : Station Mailbox Message Notification to set the InMail Station Mailbox
Message Notification parameters.

47-20-01
Notification
Options
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
0

47-20-02
Notification Begin Hour
Options
00~23
(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)
Default
00

47-20-03
Notification End Hour
Options
00~23
(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)
Default
00

47-20-04
Notification Type
Options
0 = Undefined
1 = Voice
2 = Pager
Default
1 (Voice)

47-20-05
Notification Number
Options
Up to 16 digits
Default
No Setting
InMail System Guide
3 - 93
Issue 8.0
VM8000

47-20-06
Notification Busy Attempts
Options
1~99 (attempts)
Default
5

47-20-07
Notification RNA Attempts
Options
1~99 (attempts)
Default
5

47-20-08
Notification Security
Options
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
1
3 - 94
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0
47-21 Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me
Options
Description
Use 47-21 : Station Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to set the InMail Station
Mailbox Message Find-Me Follow-Me parameters.

47-21-01
Find-Me Follow-Me
Options
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
0

47-21-02
Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour
Options
00~23
(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)
Default
00

47-21-03
Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour
Options
00~23
(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)
Default
00

47-21-04
Find-Me Follow-Me Number
Options
Up to 16 digits
Default
No Setting
InMail System Guide
3 - 95
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-22 Group Mailbox Notification Options
Description
Use 47-22 : Group Mailbox Notification Options to set the InMail Group Mailbox
Message Notification parameters.

47-22-01
Notification
Options
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
0

47-22-02
Notification Begin Hour
Options
00~23
(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)
Default
00

47-22-03
Notification End Hour
Options
00~23
(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)
Default
00

47-22-04
Notification Type
Options
0 = Undefined
1 = Voice
2 = Pager
Default
1 (Voice)

47-22-05
Notification Number
Options
Up to 16 digits
Default
No Setting
3 - 96
Programming
VM8000
Issue 8.0

47-22-06
Notification Busy Attempts
Options
1~99 (attempts)
Default
5

47-22-07
Notification RNA Attempts
Options
1~99 (attempts)
Default
5

47-22-08
Notification Security
Options
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
1
InMail System Guide
3 - 97
Issue 8.0
VM8000
47-23 Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me
Options
Description
Use 47-23 : Group Mailbox Find-Me Follow-Me Options to set the InMail Group
Mailbox Message Find-Me Follow-Me parameters.

47-23-01
Find-Me Follow-Me
Options
0 = Off
1 = On
Default
0

47-23-02
Find-Me Follow-Me Begin Hour
Options
00~23
(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)
Default
00

47-23-03
Find-Me Follow-Me End Hour
Options
00~23
(00 = 12:00 AM, 23 = 11:00 PM)
Default
00

47-23-04
Find-Me Follow-Me Number
Options
Up to 16 digits
Default
No Setting
3 - 98
Programming
VM8000 InMail Utility
SECTION 1
VM8000 INMAIL UTILITY
This chapter introduces the VM8000 InMail Utility which allows the user to
do the following:

Determine the version of system voice prompts currently installed on
the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash card. Refer to Selecting the
CompactFlash Card on page 4-10.

Back up the system voice prompts and recorded names, messages
and greetings stored on the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash card to
your PC hard disk. Refer to Backing Up the VM8000 InMail
CompactFlash Card on page 4-11.

Restore the system voice prompts and recorded names, messages,
and greetings stored on the your PC hard disk to the VM8000 InMail
CompactFlash card. Refer to Restoring a Backed-up Database to
the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card on page 4-13.

Update the system voice prompts stored on the VM8000 InMail
CompactFlash Card (required for feature upgrades). Refer to
Initializing the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card on page 4-16.

Optionally, initialize (completely erase) the VM8000 InMail
CompactFlash card and load the latest system voice prompts. Refer
to Initializing the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card on page 4-16.

Optionally add or remove any of the supported language prompt
sets. Refer to Managing Language Prompt Sets on SV8100
VM8000 InMail on page 4-14.
Chapter
4
WARNING
The SV8100 system must be powered off and the
InMail drive must be removed from the
CD-CP00-US when using this utility. The
telephone system and InMail are inoperable
during this time.
InMail System Guide
4-1
Issue 8.0
SECTION 2
VM8000
REQUIREMENTS
When installing the VM8000 InMail utility, the following minimum requirements apply:
SECTION 3

Pentium® 330 MHz with 128 MB RAM, 256 Color 800 x 600 display, USB port.

Windows 2000, Windows XP (32-bit), or Windows 7/Vista (32-bit).

CompactFlash Card Reader (SimpleTech STI-UCF-100 or equivalent), or, if
your PC has a PCMCIA slot, PC Card Adapter for Type I CompactFlash Cards
(SimpleTech STI-CFAD or equivalent).
INSTALLING RELIANT FILE SYSTEM DRIVER
Attention:
The InMail Utility requires that a driver for the Reliance file system be installed before
the utility is installed. Currently, only Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Vista
and Windows 7 drivers are available.
4-2
1.
If a previous version of the InMail Utility is currently installed, first uninstall that version
and the Reliance file system driver then reboot the PC before continuing.
2.
Download the Reliance driver “reliance.windows.driver.v3.2.9.1376JE.msi”.
3.
To Install the Reliance driver, go to the location where the driver installation file was
saved.
4.
Double click on the install “MSI” file.
VM8000 InMail Utility
VM8000
Issue 8.0
5.
When
prompted,
choose Next
to continue.
Figure 4-1 Install Wizard for Datalight Reliance Windows Driver
6.
Accept the
license
agreement
and choose
Next to
continue
installation.
Figure 4-2 EULA Agreement Screen
InMail System Guide
4-3
Issue 8.0
VM8000
7.
Click Next to
use the default
installation
directory
(Recommended).
Figure 4-3 Destination Folder Screen
8.
Click Install.
Figure 4-4 Begin Installation Screen
4-4
VM8000 InMail Utility
VM8000
Issue 8.0
9.
Click Finish
to complete
the
installation.
Figure 4-5 Finish Installation Screen
10.
To finish the
install, the PC
must be
rebooted.
This can be
done now or
later, but it
must be done
before using
the InMail
Utility.
Figure 4-6 Reboot PC Screen
InMail System Guide
4-5
Issue 8.0
SECTION 4
VM8000
INSTALLING THE VM8000 INMAIL UTILITY
Attention:
The InMail Utility requires that a driver for the Reliance file system be installed before
the utility is installed. Currently, only Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows Vista
and Windows 7 drivers are available.
Installation
1.
If the PC has an older version of the VM8000 InMail Utility, un-install it first. If the PC
does not have an older version of the VM8000 InMail Utility, proceed to step 2.
2.
Double-click
the installer
(e.g.,
InMailUtilitySet
up_v1.00.exe).
After the
installer starts,
Figure 4-7
InMail Utility
Install Wizard
Welcome
Screen is
displayed.
3.
Click Next, on
the Install
Wizard
Welcome
Screen.
Figure 4-7 InMail Utility Install Wizard Welcome Screen
4-6
VM8000 InMail Utility
VM8000
Issue 8.0
4.
On the Install
Wizard
Completion
Screen
(Figure 4-8),
click Finish.
This
completes
the
installation.
Figure 4-8 InMail Utility Install Wizard Install Completion Screen
InMail System Guide
4-7
Issue 8.0
SECTION 5
VM8000
USING VM8000 INMAIL UTILITY
Starting the VM8000 InMail Utility
4-8
1.
Turn off the
telephone system
and access the
VM8000 InMail
blade. (Refer to the
VM8000 InMail
Quick Setup Guide
that came with
In-Mail for
additional
instructions, if
required.)
2.
Following proper
anti-static
precautions,
remove the
VM8000 InMail
CompactFlash
Figure 4-9 Removing the CompactFlash Card from the Blade
Card from the
In-Mail blade.
(Refer to Figure 4-9
Removing the
CompactFlash Card from the Blade.)
3.
Insert the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card in the PC CompactFlash Card reader.
VM8000 InMail Utility
VM8000
Issue 8.0
4.
Double-click the VM8000 InMail Utility shortcut on the PC desktop. The VM8000 InMail
Utility Main Screen is displayed. (Refer to Figure 4-10 InMail Utility Main Screen.)
To check the utility version
number, click Help, then
select About SV8100 InMail
Utility...
Prompt Version the
version of the system
prompts on the InMail
Compact Flash card.
Select the
CompactFlash Reader
and display important
InMail CompactFlash
card information.
Backup to the PC and
Restore the voice
prompts and recorded
names, messages and
greetings stored on the
InMail CompactFlash
Card.
Optionally Initialize
(completely erase) the
InMail CompactFlash
card and load the latest
voice prompts.
Update the voice
prompts stored on the
InMail CompactFlash
Card (required for
feature upgrades).
Figure 4-10 InMail Utility Main Screen
InMail System Guide
4-9
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Selecting the CompactFlash Card
After inserting the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash card into the reader, it must be
selected.
1.
From the InMail
Utility Main
Screen (Figure
4-10), click on
the drop-down
box.
Figure 4-11
Utility Select
InMail Card
Screen is
displayed.
 If the InMail
CompactFlash
Card is
changed in the
middle of an
InMail Utility
session, click
Refresh, then
Select to read
the new card.
2.
The Language
Prompt portion of
the Main Screen
updates with the
prompt version
information.
Refer to Figure
4-10 InMail Utility
Main Screen
Device Select the InMail
card from the drop-down
box.
Figure 4-11 Utility Select InMail Card Screen
Refresh Drivelist: This resets drive list if
InMail CF was connected to support PC after
Utility was started.
Device: The card reader
drive ID or volume label
(if any).
Figure 4-12 Updated InMail Portion of InMail Utility Main Screen
4 - 10
VM8000 InMail Utility
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Backing Up the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card
The voice prompts, and the recorded names, messages and greetings stored on the
VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card can be backed up to the hard drive on the PC.
1.
To back up the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card, click Backup on the InMail Utility
Main Screen (refer to Figure 4-10 InMail Utility Main Screen on page 4-9).
You can choose to backup any or all of the following:
- Extension Mailboxes
- Group Mailboxes
- Routing Mailboxes
- System Mailboxes
- VRS Mailboxes
- Outgoing Messages (Greetings, Instructions...)
- Incoming Messages (Subscriber...)
The Save As
(Backup) Screen
is displayed.
(Refer to Figure
4-13.)
 The default
backup directory
is
C:\NEC\In-Mail\
Backup.
 A directory for the
backup hard drive
of the PC. If
maintaining
several customer
sites, consider
making a
separate folder
for each site.
Figure 4-13 InMail Utility Save As (Backup) Screen
 Caller ID data,
stored as part of
an incoming voice message, are not retained during the backup. This information is lost.
 After the backup, messages stored in Subscriber Mailboxes may be restored as new messages.
2.
InMail System Guide
Select the location (Save in:) on the hard drive of the PC where the backup files are
stored and click Save. The backup may take several minutes.
4 - 11
Issue 8.0
VM8000
3.
When the backup
completes, either
click on Finish to
exit or click on
Report to see how
many messages
were backed up
for each mailbox.
Figure 4-14 Backup Progress Status Screen
Figure 4-15 Restore Data Report Screen
4 - 12
VM8000 InMail Utility
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Restoring a Backed-up Database to the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card
System voice prompts, and the recorded names, messages and greetings backed-up
on hard drive of the PC can be restored to the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card.
1.
To restore backed-up data to the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card, click Restore on
the InMail Utility Main Screen (Figure 4-10 InMail Utility Main Screen on page 4-9).
Dependant on what items are in the backup you can choose to restore any or all of the
following:
- Extension Mailboxes
- Group Mailboxes
- Routing Mailboxes
- System Mailboxes
- VRS Mailboxes
- Outgoing Messages (Greetings, Instructions...)
- Incoming Messages (Subscriber...)
2.
On the InMail
Utility Database
Restore Screen,
choose the
database to be
restored to the
card (Look In:
File name:) and
click Open.
(Refer to Figure
4-16.)
 Restoring a
database to an
In-Mail
CompactFlash
card erases all
the data
currently
stored on the
card.
 The restore
takes several
minutes.
InMail System Guide
Figure 4-16 InMail Utility Database Restore
4 - 13
Issue 8.0
VM8000
3.
Choose the
message to be
restored, then click
Restore.
4.
Once the InMail
Utility Restore has
completed click
Finish to close the
progress window.
Figure 4-17 Restore Message Screen
Managing Language Prompt Sets on SV8100 VM8000 InMail
Depending on SV8100 licensing the VM8000 InMail can support up to 20 languages
at the same time. At default, all InMail drives come with United States English,
Canadian French and Mexican Spanish loaded on them. The SV8100 also supports
three concurrent languages on the InMail, at default.
The SV8100 VM8000 InMail Utility includes all supported language prompt sets. If
desired default language prompt sets can be deleted to increase available recording
time or changed to a different language prompt set. This is done using the Manage
Languages selection from the Main Screen (refer to Figure 4-10 InMail Utility Main
Screen on page 4-9).
4 - 14
VM8000 InMail Utility
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Removing a Language Prompt
1.
From the Main
Screen click on
Manage
Languages.
2.
Click on the
language
prompt set to be
removed.
3.
At bottom of the
screen, click on
Remove. You
will get a
progress
window.
4.
Once the
prompt set has
been removed,
click Finish to
close the
progress
window.
Prompt Version the
version of the system
prompts on the InMail
Compact Flash card.
Figure 4-18 Manage Languages Screen
Adding a language prompt
1.
From the Main Screen click on Manage Languages.
2.
Click on the language prompt set to be added.
3.
At bottom of screen click on Install. You will get a progress window.
4.
Once the prompt set has been added, click Finish to close progress window.
InMail System Guide
4 - 15
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Initializing the VM8000 InMail CompactFlash Card
The VM8000 InMail Utility provides the option of initializing (reformatting) the InMail
Compact Flash drive. Initializing completely erases the card and loads the default
prompt set for the chosen market. For North America the prompt set is US English,
Mexican Spanish and Canadian French. All recorded names, messages and
greetings are permanently erased during initialization.

Initialization of the InMail CF takes approximately 15 minutes using a USB 1.0 port.
1.
To initialize
(reformat) the
InMail
CompactFlash
Card, click
Initialize on the
On the InMail
Utility Main
Screen (Figure
4-10 on page 9).
Figure 4-19
InMail Utility
Initialize
Confirmation
Screen is
displayed.
2.
Figure 4-19 InMail Utility Initialize Confirmation Screen
On the InMail Utility Initialize Screen, choose the market the InMail CF should be
initialized for. Then, click Initialize and the progress screen will appear. As each
language prompt set is installed, it will have a progress window.
Tips:
– Click Cancel on the Initialization progress window to stop the initialization.
– Click Cancel on any language install progress window to stop installation of that
language prompt set. The Utility will automatically move to the next prompt set.
4 - 16
VM8000 InMail Utility
VM8000
Issue 8.0
3.
Once the
InMail CF has
been
initialized,
click on
Finish to exit
the progress
window.
Figure 4-20 InMail Utility Initialization Progress Screen
InMail System Guide
4 - 17
Issue 8.0
4 - 18
VM8000
VM8000 InMail Utility
Soft Key Glossary
Following is an alphabetical index of the VM8000 InMail soft keys
(available for all multiline terminals with soft keys). Also see the Operation
section of each feature.
Soft Key
Feature
Definition
When programming a Message Notification time,
press to indicate that the entered time is AM.
AM
Message Notification
Annc
Announcement Mailbox
System Administrator
Press to access the Announcement Mailbox
message options.
ATime
Auto Time Stamp
Press to select the Auto Time Stamp feature.
Back
Answer Schedule Override
Announcement Mailbox
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Auto Time Stamp
Call Routing Mailbox
Erasing All Messages
Exiting a Mailbox
Greeting
Instruction Menu
Listening to Messages
Mailbox Name
Mailbox Sec. Code Delete
Main Menu
Message Forward
Message Notification
Message Reply
Record and Send a Message
Security Code
CallH
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Cancel
Announcement Mailbox
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Call Routing Mailbox
Conversation Record
Greeting
Instruction Menu
Mailbox Name
Message Forward
Message Reply
Record and Send a Message
Cncl
InMail System Guide
Chapter
5
Press to go back to the previous menu level or exit
your mailbox.
Press to access Call Handling options, Auto
Attendant Do Not Disturb and Paging.
Press to erase the current message, name, or
greeting.
5-1
Issue 8.0
VM8000
Soft Key
Feature
Chnge
Message Notification
Code
Security Code
Cont
Message Forward
Message Reply
Record and Send a Message
Del
Announcement Mailbox
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Call Routing Mailbox
Greeting
Instruction Menu
Listening to Messages
Mailbox Name
Message Delete
Security Code
DList
5-2
Distribution List, System
Administrator
Definition
Change the Message Notification setup.
Press to access the Security Code options.
Press to begin recording.
Press to delete the currently accessed message,
name, greeting, or Security Code.
Press to access Distribution List setup.
Done
Announcement Mailbox
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Call Routing Mailbox
Conversation Record
Greeting
Instruction Menu
Mailbox Name
Message Forward
Message Reply
Record and Send a Message
DVM
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Press to enable or disable the Auto Att. Do Not
Disturb option.
Greet
System Administrator
Press to erase a subscriber’s greeting from the
System Administrator Mailbox.
Greet
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Greeting
Main Menu
Press to access the Mailbox Greeting options.
Gr1
Gr2
Gr3
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Greeting
Press to select a Greeting
Instr
Call Routing Mailbox
Instruction Menu
System Administrator
Press to exit the recording mode while recording a
message, name, or greeting.
Press to access the Instruction Menu options.
Soft Key Glossary
VM8000
Issue 8.0
Soft Key
Feature
Lstn
Announcement Mailbox
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Call Routing Mailbox
Caller ID with Return Call
Greeting
Instruction Menu
Listening to Messages
Mailbox Name
Main Menu
Make Call
Message Delete
Message Forward
Message Reply
Time and Date Stamp
MBOX
Answer Schedule Override
Message Forward
Message Reply
Record and Send a Message
Msgs
Erasing All Messages
System Administrator
Press to erase all messages in the selected
Subscriber Mailbox.
Next
Message Notification
Press to skip to the next option without changing
your entry.
Next
Listening to Messages
While listening to a message, press to listen to the
next message.
Notfy
Message Notification
Press to access the Message Notification Options
Menu.
Num
Message Notification
Press to program a telephone number as the
notification destination.
Off
Answer Schedule Override
Auto Time Stamp
Message Notification
OK
Message Notification
On
Answer Schedule Override
Auto Time Stamp
Message Notification
PM
Message Notification
When programming a Message Notification time,
press to indicate that the entered time is PM.
Pager
Message Notification
Press to program a pager number as the notification
destination.
Paging
Park and Page
InMail System Guide
Definition
Press to listen to message, name or greeting.
Select another mailbox.
Press to turn the selected feature off.
Accept the notification number entered and back up
to the previous level.
Press to turn the selected feature on.
Press to enable or disable the Park and Page
option.
5-3
Issue 8.0
5-4
VM8000
Soft Key
Feature
Definition
Pause
Announcement Mailbox
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Call Routing Mailbox
Conversation Record
Greeting
Instruction Menu
Listening to Messages
Mailbox Name
Message Forward
Message Reply
Record and Send a Message
Press to pause while recording a message, name or
greeting.
Phone
Message Notification
Rec
Announcement Mailbox
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Call Routing Mailbox
Greeting
Instruction Menu
Mailbox Name
Main Menu
Record and Send a Message
Rpt
Listening to Messages
Resume
Announcement Mailbox
Auto Att. Do Not Disturb
Call Routing Mailbox
Conversation Record
Greeting
Instruction Menu
Mailbox Name
Message Forward
Message Reply
Record and Send a Message
Return
Exiting a Mailbox
Subs
Erasing All Messages
Mailbox Name
Mailbox Sec. Code Delete
Security Code
System Administrator
Press to select using a telephone number as the
notification destination.
Press to record a message, name or greeting.
Go back to the beginning of the message.
Press to resume while recording a message, name
or greeting.
Press to return to your mailbox.
Press to select the Subscriber Mailbox maintenance
options.
Soft Key Glossary
®
VM8000 INMAIL SYSTEM GUIDE
NEC Corporation of America
Issue 8.0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement